Instruction Manual: High Performance Compact Inverter

Instruction Manual
High Performance Compact Inverter
Thank you for purchasing our FRENIC-Multi series of inverters.

• This product is designed to drive a three-phase induction motor. Read through this instruction
manual and be familiar with the handling procedure for correct use.
• Improper handling might result in incorrect operation, a short life, or even a failure of this
product as well as the motor.
• Deliver this manual to the end user of this product. Keep this manual in a safe place until this
product is discarded.
• For how to use an optional device, refer to the instruction and installation manuals for that
optional device.
Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. INR-SI47-1094c-E

Copyright © 2006-2011 Fuji Electric Co., Ltd.
All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or copied without prior written permission from Fuji
Electric Co., Ltd.
All products and company names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks
of their respective holders.
The information contained herein is subject to change without prior notice for improvement.
Preface
Thank you for purchasing our FRENIC-Multi series of inverters.
This product is designed to drive a three-phase induction motor for fan and pump applications. Read
through this instruction manual and be familiar with proper handling and operation of this product.
Improper handling might result in incorrect operation, a short life, or even a failure of this product as
well as the motor.
Have this manual delivered to the end user of this product. Keep this manual in a safe place until this
product is discarded.
Listed below are the other materials related to the use of the FRENIC-Multi. Read them in
conjunction with this manual as necessary.
• FRENIC-Multi User's Manual (MEH457)
• RS-485 Communication User's Manual (MEH448b)
The materials are subject to change without notice. Be sure to obtain the latest editions for use.
Safety precautions
Read this manual thoroughly before proceeding with installation, connections (wiring), operation, or
maintenance and inspection. Ensure you have sound knowledge of the device and familiarize
yourself with all safety information and precautions before proceeding to operate the inverter.
Safety precautions are classified into the following two categories in this manual.
Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may

lead to dangerous conditions, possibly resulting in death or
serious bodily injuries.
Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may

lead to dangerous conditions, possibly resulting in minor or
light bodily injuries and/or substantial property damage.
Failure to heed the information contained under the CAUTION title can also result in serious
consequences. These safety precautions are of utmost importance and must be observed at all
times.
Application
• FRENIC-Multi is designed to drive a three-phase induction motor. Do not use it for

single-phase motors or for other purposes.
Fire or an accident could occur.
• FRENIC-Multi may not be used for a life-support system or other purposes directly related
to the human safety.
• Though FRENIC-Multi is manufactured under strict quality control, install safety devices
for applications where serious accidents or material losses are foreseen in relation to the
failure of it.
An accident could occur.
i
Installation
• Install the inverter on a nonflammable material such as metal.

Otherwise fire could occur.
• Do not place flammable object nearby.

Doing so could cause fire.
• Do not support the inverter by its terminal block cover during transportation.
Doing so could cause a drop of the inverter and injuries.
• Prevent lint, paper fibers, sawdust, dust, metallic chips, or other foreign materials from
getting into the inverter or from accumulating on the heat sink.
Otherwise, a fire or an accident might result.
• Do not install or operate an inverter that is damaged or lacking parts.

Doing so could cause fire, an accident or injuries.
• Do not get on a shipping box.

• Do not stack shipping boxes higher than the indicated information printed on those boxes.
Doing so could cause injuries.
Wiring
• When wiring the inverter to the power supply, insert a recommended molded case circuit
breaker (MCCB) or residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage
circuit breaker (ELCB) (with overcurrent protection) in the path of power lines. Use the
devices within the recommended current range.
• Use wires in the specified size.
• When wiring the inverter to the power supply that is 500 kVA or more, be sure to connect
an optional DC reactor (DCR).
Otherwise, fire could occur.
• Do not use one multicore cable in order to connect several inverters with motors.
• Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter's output (secondary) circuit.
• Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code.
Otherwise, electric shock could occur.
• Qualified electricians should carry out wiring.

• Be sure to perform wiring after turning the power OFF.
• Be sure to perform wiring after installing the inverter body.

Otherwise, electric shock or injuries could occur.
ii
• Ensure that the number of input phases and the rated voltage of the product match the
number of phases and the voltage of the AC power supply to which the product is to be
connected.
Otherwise fire or an accident could occur.
• Do not connect the power supply wires to output terminals (U, V, and W).
• Do not insert a braking resistor between terminals P (+) and N (-), P1 and N (-), P (+) and
P1, DB and N (-), or P1 and DB.
Doing so could cause fire or an accident.
• Generally, control signal wires are not reinforced insulation. If they accidentally touch any
of live parts in the main circuit, their insulation coat may break for any reasons. In such a
case, an extremely high voltage may be applied to the signal lines. Make a complete
remedy to protect the signal line from contacting any hot high voltage lines.
Doing so could cause an accident or electric shock.
• Wire the three-phase motor to terminals U, V, and W of the inverter, aligning phases each
other.
Otherwise injuries could occur.
• The inverter, motor and wiring generate electric noise. Take care of malfunction of the
nearby sensors and devices. To prevent the motor from malfunctioning, implement noise
control measures.
Otherwise an accident could occur.
Operation
• Be sure to install the terminal cover before turning the power ON. Do not remove the
covers while power is applied.
Otherwise electric shock could occur.
• Do not operate switches with wet hands.

Doing so could cause electric shock.
• If the auto-reset function has been selected, the inverter may automatically restart and
drive the motor depending on the cause of tripping.
(Design the machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured after restarting.)
• If the stall prevention function (current limiter), automatic deceleration, and overload
prevention control have been selected, the inverter may operate at an
acceleration/deceleration time or frequency different from the commanded ones. Design
the machine so that safety is ensured even in such cases.
iii
• The key on the keypad is effective only when the keypad operation is enabled with
function code F02 (= 0, 2 or 3). When the keypad operation is disabled, prepare an
emergency stop switch separately for safe operations.
Switching the run command source from keypad (local) to external equipment (remote) by
turning ON the "Enable communications link" command LE disables the key. To
enable the key for an emergency stop, select the STOP key priority with function code
H96 (= 1 or 3).
• If an alarm reset is made with the Run command signal turned ON, a sudden start will
occur. Ensure that the Run command signal is turned OFF in advance.
• If you enable the "Restart mode after momentary power failure" (Function code F14 = 4 or
5), then the inverter automatically restarts running the motor when the power is recovered.
(Design the machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured after restarting.)
• If you set the function codes wrongly or without completely understanding this instruction
manual and the FRENIC-Multi User's Manual (MEH457), the motor may rotate with a
torque or at a speed not permitted for the machine.
An accident or injuries could occur.
• Do not touch the inverter terminals while the power is applied to the inverter even if the
inverter stops.
Doing so could cause electric shock.
• Do not turn the main circuit power (circuit breaker) ON or OFF in order to start or stop
inverter operation.
Doing so could cause failure.
• Do not touch the heat sink and braking resistor because they become very hot.
Doing so could cause burns.
• Setting the inverter to high speeds is easy. Before changing the frequency (speed) setting,
check the specifications of the motor and machinery.
• The brake function of the inverter does not provide mechanical holding means.
Injuries could occur.
Wiring length for EMC filter built-in type
• When the wiring length between the inverter and motor exceeds 10 m, the filter circuit may
be overheated and damaged due to increase of leakage current. To reduce the leakage
current, set the motor sound (carrier frequency) to 2 kHz or below with function code F26.
Otherwise a failure could occur.
iv
Maintenance and inspection, parts replacement, and installation of an
option card
• Turn the power OFF and wait for at least five minutes before starting inspection, parts
replacement, and installation of an option card. Further, check that the LED monitor is unlit
and that the DC link bus voltage between the P (+) and N (-) terminals is lower than 25
VDC.
• Maintenance, inspection, and parts replacement should be made only by qualified
persons.
• Take off the watch, rings and other metallic objects before starting work.
• Use insulated tools.
Disposal
• Treat the inverter as an industrial waste when disposing of it.

Others
• Never attempt to modify the inverter.

Doing so could cause electric shock or injuries.
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
Drawings in this manual may be illustrated without covers or safety shields for explanation of
detail parts. Restore the covers and shields in the original state and observe the description
in the manual before starting operation.
v
Conformity to the Low Voltage Directive in the EU
If installed according to the guidelines given below, inverters marked with CE or TÜV are considered
as compliant with the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC.
1. The ground terminal G should always be connected to the ground. Do not use only a
residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB)* as
the sole method of electric shock protection. Be sure to use ground wires whose size is
greater than power supply lines.
*With overcurrent protection.
2. When used with the inverter, a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB), residual-
current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) or magnetic
contactor (MC) should conform to the EN or IEC standards.
3. When you use a residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit

breaker (ELCB) for protection from electric shock in direct or indirect contact power lines or
nodes, be sure to install type B of RCD/ELCB on the input (primary) of the inverter if the
power supply is three-phase 200/400 V. For single-phase 200 V power supply, use type A.
When you use no RCD/ELCB, take any other protective measure that isolates the electric
equipment from other equipment on the same power supply line using double or reinforced
insulation or that isolates the power supply lines connected to the electric equipment using
an isolation transformer.
4. The inverter should be used in an environment that does not exceed Pollution Degree 2
requirements. If the environment conforms to Pollution Degree 3 or 4, install the inverter in
an enclosure of IP54 or higher.
5. Install the inverter, AC or DC reactor, input or output filter in an enclosure with minimum
degree of protection of IP2X (Top surface of enclosure shall be minimum IP4X when it can
be easily accessed), to prevent human body from touching directly to live parts of these
equipment.
6. To make an inverter with no integrated EMC filter conform to the EMC directive, it is
necessary to connect an external EMC filter to the inverter and install them properly so that
the entire equipment including the inverter conforms to the EMC directive.
7. Do not connect any copper wire directly to grounding terminals. Use crimp terminals with tin
or equivalent plating to connect them.
8. To connect the three-phase or single-phase 200 V class series of inverters to the power
supply in Overvoltage Category III or to connect the three-phase 400 V class series of
inverters to the power supply in Overvoltage Category II or III, a supplementary insulation is
required for the control circuitry.
9. When you use an inverter at an altitude of more than 2000 m, you should apply basic
insulation for the control circuits of the inverter. The inverter cannot be used at altitudes of
more than 3000 m.
vi
Conformity to the Low Voltage Directive in the EU (Continued)
10. Use wires listed in IEC60364-5-52.

2
R ecomm ended wire size (mm )
Power supply voltage
*2 *2
*1
M ain circuit D CR
Applied R ated current (A) Control
power input *2 [P1,
motor of circuit
Inverter type [L1/R, L2/S, L3/T] Inverter P (+)]
rating M CCB or RC D/ELCB (30A,
[L1/L, L2/N ] output Braking
(kW ) 30B,
Grounding [ G] [U, V, W ] resistor 30C)
*3 *3 [P (+),
w / DCR w/o DCR w / DCR w /o DCR DB]
0.1 FRN0.1E1 -2
0.2 FRN0.2E1 -2 5
5
0.4 FRN0.4E1 -2
2.5
0.75 FRN0.75E1 -2 10 2.5 2.5 2.5
Three-phase
1.5 FRN1.5E1 -2 15
10
200 V
2.2 FRN2.2E1 -2 20 0.5

3.7 FRN3.7E1 -2 20 30 4.0
5.5 FRN5.5E1 -2 30 50 4.0 6.0 4.0 4.0
7.5 FRN7.5E1 -2 40 75 6.0 10 6.0 6.0
11 FRN11E1 -2 50 100 10 16 10 16
15 FRN15E1 -2 75 125 16 25 16 25
0.4 FRN0.4E1 -4
5
0.75 FRN0.75E1 -4 5
1.5 FRN1.5E1 -4 10
2.5
Three-phase
2.2 FRN2.2E1 -4 15 2.5 2.5 2.5

10
400 V
3.7 FRN3.7E1 -4
20 0.5
4.0 FRN4.0E1 -4E
5.5 FRN5.5E1 -4 15 30
7.5 FRN7.5E1 -4 20 40 4.0
11 FRN11E1 -4 30 50 4.0 6.0 4.0 4.0
15 FRN15E1 -4 40 60 6.0 10 6.0 6.0
0.1 FRN0.1E1 -7
5
0.2 FRN0.2E1 -7 5
Single-phase
2.5
0.4 FRN0.4E1 -7 10 2.5 2.5
200 V
2.5 0.5
0.75 FRN0.75E1 -7 10 15
1.5 FRN1.5E1 -7 15 20 4.0
2.2 FRN2.2E1 -7 20 30 4.0 6.0 4.0
MCCB: Molded case circuit breaker RCD: Residual-current-operated protective device

ELCB: Earth leakage circuit breaker
Note 1) A box ( ) in the above table replaces S (Standard type) or E (EMC filter built-in type)
depending on the product specifications.
Note 2) A box ( ) in the above table replaces A, C, J or K depending on the shipping destination for
three-phase 200 V and FRN3.7E1 -4 .
A box ( ) in the above table replaces A, C, E, J or K depending on the shipping destination for
single-phase 200 V and three-phase 400 V except FRN3.7E1 -4 .
*1 The frame size and model of the MCCB or RCD/ELCB (with overcurrent protection) will vary,
depending on the power transformer capacity. Refer to the related technical documentation for
details.
*2 The recommended wire size for main circuits is for the 70 C 600 V PVC wires used at an ambient
temperature of 40 C.
*3 In the case of no DC reactor, the wire sizes are determined on the basis of the effective input
current calculated under the condition that the power supply capacity and impedance are 500 kVA
and 5%, respectively.
vii
Conformity to UL standards and Canadian standards (cUL certification)
If installed according to the guidelines given below, inverters marked with UL/cUL are considered as
compliant with the UL and CSA (cUL certified) standards.
1. Solid state motor overload protection (motor protection by electronic thermal overload relay)
is provided in each model.
Use function codes F10 to F12 to set the protection level.
2. Connect the power supply satisfying the characteristics shown in the table below as an
input power supply of the inverter. (Short circuit rating)
3. Use 75 C Cu wire only.
4. Use Class 1 wire only for control circuits.
5. Field wiring connection must be made by a UL Listed and CSA Certified closed-loop
terminal connector sized for the wire gauge involved. Connector must be fixed using the
crimp tool specified by the connector manufacturer.
6. Short circuit rating

Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100 kA rms symmetrical
amperes, 240 volts maximum for Three-phase or Single-phase 200 V input class when
protected by a Circuit Breaker having an interrupting rating not less than 100 kA rms
symmetrical amperes, 240 volts maximum.
Suitable for use on a circuit capable of not more than 100 kA rms symmetrical amperes, 480
volts maximum for Three-phase 400V input class when protected by a Circuit Breaker
having an interrupting rating not less than 100 kA rms symmetrical amperes, 480 volts
maximum.
7. Integral solid state short circuit protection does not provide branch circuit protection.
Branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with the National Electrical Code
and any additional local codes.
viii
Conformity to UL standards and Canadian standards (cUL certification) (Continued)
8. Install UL/CSA certified circuit breaker rated 240 V or more for 200 V input, 480 V or more
for 400 V input between the power supply and the inverter, referring to the table below.
Standard type
Circuit breaker (A)

Required torque Wire size
2
Power Ib-in (N·m) AWG or kcmil (mm )
supply Inverter type
voltage
Main Main
Control circuit Control circuit
terminal terminal
FRN0.1E1S-2 5
FRN0.2E1S-2 5
10.6 (1.2)
FRN0.4E1S-2 5
14
Three-phase 200 V
FRN0.75E1S-2 10
FRN1.5E1S-2 15
4.4 20
FRN2.2E1S-2 15.9 (1.8) 20
(0.5) (0.5)
FRN3.7E1S-2 10 30
FRN5.5E1S-2 8 50
33.6 (3.8)
FRN7.5E1S-2 75
6
FRN11E1S-2 100
51.3 (5.8)
FRN15E1S-2 4 125
FRN0.4E1S-4 5
FRN0.75E1S-4 5
FRN1.5E1S-4 15.9 (1.8) 14 10
Three-phase 400 V
FRN2.2E1S-4 15
FRN3.7E1S-4 3.5 20
(0.4) (0.5) 20
FRN4.0E1S-4E
FRN5.5E1S-2 12 30
33.6 (3.8)
FRN7.5E1S-2 40
10
FRN11E1S-2 50
51.3 (5.8)
FRN15E1S-2 8 60
FRN0.1E1S-7 5
Single-phase 200 V
FRN0.2E1S-7 10.6 5
14
FRN0.4E1S-7 (1.2) 10
4.4 20
FRN0.75E1S-7 (0.5) (0.5) 15
FRN1.5E1S-7 15.9 12 20
FRN2.2E1S-7 (1.8) 10 30
Note) A box ( ) in the above table replaces any of the following alphabets depending on the
shipping destination.
- A, C, J, or K for three-phase 200 V class series of inverters and FRN3.7E1S-4
- A, C, E, J, or K for single-phase 200 V and three-phase 400 V class series of inverters
except FRN3.7E1S-4
ix
Conformity to UL standards and Canadian standards (cUL certification) (Continued)
EMC filter built-in type
Circuit breaker (A)

Required torque Wire size
2
Power Ib-in (N·m) AWG or kcmil (mm )
voltage
Main Main
Control circuit Control circuit
terminal terminal
FRN0.1E1E-2 5
FRN0.2E1E-2 5
10.6 (1.2)
FRN0.4E1E-2 5
14
Three-phase 200 V
FRN0.75E1E-2 10
FRN1.5E1E-2 15
4.4 20
FRN2.2E1E-2 15.9 (1.8) 20
(0.5) (0.5)
FRN3.7E1E-2 10 30
FRN5.5E1E-2 Output: 33.6 (3.8) 8 50

Input: 16.2 (1.8) 75
FRN7.5E1E-2
6
FRN11E1E-2 Output: 51.3 (5.8) 100
Input: 72.0 (8.1) 4 125
FRN15E1E-2
FRN0.4E1E-4 5
FRN0.75E1E-4 5
FRN1.5E1E-4 15.9 (1.8) 14 10
Three-phase 400 V
FRN2.2E1E-4 15
FRN3.7E1E-4 4.4 20
(0.5) (0.5) 20
FRN4.0E1E-4E
FRN5.5E1E-4 Output: 33.6 (3.8) 12 30
FRN7.5E1E-4 Input: 16.2 (1.8) 40
10
FRN11E1E-4 Output: 51.3 (5.8) 50
FRN15E1E-4 Input: 16.2 (1.8) 8 60
FRN0.1E1E-7 5
Single-phase 200 V
FRN0.2E1E-7 10.6 5
14
FRN0.4E1E-7 (1.2) 10
4.4 20
FRN0.75E1E-7 (0.5) (0.5) 15
FRN1.5E1E-7 15.9 12 20
FRN2.2E1E-7 (1.8) 10 30
Note) A box ( ) in the above table replaces any of the following alphabets depending on the
shipping destination.
- A, C, J, or K for three-phase 200 V class series of inverters and FRN3.7E1S-4
- A, C, E, J, or K for single-phase 200 V and three-phase 400 V class series of inverters
except FRN3.7E1S-4
x
Precautions for use
When driving a 400V general-purpose motor with an inverter
Driving a 400 V using extremely long wires, damage to the insulation of the
general-purpose motor may occur. Use an output circuit filter (OFL) if
motor necessary after checking with the motor manufacturer. Fuji
motors do not require the use of output circuit filters because
of their reinforced insulation.
Torque When the inverter is used to run a general-purpose motor,

characteristics the temperature of the motor becomes higher than when it is
and temperature operated using a commercial power supply. In the low-speed
rise range, the cooling effect will be weakened, so decrease the
output torque of the motor.
In running
general- When an inverter-driven motor is mounted to a machine,
purpose resonance may be caused by the natural frequencies of the
motors machine system.
Note that operation of a 2-pole motor at 60 Hz or higher may
Vibration cause abnormal vibration.
* The use of a rubber coupling or vibration-proof rubber is
recommended.
* Use the inverter's jump frequency control feature to skip
the resonance frequency zone(s).
When an inverter is used with a general-purpose motor, the
motor noise level is higher than that with a commercial power
Noise supply. To reduce noise, raise carrier frequency of the
inverter. Operation at 60 Hz or higher can also result in higher
noise level.
High-speed If the reference frequency is set to 120 Hz or more to drive a

motors high-speed motor, test-run the combination of the inverter
and motor beforehand to check for safe operation.
Explosion-proof When driving an explosion-proof motor with an inverter, use a

motors combination of a motor and an inverter that has been
approved in advance.
These motors have a larger rated current than
general-purpose motors. Select an inverter whose rated
Submersible
output current is greater than that of the motor.
motors and
pumps These motors differ from general-purpose motors in thermal
In running
characteristics. Set a low value in the thermal time constant
special of the motor when setting the electronic thermal function.
motors
For motors equipped with parallel-connected brakes, their
power supply for brake must be supplied from the primary
circuit. If the power supply for brake is connected to the
Brake motors
inverter's output circuit by mistake, the brake will not work.
Do not use inverters for driving motors equipped with
series-connected brakes.
If the power transmission mechanism uses an oil-lubricated

Geared motors gearbox or speed changer/reducer, then continuous
operation at low speed may cause poor lubrication. Avoid
such operation.
xi
Synchronous It is necessary to take special measures suitable for this
motors motor type. Consult your Fuji Electric representative for
details.
In running
special Single-phase motors are not suitable for inverter-driven
motors variable speed operation. Use three-phase motors.
Single-phase
motors Even if a single-phase power supply is available, use a
three-phase motor as the inverter provides three-phase
output.
Use the inverter within the ambient temperature range from

-10 to +50 C.
The heat sink and braking resistor of the inverter may
Environ-
Installation become hot under certain operating conditions, so install the
mental
location inverter on nonflammable material such as metal.
conditions
Ensure that the installation location meets the environmental
conditions specified in Chapter 2, Section 2.1 "Operating
Environment."
Install a recommended molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)

Installing an or residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth
MCCB or leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) (with overcurrent protection)
RCD/ELCB in the primary circuit of the inverter to protect the wiring.
Ensure that the circuit breaker rated current is equivalent to
or lower than the recommended rated current.
If a magnetic contactor (MC) is mounted in the inverter's

output (secondary) circuit for switching the motor to
commercial power or for any other purpose, ensure that both
Installing an MC the inverter and the motor are completely stopped before you
in the secondary turn the MC ON or OFF.
circuit
Remove the magnet contactor (MC) already installed and
built-in surge killer from the inverter's output (secondary)
circuit before installing the MC to switch the motor power.
Combina-
tion with Do not turn the magnetic contactor (MC) in the primary circuit
peripheral ON or OFF more than once an hour as an inverter failure
devices Installing an MC may result.
in the primary
circuit If frequent starts or stops are required during motor
operation, use terminal [FWD]/[REV] signals or the /
key.
The electronic thermal function of the inverter can protect the

motor. The operation level and the motor type
(general-purpose motor, inverter motor) should be set. For
high-speed motors or water-cooled motors, set a small value
for the thermal time constant and protect the motor.
Protecting the
motor If you connect the motor thermal relay to the motor with a
long wire, a high-frequency current may flow into the wiring
stray capacitance. This may cause the relay to trip at a
current lower than the set value for the thermal relay. If this
happens, lower the carrier frequency or use the output circuit
filter (OFL).
xii
Discontinuance Do not mount power capacitors for power factor correction in
the inverter’s primary circuit. (Use the DC reactor to correct
of power
capacitor for the inverter power factor.) Do not use power capacitors for
power factor power factor correction in the inverter’s output (secondary)
circuit. An overcurrent trip will occur, disabling motor
correction
operation.
Discontinuance Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter's output
of surge killer (secondary) circuit.
Combina-
tion with Use of a filter and shielded wires is typically recommended to
peripheral Reducing noise
satisfy EMC Directive.
devices
If an overvoltage trip occurs while the inverter is stopped or
operated under a light load, it is assumed that the surge
Measures against current is generated by open/close of the power capacitor for
surge currents power factor correction in the power system.
* Connect a DC reactor to the inverter.
When checking the insulation resistance of the inverter, use

Megger test a 500 V megger and follow the instructions contained in
Chapter 7, Section 7.5 "Insulation Test."
When using remote control, limit the wiring length between

Control circuit
the inverter and operator panel to 20 m or less and use
wiring length
twisted pair or shielded wire.
If long wiring is used between the inverter and the motor, the
inverter will overheat or trip as a result of overcurrent
Wiring length
(high-frequency current flowing into the stray capacitance) in
between inverter
the wires connected to the phases. Ensure that the wiring is
and motor
shorter than 50 m. If this length must be exceeded, lower the
Wiring carrier frequency or mount an output circuit filter (OFL).
Select wires with a sufficient capacity by referring to the

Wiring size
current value or recommended wire size.
When several inverters drive motors, do not use one

Wiring type multicore cable in order to connect several inverters with
motors.
Grounding Securely ground the inverter using the grounding terminal.
Select an inverter according to the nominal applied motor

rating listed in the standard specifications table for the
Driving
inverter.
Selecting general-purpose
motor When high starting torque is required or quick acceleration or
inverter deceleration is required, select an inverter with one rank
capacity larger capacity than the standard.
Driving special Select an inverter that meets the following condition:

motors Inverter rated current > Motor rated current
When exporting an inverter built in a panel or equipment, pack them in a previously

fumigated wooden crate. Do not fumigate them after packing since some parts
Transpor- inside the inverter may be corroded by halogen compounds such as methyl
tation and bromide used in fumigation.
storage When packing an inverter alone for export, use a laminated veneer lumber (LVL).
For other transportation and storage instructions, see Chapter 1, Section 1.3
"Transportation" and Section 1.4 "Storage Environment."
xiii
How this manual is organized
This manual is made up of chapters 1 through 10.

Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INVERTER
This chapter describes acceptance inspection and precautions for transportation and storage of the
inverter.
Chapter 2 MOUNTING AND WIRING OF THE INVERTER

This chapter provides operating environment, precautions for installing the inverter, wiring
instructions for the motor and inverter.
Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD

This chapter describes inverter operation using the keypad. The inverter features three operation
modes (Running, Programming and Alarm modes) which enable you to run and stop the motor,
monitor running status, set function code data, display running information required for maintenance,
and display alarm data.
Chapter 4 RUNNING THE MOTOR

This chapter describes preparation to be made before running the motor for a test and practical
operation.
Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES

This chapter provides a list of the function codes. Function codes to be used often and irregular ones
are described individually.
Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter describes troubleshooting procedures to be followed when the inverter malfunctions or
detects an alarm condition. In this chapter, first check whether any alarm code is displayed or not,
and then proceed to the troubleshooting items.
Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

This chapter describes inspection, measurement and insulation test which are required for safe
inverter operation. It also provides information about periodical replacement parts and guarantee of
the product.
Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter lists specifications including output ratings, control system, external dimensions and
protective functions.
Chapter 9 LIST OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT AND OPTIONS

This chapter describes main peripheral equipment and options which can be connected to the
FRENIC-Multi series of inverters.
Chapter 10 COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS

This chapter describes standards with which the FRENIC-Multi series of inverters comply.
Icons
The following icons are used throughout this manual.
This icon indicates information which, if not heeded, can result in the inverter not operating
to full efficiency, as well as information concerning incorrect operations and settings which
can result in accidents.
This icon indicates information that can prove handy when performing certain settings or
operations.
This icon indicates a reference to more detailed information.
xiv
Table of Content
Preface ............................................................i Chapter 4 RUNNING THE MOTOR..................... 4-1
Safety precautions ..................................................i 4.1 Running the Motor for a Test ..................... 4-1
Precautions for use............................................... xi 4.1.1 Inspection and preparation prior to
How this manual is organized ................................ xiv powering on ....................................... 4-1
4.1.2 Turning ON power and checking ....... 4-1
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INVERTER ..... 1-1 4.1.3 Preparation before running the motor
1.1 Acceptance Inspection .............................. 1-1 for a test--Setting function code data . 4-2
1.2 External View and Terminal Blocks............ 1-2 ＜Tuning procedure＞................................ 4-2
1.3 Transportation ........................................... 1-3 Errors during tuning................................ 4-4
1.4 Storage Environment ................................. 1-3 4.1.4 Test run.............................................. 4-4
1.4.1 Temporary storage ............................ 1-3 4.2 Operation................................................... 4-5
1.4.2 Long-term storage ............................. 1-3 4.2.1 Jogging Operation ............................. 4-5
Chapter 2 MOUNTING AND WIRING OF THE Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES ........................... 5-1
INVERTER ......................................... 2-1 5.1 Function Code Tables ................................ 5-1
2.1 Operating Environment.............................. 2-1 5.2 Overview of Function Codes.................... 5-18
2.2 Installing the Inverter ................................. 2-1 Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING........................ 6-1
2.3 Wiring ........................................................ 2-4 6.1 Before Proceeding with Troubleshooting ... 6-1
2.3.1 Removing and mounting the terminal 6.2 If No Alarm Code Appears on the LED
cover and the main circuit terminal Monitor ...................................................... 6-2
block cover ........................................ 2-4 6.2.1 Motor is running abnormally .............. 6-2
2.3.2 Terminal arrangement diagram and 6.2.2 Problems with inverter settings.......... 6-8
screw specifications .......................... 2-7 6.3 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED
2.3.3 Recommended wire sizes ............... 2-10 Monitor .................................................... 6-10
2.3.4 Wiring precautions............................2-11 6.4 If an Abnormal Pattern Appears on the
2.3.5 Wiring for main circuit terminals and LED Monitor while No Alarm Codeis
grounding terminals ..........................2-11 Displayed................................................. 6-24
2.3.6 Wiring for control circuit terminals ... 2-16
2.3.7 Setting up the slide switches ........... 2-23 Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION .. 7-1
2.4 Mounting and Connecting a Keypad........ 2-25 7.1 Daily Inspection ......................................... 7-1
2.4.1 Mounting style and parts needed 7.2 Periodic Inspection .................................... 7-1
for connection.................................. 2-25 7.3 List of Periodical Replacement Parts ......... 7-3
2.4.2 Mounting/installing steps ................. 2-26 7.3.1 Judgment on service life .................... 7-4
2.5 Cautions Relating to Harmonic Component, 7.4 Measurement of Electrical Amounts in
Noise, and Leakage Current.................... 2-28 Main Circuit................................................ 7-6
7.5 Insulation Test............................................ 7-8
Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD ... 3-1 7.6 Inquiries about Product and Guarantee ..... 7-9
3.1 LED Monitor, Keys and LED Indicators 7.6.1 When making an inquiry .................... 7-9
on the Keypad ........................................... 3-1 7.6.2 Product warranty ............................... 7-9
3.2 Overview of Operation Modes ................... 3-2
3.3 Running Mode ........................................... 3-4 Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS .............................. 8-1
3.3.1 Monitoring the running status ............ 3-4 8.1 Standard Models........................................ 8-1
3.3.2 Setting up frequency and PID 8.1.1 Three-phase 200 V class series ........ 8-1
commands ......................................... 3-6 8.1.2 Three-phase 400 V class series ........ 8-2
3.3.3 Running/stopping the motor .............3-11 8.1.3 Single-phase 200 V class series ....... 8-3
3.4 Programming Mode ..................................3-11 8.2 Models Available on Order
3.4.1 Setting up basic function codes quickly (EMC filter built-in type) ............................. 8-4
-- Menu #0 "Quick Setup" -- ............ 3-13 8.2.1 Three-phase 200 V class series ........ 8-4
3.4.2 Setting up function codes 8.2.2 Three-phase 400 V class series ........ 8-4
-- Menu #1 "Data Setting" -- ............ 3-15 8.2.3 Single-phase 200 V class series ....... 8-4
3.4.3 Checking changed function codes 8.3 Specifications of Keypad Related .............. 8-5
-- Menu #2 "Data Checking" --......... 3-16 8.3.1 General specifications of keypad....... 8-5
3.4.4 Monitoring the running status 8.3.2 Communications specifications of
-- Menu #3 "Drive Monitoring" -- ...... 3-16 keypad ............................................... 8-5
3.4.5 Checking I/O signal status 8.4 Terminal Specifications .............................. 8-6
-- Menu #4 "I/O Checking" -- ........... 3-19 8.4.1 Terminal functions ............................. 8-6
3.4.6 Reading maintenance information 8.4.2 Running the inverter with keypad ...... 8-6
-- Menu #5 "Maintenance Information" -- 8.4.3 Running the inverter by terminal
........................................................ 3-23 commands ......................................... 8-7
3.4.7 Reading alarm information 8.5 External Dimensions.................................. 8-8
-- Menu #6 "Alarm Information" -- .... 3-25 8.5.1 Standard models ............................... 8-8
3.5 Alarm Mode ............................................. 3-27 8.5.2 Models Available on Order
(EMC filter built-in type) ................... 8-11
8.5.3 Standard keypad.............................. 8-14
xv
8.6 Protective Functions ................................ 8-15
Chapter 9 LIST OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

AND OPTIONS................................... 9-1
Chapter 10 COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS . 10-1

10.1 Compliance with UL Standards and
Canadian Standards (cUL certification) ... 10-1
10.1.1 General ........................................ 10-1
10.1.2 Considerations when using
FRENIC-Multi in systems to be
certified by UL and cUL ............... 10-1
10.2 Compliance with European Standards .... 10-1
10.3 Compliance with EMC Standards ............ 10-2
10.3.1 General ........................................... 10-2
10.3.2 Recommended installation
procedure ........................................ 10-2
10.3.3 Leakage current from EMC-filter
built-in type inverters or inverters with
an external EMC-complaint filter
(optional) ......................................... 10-5
10.4 Harmonic Component Regulation in the
EU ........................................................... 10-7
10.4.1 General comments .......................... 10-7
10.4.2 Compliance with the harmonic
component regulation...................... 10-8
10.5 Compliance with the Low Voltage Directive
in the EU ................................................. 10-8
10.5.1 General ........................................... 10-8
10.5.2 Points for consideration when using
the FRENIC-Multi series in a system
to be certified by the Low Voltage
Directive in the EU .......................... 10-8
xvi
Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INVERTER
1.1 Acceptance Inspection
Unpack the package and check the following:
(1) An inverter and accessories below are contained in the package.
• Cooling fan fixing screws (for inverters of 5.5 to 15 kW)
• Keypad rear cover (with fixing screws)
• Instruction manual (this manual)
(2) The inverter has not been damaged during transportation—there should be no dents or parts
missing.
(3) The inverter is the model you ordered. You can check the model name and specifications on the
main nameplate. (Main and sub nameplates are attached to the inverter and are located as
shown on the following page.)
(a) Main Nameplate (b) Sub Nameplate

Figure 1.1 Nameplates
TYPE: Type of inverter
* The nominal applied motor rating of FRN4.0E1S-4E to be shipped to the EU is 4.0 kW.
Note: When "None" and "w/o braking resistor (standard)" are selected in the built-in option and brake in the above
codes, respectively, the type of inverter is written without the last 2 digits as a standard model.
SOURCE: Number of input phases (three-phase: 3PH, single-phase: 1PH), input voltage, input
frequency, input current
OUTPUT: Number of output phases, rated output capacity, rated output voltage, output frequency
range, rated output current, overload capacity
MASS: Mass of the inverter in kilogram (37 kW or above)
SER. No.: Product number manufacturing date
W05A123A0001Z 019
Production week
This indicates the week number that is numbered
from 1st week of January.
The 1st week of January is indicated as '01'.
Production year: Last digit of year
If you suspect the product is not working properly or if you have any questions about your product,
1-1
1.2 External View and Terminal Blocks
(1) Outside and inside views
Figure 1.2 Outside and Inside Views of Inverters (FRN15E1S-2 )
(2) Warning plates and label
Figure 1.3 Warning Plate and Sub Nameplate

(3) Terminal block location
(a) FRN0.75E1S-2 (b) FRN15E1S-2

Figure 1.4 Terminal Blocks
Note: A box ( ) in the above model names replaces A, C, J, or K depending on the shipping destination.
1-2
1.3 Transportation
• When carrying an inverter, always support its bottom at the right and left sides with both hands. Do
not hold covers or individual parts only.
• Avoid applying excessively strong force to the terminal block covers as they are made of plastic
and are easily broken.
1.4 Storage Environment

1.4.1 Temporary storage
Store the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed in Table 1.1.
Table 1.1 Environmental Requirements for Storage and Transportation
Item Requirements
Storage temperature *1 -25 to +70 C A location where the inverter is not subject to abrupt changes
Relative humidity in temperature that would result in the formation of
5 to 95% *2 condensation or ice.
Atmosphere The inverter must not be exposed to dust, direct sunlight, corrosive or
flammable gases, oil mist, vapor, water drops or vibration. The atmosphere
must contain only a low level of salt. (0.01 mg/cm2 or less per year)
Atmospheric pressure 86 to 106 kPa (in storage)
70 to 106 kPa (during transportation)
*1 Assuming a comparatively short storage period (e.g., during transportation or the like).
*2 Even if the humidity is within the specified requirements, avoid such places where the inverter will be
subjected to sudden changes in temperature that will cause condensation to form.
Precautions for temporary storage
(1) Do not leave the inverter directly on the floor.
(2) If the environment does not satisfy the specified requirements, wrap the inverter in an airtight
vinyl sheet or the like for storage.
(3) If the inverter is to be stored in an environment with a high level of humidity, put a drying agent
(such as silica gel) in the airtight package described in item (2).
1.4.2 Long-term storage

The long-term storage methods for the inverter vary largely according to the environment of the
storage site. General storage methods are described below.
(1) The storage site must satisfy the requirements specified for temporary storage.
However, for storage exceeding three months, the ambient temperature should be within the
range from -10 to +30°C. This is to prevent the electrolytic capacitors in the inverter from
deteriorating.
(2) The inverter must be stored in a package that is airtight to protect it from moisture. Include a
drying agent inside the package to maintain the relative humidity inside the package within 70%.
(3) If the inverter has been installed in the equipment or control panel at a construction site where it
may be subjected to humidity, dust or dirt, then remove the inverter and store it in a suitable
environment specified in Table 1.1.
Precautions for storage over 1 year
If the inverter will not be powered on for a long time, the property of the electrolytic capacitors may
deteriorate. Power the inverters on once a year and keep them on for 30 to 60 minutes. Do not
connect the inverter to a motor or run the motor.
1-3
Chapter 2 MOUNTING AND WIRING OF THE INVERTER
2.1 Operating Environment
Install the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed in Table 2.1.
Table 2.1 Environmental Requirements Table 2.2 Output Current Derating Factor
in Relation to Altitude
Item Specifications
Output current
Site location Indoors Altitude
derating factor
Ambient -10 to +50 C (Note 1) 1000 m or lower 1.00
temperature
1000 to 1500 m 0.97
Relative 5 to 95% (No condensation)
humidity 1500 to 2000 m 0.95
Atmosphere The inverter must not be exposed to dust, 2000 to 2500 m 0.91
direct sunlight, corrosive gases, flammable
gas, oil mist, vapor or water drops. (Note 2) 2500 to 3000 m 0.88
The atmosphere can contain only a low level
of salt. (Note 1) When inverters are mounted
(0.01 mg/cm2 or less per year) side-by-side without any gap between them
(less than 5.5 kW), the ambient temperature
The inverter must not be subjected to sudden
should be within the range from -10 to +40 C.
changes in temperature that will cause
condensation to form. (Note 2) Do not install the inverter in an
environment where it may be exposed to
Altitude 1000 m max. (Note 3) cotton waste or moist dust or dirt which will
clog the heat sink in the inverter. If the
Atmospheric 86 to 106 kPa inverter is to be used in such an environment,
pressure install it in the panel of your system or other
dustproof containers.
Vibration 3 mm (Max. amplitude) 2 to less than 9 Hz
9.8 m/s2 9 to less than 20 Hz (Note 3) If you use the inverter in an altitude
2 m/s2 20 to less than 55 Hz above 1000 m, you should apply an output
current derating factor as listed in Table 2.2.
1 m/s2 55 to less than 200 Hz
2.2 Installing the Inverter

(1) Mounting base
The temperature of the heat sink will rise up to approx.
90°C during operation of the inverter, so the inverter
should be mounted on a base made of material that can
withstand temperatures of this level.
Install the inverter on a base constructed from metal or

other non-flammable material.
A fire may result with other material.
(2) Clearances
Ensure that the minimum clearances indicated in Figure
2.1 are maintained at all times. When installing the inverter
in the panel of your system, take extra care with ventilation
inside the panel as the temperature around the inverter will
tend to increase. Do not install the inverter in a small panel Figure 2.1 Mounting Direction and
with poor ventilation. Required Clearances
2-1
When mounting two or more inverters
Horizontal layout is recommended when two or more
inverters are to be installed in the same unit or panel. If it is
necessary to mount the inverters vertically, install a partition
plate or the like between the inverters so that any heat
radiating from an inverter will not affect the one/s above. As
long as the ambient temperature is 40°C or lower, inverters
can be mounted side-by-side without any gap between them
(only for inverters with a capacity of less than 5.5 kW).
When employing external cooling

At the shipment time, the inverter is set up for mount inside
your equipment or panel so that cooling is done all internally.
To improve cooling efficiently, you can take the heat sink out
of the equipment or the panel (as shown on the right) so that
cooling is done both internally and externally (this is called
"external cooling").
In external cooling, the heat sink, which dissipates about
70% of the total heat (total loss) generated into air, is situated
outside the equipment or the panel. As a result, much less
heat is radiated inside the equipment or the panel.
To take advantage of external cooling, you need to use the
external cooling attachment option for inverters with a
capacity of 5.5 kW or above.
In an environment with high humidity or a lot of fibrous dust,
however, do not use external cooling in an environment with
high humidity or a lot of fibrous dust, which tends to clog the
heat sink.
For details, refer to the Mounting Adapter for

External Cooling "PB-F1/E1" Installation Manual Figure 2.2 External Cooling
(INR-SI47-0880a).
Prevent lint, paper fibers, sawdust, dust, metallic chips, or other foreign materials from getting
into the inverter or from accumulating on the heat sink.
This may result in a fire or accident.
2-2
(3) Mounting direction
Mount the inverter vertically to the mounting surface and fix it securely with four screws or bolts so
that the logo "FRENIC-Multi" can be seen from the front.
Do not mount the inverter upside down or horizontally. Doing so will reduce the heat
dissipation efficiency of the inverter and cause the overheat protection function to operate,
so the inverter will not run.
(4) Solving abnormal vibration after installation

If any vibration in the surroundings reaches the inverter and causes abnormal vibration to the cooling
fans or the keypad, fix them firmly using the fixing screws provided as accessories.
Fixing the cooling fans
Table 2.3 Fixing Screws
Nominal
Power Screw Tightening
applied Inverter
supply size torque
motor type
voltage (accessory) (N·m)
(kW)
5.5 FRN5.5E1 -2
Three- 7.5 FRN7.5E1 -2
phase
200 V 11 FRN11E1 -2
15 FRN15E1 -2 M4x35
0.8
5.5 FRN5.5E1 -4 (4 pcs)
Three- 7.5 FRN7.5E1 -4
phase
400 V 11 FRN11E1 -4
15 FRN15E1 -4
Figure 2.3 Fixing the Cooling Fans
Note 1) A box ( ) in the above table replaces S or E depending on
the enclosure.
Note 2) A box ( ) in the above table replaces A, C, E, J, or K
depending on the shipping destination.
For three-phase 200 V class series of inverters, it replaces
A, C, J, or K.
2-3
2.3 Wiring
Follow the procedure below. (In the following description, the inverter has already been installed.)
2.3.1 Removing and mounting the terminal cover and the main circuit terminal block cover
(1) For inverters with a capacity of less than 5.5 kW

To remove the terminal cover, put your finger in the dimple of the terminal cover (labeled
"PULL"), and then pull it up toward you.
To remove the main circuit terminal block cover, hold its right and left ends with your fingers and
slide it toward you.
Figure 2.4 Removing the Covers (For Inverters with a Capacity of Less Than 5.5 kW)
2-4
(2) For inverters with a capacity of 5.5 and 7.5 kW
To remove the terminal cover, first loosen the terminal cover fixing screw on it, and put your
finger in the dimple of the terminal cover (labeled "PULL"), and then pull it up toward you.
To remove the main circuit terminal block cover, put your thumbs on the handles of the main
circuit terminal block cover, and push it up while supporting it with your fingers. (Refer to Figure
2.5.)
Figure 2.5 Removing the Covers (For Inverters with a Capacity of 5.5 and 7.5 kW)
When mounting the main circuit terminal block cover, fit it according to the guide on the
inverter.
Figure 2.6 Mounting the main circuit terminal block cover

(For Inverters with a Capacity of 5.5 and 7.5 kW)
2-5
(3) For inverters with a capacity of 11 and 15 kW
To remove the terminal cover, first loosen the terminal cover fixing screw on it, and put your
finger in the dimple of the terminal cover (labeled "PULL"), and then pull it up toward you.
To remove the main circuit terminal block cover, hold the handles on the both sides of the main
circuit terminal block cover, and pull it up.
Figure 2.7 Removing the Covers (For Inverters with a Capacity of 11 and 15 kW)
When mounting the main circuit terminal block cover, fit it according to the guide on the
inverter.
Insert the main circuit terminal block cover by fitting the part labeled "GUIDE"
according to the guide on the inverter.
Push where "PUSH" are labeled to snap it into the inverter.
Figure 2.8 Mounting the Main Circuit Terminal Block Cover

(For Inverters with a Capacity of 11 and 15 kW)
2-6
2.3.2 Terminal arrangement diagram and screw specifications
The table below shows the main circuit screw sizes, tightening torque and terminal arrangements.
Note that the terminal arrangements differ according to the inverter types. Two terminals designed
for grounding shown as the symbol, G in Figures A to E make no distinction between a power
supply source (a primary circuit) and a motor (a secondary circuit).
(1) Arrangement of the main circuit terminals
Table 2.4 Main Circuit Terminal Properties
Power Nominal Terminal Tightening Ground- Tightening

applied Inverter type
supply motor screw torque ing screw torque Refer to:
voltage (kW) size (N·m) size (N·m)
0.1 FRN0.1E1 -2
0.2 FRN0.2E1 -2
M3.5 1.2 M3.5 1.2 Figure A
0.4 FRN0.4E1 -2
0.75 FRN0.75E1 -2
1.5 FRN1.5E1 -2
2.2 FRN2.2E1 -2 M4 1.8 M4 1.8 Figure B
3.7 FRN3.7E1 -2
Three- FRN5.5E1S-2 M5 3.8 Figure C
phase 5.5 Input: M4 M5 3.8
200 V FRN5.5E1E-2 1.8 Figure F
Output: M5
FRN7.5E1S-2 M5 3.8 Figure C
7.5 Input: M4 M5 3.8
FRN7.5E1E-2 1.8 Figure F
Output: M5
FRN11E1S-2 5.8 Figure C
11 M6 5.8
FRN11E1E-2 8.1 Figure F
M6
FRN15E1S-2 5.8 Figure C
15 M6 5.8
0.4 FRN0.4E1 -4
0.75 FRN0.75E1 -4
1.5 FRN1.5E1 -4
M4 1.8 M4 1.8 Figure B
2.2 FRN2.2E1 -4
3.7 FRN3.7E1 -4
4.0* FRN4.0E1 -4E
FRN5.5E1S-4 M5 3.8 Figure C
5.5 Input: M4 M5 3.8
Three- FRN5.5E1E-4 1.8 Figure F
Output: M5
phase
400 V FRN7.5E1S-4 M5 3.8 Figure C
7.5 Input: M4 M5 3.8
FRN7.5E1E-4 1.8 Figure F
Output: M5
FRN11E1S-4 M6 5.8 Figure C
11 Input: M4 M6 5.8
Output: M6
FRN15E1S-4 M6 5.8 Figure C
15 Input: M4 M6 5.8
Output: M6
0.1 FRN0.1E1 -7
0.2 FRN0.2E1 -7
Single- M3.5 1.2 M3.5 1.2 Figure D
0.4 FRN0.4E1 -7
phase
200 V 0.75 FRN0.75E1 -7
1.5 FRN1.5E1 -7
M4 1.8 M4 1.8 Figure E
2.2 FRN2.2E1 -7
* The nominal applied motor rating of FRN4.0E1S-4E to be shipped to the EU is 4.0 kW.
Note 1) A box ( ) in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure.
Note 2) A box ( ) in the above table replaces A, C, E, J, or K depending on the shipping destination.
For three-phase 200 V class series of inverters, it replaces A, C, J, or K.
2-7
Figure F (Note 1)
Filter output (Note 2)
(Note 1) Terminal screw type is listed in the table below.

Inverter type Screw type
FRN5.5E1E-2
Cross
FRN7.5E1E-2
FRN11E1E-2
Hxagon
FRN15E1E-2
FRN5.5E1E-4
Flat
FRN7.5E1E-4
FRN11E1E-4
Cross
FRN15E1E-4
* A box ( ) in the above table replaces A, C, E, J, or K depending on the shipping destination.
(Note 2) Cables of EMC filter output are already connected to inverter input by factory default.
2-8
(2) The control circuit terminals (common to all models)
Screw size: M3 Tightening torque: 0.5 to 0.6 (N·m)

Table 2.5 Control Circuit Terminal Block
Dimension of openings in the control
Wire strip length circuit terminals for ferrule
(for Europe type terminal block)*
Screwdriver type Allowable wire size
Flat screw driver AWG26 to AWG16

(0.6 x 3.5 mm) (0.14 to 1.5 mm2) 6 mm 2.51 (W) x 1.76 (H) mm
* Manufacturer of ferrules: Phoenix Contact Inc. Refer to Table 2.6.
Table 2.6 Recommended Ferrule Terminals
Type
Screw size
With insulated collar Without insulated collar
2
AWG24 (0.25 mm ) AI0.25-6BU -
AWG22 (0.34 mm2) AI0.34-6TQ A0.34-7
3.5 mm
AWG20 (0.5 mm2) AI0.5-6WH A0.5-6
2
AWG18 (0.75 mm ) AI0.75-6GY A0.75-6 Head thickness: 0.6 mm
AWG16 (1.25 mm2) AI1.5-6BK A1.5-7 Screwdriver head style
2-9
2.3.3 Recommended wire sizes
Table 2.7 lists the recommended wire sizes. The recommended wire sizes for the main circuits are
examples of using HIV single wire (for 75 C) at an ambient temperature of 50 C.
Table 2.7 Recommended Wire Sizes
Recommended wire size (mm2 )*1
Power supply voltage
Main circuits
Main circuit
Nominal power input
applied Inverter type [L1/R, L2/S, L3/T] Ground- Inverter DCR Braking Control
motor [L1/L, L2/N] resistor circuit
ing output [P1,
[P(+),
[ G] [U, V, W] P (+)]
DB]
w/ DCR w/o DCR
0.1 FRN0.1E1 -2
0.2 FRN0.2E1 -2
0.4 FRN0.4E1 -2
Three-phase 200 V
0.75 FRN0.75E1 -2 2 2 2 2
2
1.5 FRN1.5E1 -2 0.5
2.2 FRN2.2E1 -2 2 to
3.7 FRN3.7E1 -2 1.25
5.5 FRN5.5E1 -2 3.5 3.5 3.5
3.5
7.5 FRN7.5E1 -2 3.5 5.5 5.5
5.5
11 FRN11E1 -2 5.5 14 8 8
15 FRN15E1 -2 14 22 8 14 14
0.4 FRN0.4E1 -4
0.75 FRN0.75E1 -4
Three-phase 400 V
1.5 FRN1.5E1 -4
2.2 FRN2.2E1 -4 2
2 2 0.5
3.7 FRN3.7E1 -4 2 2
2 to
4.0*2 FRN4.0E1 -4E
1.25
5.5 FRN5.5E1 -4
7.5 FRN7.5E1 -4
11 FRN11E1 -4 3.5 3.5 3.5
15 FRN15E1 -4 3.5 5.5 3.5 5.5
0.1 FRN0.1E1 -7
Three-phase
0.2 FRN0.2E1 -7
0.5
200 V
0.4 FRN0.4E1 -7 2
2 2 2 2 2 to
0.75 FRN0.75E1 -7
1.25
1.5 FRN1.5E1 -7
2.2 FRN2.2E1 -7 3.5
DCR: DC reactor
*1 Use the terminal crimp with an insulation sheath or with processing by the insulation tube.
Use the insulated wire of 75 C, 600 V, HIV-insulated. This selection assumes the inverter is used in
ambient temperature at 50 C.
*2 The nominal applied motor rating of FRN4.0E1S-4E to be shipped to the EU is 4.0 kW.
2-10
2.3.4 Wiring precautions
Follow the rules below when performing wiring for the inverter.
(1) Make sure that the power supply voltage is within the rated voltage range specified on the
nameplate.
(2) Be sure to connect the three-phase power wires to the main circuit power input terminals L1/R,
L2/S and L3/T, or connect the single-phase power wires to the main circuit power input terminals
L1/L and L2/N of the inverter. If the power wires are connected to other terminals, the inverter
will be damaged when the power is turned ON.
(3) Always connect the grounding terminal to prevent electric shock, fire or other disasters and to
reduce electric noise.
(4) Use crimp terminals covered with insulated sleeves for the main circuit terminal wiring to ensure
a reliable connection.
(5) Keep the power supply wiring (primary circuit) and motor wiring (secondary circuit) of the main
circuit, and control circuit wiring as far away as possible from each other.
• When wiring the inverter to the power supply, insert a recommended molded case circuit
breaker (MCCB) or residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage
circuit breaker (ELCB) (with overcurrent protection) in the path of each pair of power lines
to inverters. Use the devices recommended ones within the related current range.
• Use wires in the specified size.
• Tighten terminals with specified torque.
• Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter's output circuit.
• Do not use one multicore cable in order to connect several inverters with motors.
• Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code.
• Be sure to connect the grounding wire for the inverters grounding terminal G.
Otherwise, electric shock or fire could occur.
• Qualified electricians should carry out wiring.
• Be sure to perform wiring after turning the power off.
• Be sure to perform wiring after installing the inverter.
• Ensure that the number of input phases and the rated voltage of the product match the
number of phases and the voltage of the AC power supply to which the product is to be
connected.
• Do not connect the power supply wires to output terminals (U, V, and W).
Doing so could cause fire or an accident.
2.3.5 Wiring for main circuit terminals and grounding terminals

Table 2.8 shows the main circuit power terminals and grounding terminals.
Table 2.8 Symbols, Names and Functions of the Main Circuit Power Terminals
Symbol Name Functions
L1/R, L2/S, L3/T Main circuit power Connect the three-phase input power lines or single-phase
or L1/L, L2/N inputs input power lines
U, V, W Inverter outputs Connect a three-phase motor.
P1, P(+) DC reactor Connect an optional DC reactor (DCR) for improving power
connection factor.
P(+), DB DC braking resistor Connect an optional braking resistor.
P(+), N(-) DC link bus Connect a DC link bus of other inverter(s). An optional
regenerative converter is also connectable to these terminals.
G Grounding for Grounding terminals for the inverter’s chassis (or case) and
inverter and motor motor. Earth one of the terminals and connect the grounding
terminal of the motor. Inverters provide a pair of grounding
terminals that function equivalently.
2-11
Follow the procedure below for wiring and configuration of the inverter. Figure 2.9 illustrates the
wiring procedure with peripheral equipment.
Wiring procedure
Grounding terminals ( G)
Inverter output terminals (U, V, W, and G)
DC reactor connection terminals (P1 and P(+))*
DC braking resistor connection terminals (P(+), DB)*
DC link bus terminals (P(+) and N(-))*
Main circuit power input terminals (L1/R, L2/S and L3/T, or L1/L and L2/N)
* Perform wiring as necessary
Do not connect more

than 2 wires to the
terminal P(+).
When wiring the inverter to the

power supply that is 500 kVA or
more, be sure to connect an
optional DC reactor (DCR).
Figure 2.9 Wiring Procedure for Peripheral Equipment
2-12
Grounding terminals ( G)
Be sure to ground either of the two grounding terminals for safety and noise reduction. The inverter is
designed to use with a safety grounding to avoid electric shock, fire and other disasters.
Grounding terminals should be grounded as follows:
1) Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code.
2) Use a thick grounding wire with a large surface area and keep the wiring length as short as
possible.
Inverter output terminals, U, V, W and grounding terminals ( G)
Inverter’s output terminals should be connected as follows:

1) Connect the three wires of the three-phase motor to terminals U, V, and W, aligning phases
each other.
2) Connect the secondary grounding wire to the grounding terminal ( G).
• The wiring length between the inverter and motor should not exceed 50 m, when they
are connected directly. If the wiring length exceeds 50 m, an output circuit filter (option)
should be inserted. (E.g. total power cable length is 400 m as shown in the figure
below.)
• Do not use one multicore cable to connect several inverters with motors even if some
possible combinations of inverters and motors are considered.
• Do not connect a power factor correcting capacitor or surge absorber to the inverter’s
output lines (secondary circuit).
• If the wiring length is long, the stray capacitance between the wires will increase,
resulting in an outflow of the leakage current. It will activate the overcurrent protection,
increase the leakage current, or will not assure the accuracy of the current display. In
the worst case, the inverter could be damaged.
• If more than one motor is to be connected to a single inverter, the wiring length should
be the sum of the length of the wires to the motors.
2-13
Driving 400 V class series motor
• If a thermal relay is installed in the path between the inverter and the motor to protect
the motor from overheating, the thermal relay may malfunction even with a wiring
length shorter than 50 m. In this situation, add an output circuit filter (option) or lower
the carrier frequency (Function code F26).
• If the motor is driven by a PWM-type inverter, surge voltage that is generated by
switching the inverter component may be superimposed on the output voltage and
may be applied to the motor terminals. Particularly if the wiring length is long, the
surge voltage may deteriorate the insulation resistance of the motor. Consider any of
the following measures.
- Use a motor with insulation that withstands the surge voltage. (All Fuji standard
motors feature insulation that withstands the surge voltage.)
- Connect an output circuit filter (option) to the output terminals (secondary circuits) of
the inverter.
- Minimize the wiring length between the inverter and motor (10 to 20 m or less).
Wiring length for EMC filter built-in type

• When the wiring length between the inverter and motor exceeds 10 m, the filter circuit
may be overheated and damaged due to increase of leakage current. To reduce the
leakage current, set the motor sound (carrier frequency) to 2 kHz or below with
function code F26.
DC reactor terminals, P1 and P (+)
1) Remove the jumper bar from terminals P1 and P(+).

2) Connect a DC reactor (option) to terminals P1 and P(+).
• The wiring length should be 10 m or below.
• Do not remove the jumper bar if a DC reactor (DCR) is not going to be used.
• If a converter is connected, you do not need to connect a DC reactor (DCR).
When wiring the inverter to the power supply that is 500 kVA or more, be sure to connect an optional
DC reactor (DCR).
DC braking resistor terminals, P(+) and DB
1) Connect a DC braking resistor (option) to terminals P(+) and DB.

2) When using an external braking resistor, arrange the inverter and braking resistor to keep the
wiring length to 5 m or less and twist the two wires or route them together in parallel.
Never insert a DC braking resistor between the terminals P(+) and N(-), P1 and N(-), P(+) and P1,
DB and N(-), or P1 and DB.
2-14
When a DC reactor (DCR) is not connected
together with the braking resistor
1) Remove the screws from terminals P1 and
P(+), together with the jumper bar.
2) Put the wire from terminal P of the braking
resistor and the jumper bar on terminal
P(+) in this order, then secure them with
the screw removed in 1) above.
3) Tighten the screw on terminal P1.
4) Connect the wire from terminal DB of the
braking resistor to the DB of the inverter.
Figure 2.10 Braking Resistor Connection

without DC Reactor (DCR)
When connecting a DC reactor (DCR)

together with the braking resistor
1) Remove the screw from terminal P(+).
2) Overlap the DC reactor (DCR) wire and
braking resistor wire (P) as shown at left
and then secure them to terminal P(+) of
the inverter with the screw.
3) Connect the wire from terminal DB of the
braking resistor to terminal DB of the
inverter.
4) Do not use the jumper bar.
Figure 2.11 Braking Resistor Connection

with DC Reactor (DCR)
DC link bus terminals, P (+) and N (-)
These are provided for the DC link bus powered system. Connect these terminals with terminals P(+)
and N (-) of other inverters.
Consult your Fuji Electric representative if these terminals are to be used.
2-15
Main circuit power input terminals, L1/R, L2/S, and L3/T (three-phase input), or L1/L and
L2/N (single-phase input)
1) For safety, make sure that the molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or magnetic contactor (MC)
is turned off before wiring the main circuit power input terminals.
2) Connect the main circuit power supply wires (L1/R, L2/S and L3/T for three-phase input, or L1/L
and L2/N for single-phase input) to the input terminals of the inverter via an MCCB or
residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB)*, and
MC if necessary.
It is not necessary to align phases of the power supply wires and the input terminals of the
inverter with each other.
* With overcurrent protection
It is recommended that a magnetic contactor be inserted that can be manually activated.

This is to allow you to disconnect the inverter from the power supply in an emergency (e.g.,
when the protective function is activated) so as to prevent a failure or accident from causing
the secondary problems.
2.3.6 Wiring for control circuit terminals
In general, sheaths and covers of the control signal cables and wires are not specifically
designed to withstand a high voltage (i.e., reinforced insulation is not applied). Therefore, if a
control signal cable or wire comes into direct contact with a live conductor of the main circuit, the
insulation of the sheath or the cover might break down, which would expose the signal wire to a
high voltage of the main circuit. Make sure that the control signal cables and wires will not come
into contact with live conductors of the main circuit.
Failure to observe these precautions could cause electric shock and/or an accident.
Noise may be emitted from the inverter, motor and wires.

Take appropriate measure to prevent the nearby sensors and devices from malfunctioning due
to such noise.
Table 2.9 lists the symbols, names and functions of the control circuit terminals. The wiring to the
control circuit terminals differs depending upon the setting of the function codes, which reflects the
use of the inverter. Route wires properly to reduce the influence of noise.
2-16
Table 2.9 Symbols, Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals
Classifi-
cation
[13] Power Power supply (+10 VDC) for frequency command potentiometer
supply (Potentiometer: 1 to 5k )
for the
The potentiometer of 1/2 W rating or more should be connected.
potentio-
meter
[12] Analog (1) The frequency is commanded according to the external analog input
setting voltage.
voltage
• 0 to 10 VDC/0 to 100% (Normal operation)
input
• 10 to 0 VDC/0 to 100% (Inverse operation)
(2) Inputs setting signal (PID command value) or feedback signal.
(3) Used as additional auxiliary setting to various frequency settings.
• Input impedance: 22k
• The maximum input is +15 VDC, however, the current larger than
10 VDC is handled as 10 VDC.
• Inputting a bipolar analog voltage (0 to 10 VDC) to terminal [12]
requires setting function code C35 to "0."
[C1] Analog (1) The frequency is commanded according to the external analog input
setting current.
current • 4 to 20 mA DC/0 to 100% (Normal operation)
input • 20 to 4 mA DC/0 to 100 % (Inverse operation)
(C1 (2) Inputs setting signal (PID command value) or feedback signal.
function)
• Input impedance: 250
Analog input
• Maximum input is +30 mA DC, however, the current larger

than +20 mA DC is handled as +20 mA DC.
Analog (1) The frequency is commanded according to the external analog input
setting voltage.
voltage • 0 to +10 VDC/0 to +100 % (Normal operation)
input • +10 to 0 VDC/0 to +100 % (Inverse operation)
(V2 (2) Inputs setting signal (PID command value) or feedback signal.
function)
• Input impedance: 22 k
• Maximum input is +15 VDC, however, the voltage larger
than +10 VDC is handled as +10 VDC.
PTC (1) Connects PTC (Positive
thermistor Temperature
input Coefficient) thermistor
(PTC for motor protection.
function) The figure shown below
illustrates the internal
circuit diagram. To use
the PTC thermistor, you
must change data of the
function code H26.
Figure 2.12 Internal Circuit Diagram
The C1 function, V2 function, or PTC function can be assigned to terminal [C1]. Doing so
requires setting the slide switch on the interface PCB and configuring the related function
code. For details, refer to Section 2.3.7, "Setting up the slide switches".
[11] Analog Common for analog input/output signals ([13], [12], [C1], and [FM])
common Isolated from terminals [CM]s and [CMY].
2-17
Table 2.9 Symbols, Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals (Continued)
Classifi-
cation
- Since low level analog signals are handled, these signals are especially susceptible to
the external noise effects. Route the wiring as short as possible (within 20 m) and use
shielded wires. In principle, ground the shielded sheath of wires; if effects of external
inductive noises are considerable, connection to terminal [11] may be effective. As
shown in Figure 2.13, ground the single end of the shield to enhance the shield effect.
- Use a twin contact relay for low level signals if the relay is used in the control circuit.
Do not connect the relay's contact to terminal [11].
- When the inverter is connected to an external device outputting the analog signal, a
malfunction may be caused by electric noise generated by the inverter. If this
happens, according to the circumstances, connect a ferrite core (a toroidal core or an
equivalent) to the device outputting the analog signal and/or connect a capacitor
Analog input
having the good cut-off characteristics for high frequency between control signal wires
as shown in Figure 2.14.
- Do not apply a voltage of +7.5 VDC or higher to terminal [C1] when you assign the
terminal [C1] to C1 function. Doing so could damage the internal control circuit.
Figure 2.13 Connection of Shielded Wire Figure 2.14 Example of Electric Noise Reduction
[X1] Digital (1) Various signals such as coast-to-stop, alarm from external equipment,
input 1 and multi-frequency commands can be assigned to terminals [X1] to
[X5], [FWD] and [REV] by setting function codes E01 to E05, E98, and
[X2] Digital E99. For details, refer to Chapter 5, Section 5.2 "Overview of Function
input 2 Codes."
[X3] Digital (2) Input mode, i.e. SINK/SOURCE, is changeable by using the internal slide
input 3 switch. (Refer to Section 2.3.7, "Setting up the slide switches."
(3) Switches the logic value (1/0) for ON/OFF of the terminals [X1] to [X5],
[X4] Digital [FWD], or [REV]. If the logic value for ON of the terminal [X1] is 1 in the
input 4 normal logic system, for example, OFF is 1 in the negative logic system
and vice versa.
[X5] Digital (4) The negative logic system never applies to the terminals assigned for
Digital input
input 5 FWD and REV.

[FWD] Run (Digital input circuit specifications)
forward Item Min. Max.
command
Operation ON level 0V 2V
[REV] Run voltage
reverse (SINK) OFF level 22 V 27 V
command Operation ON level 22 V 27 V
voltage
(SOURCE) OFF level 0V 2V
Operation current at
ON 2.5 mA 5 mA
(Input voltage is at 0 V)
Allowable leakage
- 0.5 mA
current at OFF
Figure 2.15 Digital Input Circuit
2-18
Classifi-
cation
[PLC] PLC Connects to PLC output signal power supply.

signal (Rated voltage: +24 VDC (Maximum 50 mA DC): Allowable range: +22 to
power +27 VDC)
This terminal also supplies a power to the circuitry connected to the
transistor output terminals [Y1] and [Y2]. Refer to "Analog output, pulse
output, transistor output, and relay output terminals" in this Section for more.
[CM] Digital Two common terminals for digital input signals
input These terminals are electrically isolated from the terminals [11]s and [CMY].
common
Using a relay contact to turn [X1], [X2], [X3], [X4], [X5], [FWD], or [REV] ON or OFF
Figure 2.16 shows two examples of a circuit that uses a relay contact to turn control
signal input [X1], [X2], [X3], [X4], [X5], [FWD], or [REV] ON or OFF. In circuit (a), the
slide switch SW1 has been turned to SINK, whereas in circuit (b) it has been turned to
SOURCE.
Note: To configure this kind of circuit, use a highly reliable relay.
(Recommended product: Fuji control relay Model HH54PW)
Digital input
(a) With the switch turned to SINK (b) With the switch turned to SOURCE
Figure 2.16 Circuit Configuration Using a Relay Contact
Using a programmable logic controller (PLC) to turn [X1], [X2], [X3], [X4], [X5],
[FWD], or [REV] ON or OFF
Figure 2.17 shows two examples of a circuit that uses a programmable logic controller
(PLC) to turn control signal input [X1], [X2], [X3], [X4], [X5], [FWD], or [REV] ON or OFF.
In circuit (a), the slide switch SW1 has been turned to SINK, whereas in circuit (b) it has
been turned to SOURCE.
In circuit (a) below, short-circuiting or opening the transistor's open collector circuit in
the PLC using an external power supply turns ON or OFF control signal [X1], [X2], [X3],
[X4], [X5], [FWD], or [REV]. When using this type of circuit, observe the following:
- Connect the + node of the external power supply (which should be isolated from the
PLC's power) to terminal [PLC] of the inverter.
- Do not connect terminal [CM] of the inverter to the common terminal of the PLC.
(a) With the switch turned to SINK (b) With the switch turned to SOURCE
Figure 2.17 Circuit Configuration Using a PLC
For details about the slide switch setting, refer to Section 2.3.7, "Setting up the slide switches".)
2-19
Classifi-
cation
[FM] Analog The monitor signal for analog DC voltage (0 to +10 V) is output. You can
monitor select FMA function with slide switch SW6 on the interface PCB, and change
the data of the function code F29.
(FMA You can also select the signal functions following with function code F31.
function)
• Output frequency 1 (Before slip compensation)
• Output frequency 2 (After slip compensation)
Analog output
• Output current • Output voltage • Output torque

• Load factor • Input power • PID feedback amount (PV)
• PG feedback value • DC link bus voltage • Universal AO
• Motor output • Calibration • PID command (SV)
• PID output (MV)
* Input impedance of external device:
Min. 5k (0 to +10 VDC output)
* While the terminal is outputting 0 to +10 VDC, it is capable to drive up to
two meters with 10k impedance.
(Adjustable range of the gain: 0 to 300%)
Pulse Pulse signal is output. You can select FMP function with the slide switch
monitor SW6 on the interface PCB, and change the data of the function code F29.
You can also select the signal functions following with function code F31.
(FMP
function) * Input impedance of the external device: Min. 5k
* Pulse duty: Approx. 50%
Pulse rate: 25 to 6000 p/s
Voltage waveform
• Pulse output waveform
Pulse output
• FM output circuit
[11] Analog Two common terminals for analog input and output signal terminals
common These terminals are electrically isolated from terminals [CM]s and [CMY].
Do not connect a meter with pull-up resistor to the input (primary) side.
2-20
Classifi-
cation
[Y1] Transistor (1) Various signals such as inverter running, speed/freq. arrival and
output 1 overload early warning can be assigned to any terminals, [Y1] and [Y2]
by setting function code E20 and E21. Refer to Chapter 5, Section 5.2
[Y2] Transistor "Overview of Function Codes" for details.
output 2
(2) Switches the logic value (1/0) for ON/OFF of the terminals between [Y1],
[Y2], and [CMY]. If the logic value for ON between [Y1], [Y2], and [CMY]
is 1 in the normal logic system, for example, OFF is 1 in the negative
logic system and vice versa.
(Transistor output circuit specification)
Item Max.
Operation ON level 3V
voltage 27 V
OFF level
Maximum motor
50 mA
current at ON
Leakage current
0.1 mA
at OFF
Figure 2.18 Transistor Output Circuit
Figure 2.19 shows examples of connection between the control circuit and a
PLC.
Transistor output
• When a transistor output drives a control relay, connect a

surge-absorbing diode across relay’s coil terminals.
• When any equipment or device connected to the transistor
output needs to be supplied with DC power, feed the power
(+24 VDC: allowable range: +22 to +27 VDC, 50 mA max.)
through the [PLC] terminal. Short-circuit between the
terminals [CMY] and [CM] in this case.
[CMY] Transistor Common terminal for transistor output signal terminals
output This terminal is electrically isolated from terminals, [CM]s and [11]s.
common
Connecting Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) to Terminal [Y1] or [Y2]
Figure 2.19 shows two examples of circuit connection between the transistor output of the
inverter’s control circuit and a PLC. In example (a), the input circuit of the PLC serves as a
SINK for the control circuit output, whereas in example (b), it serves as a SOURCE for the
output.
(a) PLC serving as SINK (b) PLC serving as SOURCE

Figure 2.19 Connecting PLC to Control Circuit
2-21
Classifi-
cation
[30A/B/ Alarm (1) Outputs a contact signal (SPDT) when a protective function has been
C] relay activated to stop the motor.
output Contact rating:
(for any 250 VAC, 0.3A, cos = 0.3, 48 VDC, 0.5A
Relay output
error) (2) Any one of output signals assigned to terminals [Y1] and [Y2] can also
be assigned to this relay contact to use it for signal output.
(3) Switching of the normal/negative logic output is applicable to the
following two contact output modes: "Between terminals [30A] and
[30C] is closed (excited) for ON signal output (Active ON)" or "Between
terminals [30A] and [30C] is open (non-excited) for ON signal output
(Active OFF).
RJ-45 Standard (1) Used to connect the inverter with the keypad. The inverter supplies
connect RJ-45 the power to the keypad through the pins specified below. The
or for connector extension cable for remote operation also uses wires connected to
the these pins for supplying the keypad power.
keypad (2) Remove the keypad from the standard RJ-45 connector, and connect
the RS-485 communications cable to control the inverter through the
PC or PLC (Programmable Logic Controller). Refer to Section 2.3.7,
"Setting up the slide switches" for setting of the terminating resistor.
Communication
Figure 2.20 RJ-45 Connector and its Pin Assignment*

* Pins 1, 2, 7, and 8 are exclusively assigned to power lines for
the standard keypad and multi-function keypad, so do not use
those pins for any other equipment.
• Route the wiring of the control circuit terminals as far from the wiring of the main circuit as
possible. Otherwise electric noise may cause malfunctions.
• Fix the control circuit wires inside the inverter to keep them away from the live parts of the
main circuit (such as the terminal block of the main circuit).
• The RJ-45 connector pin assignment on the FRENIC-Multi series is different from that on the
FVR-E11S series. Do not connect to the keypad of the FVR-E11S series of inverter. Doing
so could damage the internal control circuit.
Mounting the interface printed circuit board (interface PCB)
• Usually, you do not need to remove the interface PCB. However, if you remove the interface
PCB, be sure to mount the interface PCB by putting hooks provided on the interface PCB
into the inverter until you have heard click sound.
Figure 2.21 Mounting the Interface Printed Circuit Board (Interface PCB)
2-22
2.3.7 Setting up the slide switches
Before changing the switches, turn OFF the power and wait more than five minutes. Make sure
that the LED monitor is turned OFF. Further, make sure, using a circuit tester or a similar
instrument, that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P (+) and N (-) has dropped below
the safe voltage (+25 VDC).
An electric shock may result if this warning is not heeded as there may be some residual
electric charge in the DC bus capacitor even after the power has been turned OFF.
Setting up the slide switches

Switching the slide switches located on the control PCB and interface PCB allows you to customize
the operation mode of the analog output terminals, digital I/O terminals, and communications ports.
The locations of those switches are shown in Figure 2.22.
To access the slide switches, remove the terminal cover and keypad.
For details on how to remove the terminal cover, refer to Section 2.3.1, "Removing the terminal
cover and main circuit terminal block cover."
Table 2.10 lists function of each slide switch.
Table 2.10 Function of Each Slide Switch
Switch Function
SW1 Switches the service mode of the digital input terminals between SINK and
SOURCE.
▪ To make the digital input terminal [X1] to [X5], [FWD] or [REV] serve as a current
sink, turn SW1 to the SINK position.
▪ To make them serve as a current source, turn SW1 to the SOURCE position.
SW3 Switches the terminating resistor of RS-485 communications port on the inverter on
and off.
▪ To connect a keypad to the inverter, turn SW3 to OFF. (Factory default)
▪ If the inverter is connected to the RS-485 communications network as a
terminating device, turn SW3 to ON.
SW6 Switches the output mode of the output terminal [FM] between analog voltage and
pulse output.
When changing this switch setting, also change the data of function code F29.
SW6 Data for F29

Analog voltage output FMA 0
(Factory default)
Current output FMP 2
SW7 Switches property of the input terminal [C1] for C1, V2, or PTC.
SW8 When changing this switch setting, also change the data of function code E59 and
H26.
Data for Data for
SW7 SW8
E59 H26
Analog frequency setting in current
C1 OFF 0 0
(Factory default)
Analog frequency setting in voltage V2 OFF 1 0
PTC thermistor input C1 ON 0 1
2-23
Figure 2.22 shows the location of slide switches for the input/output terminal configuration.
Switching example
SW3
OFF ON
Factory
default
SW6 SW7 SW8 SW1*
FMA C1 OFF SINK

Factory
default
FMP V2 ON SOURCE
-
* For inverters (FRN_ _ _ _-_E) destined for EU, the SW1

factory default is SOURCE.
Figure 2.22 Location of the Slide Switches
2-24
2.4 Mounting and Connecting a Keypad
2.4.1 Mounting style and parts needed for connection
(1) Mounting style

You can mount a keypad in any style described below.
Mounting a keypad on the panel wall (Refer to Figure 2.23.)

Installing a keypad at a remote site (e.g. for operation on hand) (Refer to Figure 2.24.)
Figure 2.23 Mounting Keypad on the Panel Wall
Figure 2.24 Installing Keypad at a Remote Site (e.g. for Operation on Hand)
2-25
(2) Parts needed for connection
To mount/install a keypad on a place other than an inverter, parts listed below are needed.
Parts name Model Remarks
Extension cable (Note) CB-5S, CB-3S and CB-1S 3 cables available in length of 5m, 3m, and 1m.
Fixing screw M3 16 Accessories
Keypad rear cover Accessories
(Note) When using an off-the-shelf LAN cable, use a 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX straight type cable
compliant to US ANSI TIA/EIA-568A Category 5. (Less than 20m)
Recommended LAN cable
Manufacturer: SANWA Supply Co., LTD.
Model: KB-10T5-01K (1m)
KB-STP-01K (1m) (Shielded LAN cable compliant to EMC Directive)
2.4.2 Mounting/installing steps
Mounting a keypad on the panel wall

Pull the keypad toward you while holding down the hooks on the keypad.
Figure 2.25 Removing a Keypad
Fix the keypad rear cover to the keypad.
Figure 2.26 Fixing the Keypad Rear Cover for Remote Keypad Operation
2-26
Make a cut-out on the panel wall. For details, refer to Chapter 8, Section 8.4.2 "Standard
keypad."
To mount the keypad on the panel, fix it firmly using a pair of M3 screws put through the
taps shown below. (Figure 2.27.)
(Tightening torque: 0.7 N m)
Figure 2.27 Mounting a Keypad on the Panel Wall
Connect an extension cable (CB-5S, CB-3S or CB-1S) or off-the-shelf straight LAN cable
to RJ-45 connectors (Modular jacks) on the keypad and inverter (standard RS-485 port.)
(Refer to Figure 2.28)
Figure 2.28 Connecting a Keypad and an Inverter’s Standard RS-485 port
Do not connect the inverter to a PC's LAN port, Ethernet hub or telephone line; doing so
may damage the inverter or the equipment on the other end.
Installing a keypad at a remote site (e.g. for operation on hand)

Follow the step in Mounting a keypad on the panel wall.
2-27
2.5 Cautions Relating to Harmonic Component, Noise, and Leakage Current
(1) Harmonic component
Input current to an inverter includes a harmonic component, which may affect other loads and power
factor correcting capacitors that are connected to the same power supply as the inverter. If the
harmonic component causes any problems, connect a DC reactor (option) to the inverter. It may also
be necessary to connect an AC reactor to the power factor correcting capacitors.
(2) Noise
If noise generated from the inverter affects other devices, or that generated from peripheral
equipment causes the inverter to malfunction, follow the basic measures outlined below.
1) If noise generated from the inverter affects the other devices through power wires or grounding
wires:
- Isolate the grounded metal frames of the inverter from those of the other devices.
- Connect a noise filter to the inverter power wires.
- Isolate the power system of the other devises from that of the inverter with an insulated
transformer.
2) If induction or radio noise generated from the inverter affects other devices through power wires
or grounding wires:
- Isolate the main circuit wires from the control circuit wires and other device wires.
- Put the main circuit wires through a metal conduit pipe, and connect the pipe to the ground
near the inverter.
- Install the inverter into the metal switchboard and connect the whole board to the ground.
- Connect a noise filter to the inverter power wires.
3) When implementing measures against noise generated from peripheral equipment:
- For the control signal wires, use twisted or shielded-twisted wires. When using
shielded-twisted wires, connect the shield of the shielded wires to the common terminals of
the control circuit or ground.
- Connect a surge absorber in parallel with magnetic contactor's coils or other solenoids (if any).
(3) Leakage current

A high frequency current component generated by insulated gate bipolar transistors (IGBTs)
switching ON/OFF inside the inverter becomes leakage current through stray capacitance of inverter
input and output wires or a motor. If any of the problems listed below occur, take an appropriate
measure against them.
Table 2.11 Leakage Current Countermeasures
Problem Measures
A residual-current-operated 1) Decrease the carrier frequency.

protective device (RCD) or 2) Make the wires between the inverter and motor shorter.
earth leakage circuit breaker 3) Use an RCD or ELCB with lower sensitivity than the one currently
(ELCB) that is connected to used.
the input (primary) side has 4) Use an RCD or ELCB that features measures against the high
tripped. frequency current component (Fuji SG and EG series).
An external thermal relay 1) Decrease the carrier frequency.

was activated. 2) Increase the settling current of the thermal relay.
3) Use the electronic thermal overload protection built in the inverter,
instead of the external thermal relay.
2-28
Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD
3.1 LED Monitor, Keys and LED Indicators on the Keypad
As shown at the right, the keypad 7-segment LED
monitor LED
consists of a four-digit LED monitor,
six keys, and five LED indicators. indicators
The keypad allows you to run and

stop the motor, monitor running
status, and switch to the menu mode.
In the menu mode, you can set the Program/
Reset key RUN key
function code data, monitor I/O signal
states, maintenance information, and RUN LED
alarm information. Function/
STOP
Data key
key
UP key DOWN key
Table 3.1 Overview of Keypad Functions

LED Monitor,
Item Keys, and LED Functions
Indicators
Four-digit, 7-segment LED monitor which displays the followings
according to the operation modes.
LED In Running mode: Running status information (e.g., output
Monitor frequency, current, and voltage)
In Programming mode: Menus, function codes and their data
In Alarm mode: Alarm code, which identifies the alarm factor if
the protective function is activated.
Program/Reset key which switches the operation modes of the inverter.
In Running mode: Pressing this key switches the inverter to
Programming mode.
In Programming mode: Pressing this key switches the inverter to
Running mode.
In Alarm mode: Pressing this key after removing the alarm
factor will switch the inverter to Running
mode.
Function/Data key which switches the operation you want to do in each
mode as follows:
In Running mode: Pressing this key switches the information to
be displayed concerning the status of the
Operation inverter (output frequency (Hz), output current
Keys (A), output voltage (V), etc.).
In Programming mode: Pressing this key displays the function code
and sets the data entered with and
keys.
In Alarm mode: Pressing this key displays the details of the
problem indicated by the alarm code that has
come up on the LED monitor.
RUN key. Press this key to run the motor.
STOP key. Press this key to stop the motor.

UP and DOWN keys. Press these keys to select the setting items and
and change the function code data displayed on the LED monitor.
3-1
Table 3.1 Overview of Keypad Functions (Continued)
LED Monitor,
Item Keys, and LED Functions
Indicators
RUN LED Lights when any run command to the inverter is active.
Lights when the inverter is ready to run with a run command entered by
KEYPAD
CONTROL LED the key (F02 = 0, 2, or 3). In Programming and Alarm modes, you
cannot run the inverter even if the indicator lights.
These three LED indicators identify the unit of numeral displayed on the
LED monitor in Running mode by combination of lit and unlit states of
LED
them.
Indicators
Unit: kW, A, Hz, r/min and m/min
Unit LEDs Refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.3.1 "Monitoring the running status" for
(3 LEDs) details.
While the inverter is in Programming mode, the LEDs of Hz
Hz and kW light. A
kW
Simultaneous keying
Simultaneous keying means pressing two keys at the same time. The FRENIC-Multi supports
simultaneous keying as listed below. The simultaneous keying operation is expressed by a "+" letter
between the keys throughout this manual.
(For example, the expression " + keys" stands for pressing the key while holding down the
key.)
Table 3.2 Simultaneous Keying
Operation mode Simultaneous keying Used to:
+ keys Change certain function code data. (Refer to

Programming
codes F00, H03, H45, H97, J75, and J77 in
mode
Chapter 5 "FUNCTION CODES.")
+ keys
Switch to Programming mode without resetting

Alarm mode + keys
alarms currently occurred.
3.2 Overview of Operation Modes

FRENIC-Multi features the following three operation modes:
Running mode : This mode allows you to enter run/stop commands in regular operation.
You can also monitor the running status in real time.
Programming mode : This mode allows you to configure function code data and check a variety
of information relating to the inverter status and maintenance.
Alarm mode : If an alarm condition arises, the inverter automatically enters Alarm mode.
In this mode, you can view the corresponding alarm code* and its related
information on the LED monitor.
* Alarm code: Indicates the cause of the alarm condition that has triggered a protective function. For details,
refer to Chapter 8, Section 8.5 "Protective Functions."
3-2
Figure 3.1 shows the status transition of the inverter between these three operation modes.
(*1) The speed monitor allows you to select the desired one from the seven speed monitor items by using
function code E48.
(*2) Applicable only when PID control is active (J01 = 1, 2 or 3).
(*3) The Timer screen appears only when the timer operation is enabled with function code C21.
(*4) Applicable only when the full-menu mode is selected (E52 = 2).
(*5) Pressing key can reset an alarm only when the latest alarm is displayed on the LED monitor.
Figure 3.1 Transition between Basic Screens in Individual Operation Mode
3-3
3.3 Running Mode
When the inverter is turned ON, it automatically enters Running mode in which you can:
(1) Monitor the running status (e.g., output frequency and output current),
(2) Configure the reference frequency and other settings,
(3) Run/stop the motor, and
(4) Jog (inch) the motor.
3.3.1 Monitoring the running status
In Running mode, the eleven items listed below can be monitored. Immediately after the inverter is
turned ON, the monitor item specified by function code E43 is displayed. Press the key to switch
between monitor items. For details of switching the monitor item by using the key, refer to
"Monitor of running status" in Running mode in Figure 3.1.
Table 3.3 Monitoring Items

Display
Function
sample on LED indicator
Monitor items Unit Meaning of displayed value code data
the LED : ON, : OFF
for E43
monitor *1
Function code E48 specifies what to be displayed on the LED monitor
Speed monitor 0
and LED indicators.
Output frequency
(before slip 5*00 Hz A kW Hz Frequency actually being output (E48 = 0)
compensation)
Output frequency
(after slip 5*00 Hz A kW Hz Frequency actually being output (E48 = 1)
compensation)
Reference
frequency
5*00 Hz A kW Hz Reference frequency being set (E48 = 2)
120
Output frequency (Hz) ×
Motor speed 1500 Hz A kW r/min P01 (E48 = 3)
For motor 2, read P01 as A15.
Load shaft speed 30*0 Hz A kW r/min Output frequency (Hz) E50 (E48 = 4)
Line speed 30*0 Hz A kW m/min Output frequency (Hz) E50 (E48 = 5)
Constant feeding E50

rate time
50 Hz A kW min (E48 = 6)
Output frequency (Hz) × E39
Current output from the inverter

Output current 1"34 Hz A kW A 3
in RMS
Voltage output from the inverter
Output voltage *2 200u Hz A kW V 4
in RMS
Motor output torque in %
Calculated torque 50 Hz A kW % 8
(Calculated value)
Input power 1*25 Hz A kW kW Input power to the inverter 9
3-4
Table 3.3 Monitoring Items (Continued)
Display
sample on LED indicator Function
Monitor items Unit Meaning of displayed value
the LED : ON, : OFF code E43
monitor *1
PID command PID command/feedback amount
1*0* Hz A kW － 10
* 3, * 4 transformed to that of virtual
physical value of the object to be
PID feedback controlled (e.g. temperature)
)0* Hz A kW － 12
amount * 3, * 5 Refer to function codes E40 and
E41 for details.
Timer Remaining time of timer opera-
50 Hz A kW min 13
(Timer operation) *3 tion
PID output in % as the
maximum frequency (F03)
PID output * 3, * 4 10** Hz A kW % being at 100% 14
For motor 2, read F03 as A01.
Load factor of the motor in % as

Load factor *6 50; Hz A kW % 15
the rated output being at 100%
Motor output *7 )85 Hz A kW kW Motor output in kW 16
*1 A value exceeding 9999 cannot be displayed on the 4-digit LED monitor screen, so " "
appear instead.
*2 When the LED monitor displays an output voltage, the 7-segment letter u in the lowest digit
stands for the unit of the voltage "V."
*3 These PID related items appear only when the inverter PID-controls the motor according to a
PID command specified by function code J01 (= 1, 2 or 3).
The Timer item appears only when the timer operation is enabled with function code C21.
When the PID control or timer operation is disabled, "----" appear.
*4 When the LED monitor displays a PID command or its output amount, the dot (decimal point)
attached to the lowest digit of the 7-segment letter blinks.
*5 When the LED monitor displays a PID feedback amount, the dot (decimal point) attached to the
lowest digit of the 7-segment letter lights.
*6 When the LED monitor displays a load factor, the 7-segment letter ; in the lowest digit stands for
"%."
*7 When the LED monitor displays the motor output, the unit LED indicator "kW" blinks.
3-5
3.3.2 Setting up frequency and PID commands
You can set up the desired frequency and PID commands by using and keys on the keypad. It
is also possible to set up the frequency command as load shaft speed, motor speed etc. by setting
function code E48.
Setting up a frequency command
Using and keys (Factory default)
(1) Set function code F01 to "0: / keys on keypad." This can be done only when the inverter is
in Running mode.
(2) Press the / key to display the current reference frequency. The lowest digit will blink.
(3) If you need to change the frequency command, press the / key again. The new setting
will be automatically saved into the inverter's internal memory and retained even when the
power is off. When the power is turned ON next time, the setting will be used as an initial
reference frequency.
• If you have set function code F01 to "0: / keys on keypad" but have selected a
frequency command source other than frequency command 1 (i.e., frequency command
2, frequency command via communication, or multi-frequency command), then the
and keys are disabled to change the current frequency command even in Running
mode. Pressing either of these keys just displays the current reference frequency.
• When you start specifying the reference frequency or any other parameter with the /
key, the least significant digit on the display blinks; that is, the cursor lies in the least
significant digit. Holding down the / key changes data in the least significant digit
and generates a carry, while the cursor remains in the least significant digit.
• After the least significant digit blinks by pressing the / key, holding down the
key for more than 1 second moves the cursor from the least significant digit to the most
significant digit. Further holding it down moves the cursor to the next lower digit. This
cursor movement allows you to easily move the cursor to the desired digit and change
the data in higher digits.
• By setting function code C30 to "0: / keys on keypad" and selecting frequency
command 2, you can also specify or change the frequency command in the same
manner using the / key.
You can set a reference frequency not only with the frequency (Hz) but also with other menu items
(motor speed, load shaft speed, line speed and constant feeding rate time) depending on the setting
of function code E48 (= 3, 4, 5 or 6) as listed in Table 3.3.
3-6
Settings under PID process control
To enable the PID process control, you need to set function code J01 to "1" or "2."
Under the PID control, the items that can be specified or checked with and keys are different
from those under regular frequency control, depending upon the current LED monitor setting. If the
LED monitor is set to the speed monitor (E43 = 0), you can access manual speed commands
(frequency command) with and keys; if it is set to any other, you can access the PID process
command with those keys.
Refer to the FRENIC-Multi User's Manual (MEH457) for the details of the PID control.
Setting the PID process command with the and keys

(1) Set function code J02 to "0: / keys on keypad."
(2) Set the LED monitor to something other than the speed monitor (E43=0) when the inverter is in
Running mode. When the keypad is in Programming or Alarm mode, you cannot modify the PID
process command with the / key. To enable the PID process command to be modified
with the / key, first switch to Running mode.
(3) Press the / key to display the PID process command. The lowest digit of the displayed
command and its decimal point blink.
(4) To change the PID process command, press the / key again. The PID process command
you have specified will be automatically saved into the inverter’s internal memory. It is retained
even if you temporarily switch to another PID process command source and then go back to the
via-keypad PID process command. Also, it is retained in the memory even while the inverter is
powered off, and will be used as the initial PID process command next time the inverter is
powered ON.
• Even if multi-frequency is selected as a PID process command (SS4 or SS8 = ON), you
still can set the process command using the keypad.
• When function code J02 is set to any value other than "0," pressing the / key
displays, on the 7-segment LED monitor, the PID process command currently selected,
while you cannot change the setting.
• On the 7-segment LED monitor, the decimal point of the lowest digit is used to
characterize what is displayed. The decimal point of the lowest digit blinks when a PID
process command is displayed; the decimal point lights when a PID feedback amount is
displayed.
Table 3.4 PID process Command Manually Set with / Key and Requirements
PID control PID control

(Mode (Remote LED monitor Multi-frequency
command SV) With / key
selection) E43 SS4, SS8
J01 J02
0 PID process command by keypad

1 or 2 Other than 0 ON or OFF
PID process command currently
Other than 0 selected
3-7
Setting up the frequency command with and keys under PID process control
When function code F01 is set to "0" ( / keys on keypad) and frequency command 1 is
selected as a manual speed command (when disabling the frequency setting command via
communications link or multi-frequency command), switching the LED monitor to the speed monitor
in Running mode enables you to modify the frequency command with the / keys.
In Programming or Alarm mode, the / keys are disabled to modify the frequency command.
You need to switch to Running mode.
Table 3.5 lists the combinations of the commands and the figure illustrates how the manual speed
command entered via the keypad is translated to the final frequency command .
The setting procedure is the same as that for setting of a usual frequency command.
Table 3.5 Manual Speed (Frequency) Command Specified with / Keys and Requirements
Communi-
PID control
LED Frequency Multi- Multi- cations Cancel PID
(Mode Pressing /
monitor command 1 frequency frequency link control
selection) keys controls:
E43 F01 SS2 SS1 operation Hz/PID
J01
LE
OFF PID output

(PID (as final frequency
enabled) command)
0 OFF OFF OFF Manual speed
ON
(frequency)
(PID
command set by
disabled)
keypad
1 or 2 0
OFF PID output
(PID (as final frequency
enabled) command)
Other than the above Manual speed
ON
(frequency)
(PID
command currently
disabled)
selected
3-8
Settings under PID dancer control
To enable the PID dancer control, you need to set function code J01 to "3."
Under the PID control, the items that can be specified or checked with and keys are different
from those under the regular frequency control, depending upon the current LED monitor setting. If
the LED monitor is set to the speed monitor (E43 = 0), the item accessible is the primary frequency
command; if it is set to any other data, it is the PID dancer position command.
Refer to the FRENIC-Multi User's Manual (MEH457) for the details of the PID control.
Setting the PID dancer position command with the and keys
(1) Set function code J02 to "0: / keys on keypad."
(2) Set the LED monitor to something other than the speed monitor (E43=0) when the inverter is in
Running mode. When the keypad is in Programming or Alarm mode, you cannot modify the PID
command with the / key. To enable the PID dancer position command to be modified with
the / key, first switch to Running mode.
(3) Press the / key to display the PID dancer position command. The lowest digit of the
displayed command and its decimal point blink.
(4) To change the command, press the / key again. The command you have specified will be
automatically saved into the inverter’s internal memory as function code J57 data. It is retained
even if you temporarily switch to another PID command source and then go back to the
via-keypad PID command. Furthermore, you can directly configure the command with function
code J57.
• Even if multi-frequency is selected as a PID command (SS4 or SS8 = ON), you still can
set the PID dancer position command using the keypad.
• When function code J02 is set to any value other than "0," pressing the / key
displays, on the 7-segment LED monitor, the PID command currently selected, while you
cannot change the setting.
• On the 7-segment LED monitor, the decimal point of the lowest digit is used to
characterize what is displayed. The decimal point of the lowest digit blinks when a PID
command is displayed; the decimal point lights when a PID feedback amount is
displayed.
Table 3.6 PID Command Manually Set with / Key and Requirements
PID control PID control

(Mode (Remote LED monitor Multi-frequency
With / key
selection) command SV) E43 SS4, SS8
J01 J02
0 PID command by keypad

3 Other than 0 ON or OFF
Other than 0 PID command currently selected
3-9
Setting up the primary frequency command with and keys under PID dancer control
When function code F01 is set to "0" ( / keys on keypad) and frequency command 1 is
selected as a primary frequency command (when disabling the frequency setting command via
communications link and multi-frequency command), switching the LED monitor to the speed
monitor in Running mode enables you to modify the frequency command with the / keys.
In Programming or Alarm mode, the / keys are disabled to modify the frequency command.
You need to switch to Running mode.
Table 3.7 lists the combinations of the commands and the figure illustrates how the primary
frequency command entered via the keypad is translated to the final frequency command .
The setting procedure is the same as that for setting of a usual frequency command.
Table 3.7 Primary Frequency Command Specified with / Keys and Requirements
Communi-
PID control
LED Frequency Multi- Multi- cations Cancel PID
(Mode Pressing /
monitor command frequency frequency link control
selection) keys controls:
E43 1 F01 SS2 SS1 operation Hz/PID
J01
LE
OFF Final frequency

(PID command modified
enabled) by PID output
0 OFF OFF OFF
ON Keypad primary
(PID command
disabled) (Frequency)
3 0
OFF Final frequency
(PID command modified
enabled) by PID output
Other than the above
ON Current primary
(PID command
disabled) (Frequency)
3-10
3.3.3 Running/stopping the motor
By factory default, pressing the key starts

running the motor in the forward direction and
pressing the key decelerates the motor to
stop. The key is enabled only in Running
mode.
The motor rotational direction can be selected
by changing the setting of function code F02.
Operational relationship between function code F02 (Operation method) and key
Table 3.8 lists the relationship between function code F02 settings and the key, which determines
the motor rotational direction.
Table 3.8 Motor Rotational Direction Specified by F02
Data for F02 Pressing the key runs the motor:
In the direction commanded by the

0
terminal [FWD] or [REV]
key disabled
1 (The motor is driven by terminal
[FWD] or [REV] command.)
2 In the forward direction

(Note) The rotational direction of
IEC-compliant motors is opposite
3 In the reverse direction to that of the motor shown here.
For the details on operations with function code F02, refer to Chapter 5 "FUNCTION CODES."
When the keypad is in use for specifying the frequency settings or driving the motor, do not
disconnect the keypad from the inverter when the motor is running. Doing so may stop the
inverter.
3.4 Programming Mode

The Programming mode provides you with these functions--setting and checking function code data,
monitoring maintenance information and checking input/output (I/O) signal status. The functions can
be easily selected with the menu-driven system. Table 3.9 lists menus available in Programming
mode. The leftmost digit (numerals) of each letter string on the LED monitor indicates the
corresponding menu number and the remaining three digits indicate the menu contents.
When the inverter enters Programming mode from the second time on, the menu selected last in
Programming mode will be displayed.
3-11
Table 3.9 Menus Available in Programming Mode
LED
Refer
Menu # Menu monitor Main functions
shows: to:
Displays only basic function codes to customize Section

0 "Quick Setup" *fn: the inverter operation. 3.4.1
F codes
!f__ (Fundamental functions)
E codes
!e__ (Extension terminal functions)
C codes
!c__ (Control functions)
P codes Selecting each of
!p__ (Motor 1 parameters) these function
Section
1 "Data Setting" H codes codes enables
!h__ 3.4.2
(High performance functions) its data to be
displayed/changed.
A codes
!a__ (Motor 2 parameters)
J codes
!j__ (Application functions)
!y__ y codes (Link functions)
!o__ o codes (Optional function)
Displays only function codes that have been
Section
2 "Data Checking" "rep changed from their factory defaults. You can refer
3.4.3
to or change those function code data.
Displays the running information required for Section
3 "Drive Monitoring" #ope maintenance or test running. 3.4.4
Displays external interface information. Section
4 "I/O Checking" $i_o 3.4.5
"Maintenance Displays maintenance information including Section
5 %che
Information" cumulative run time. 3.4.6
Displays the recent four alarm codes. You can
Section
6 "Alarm Information" &al refer to the running information at the time when
3.4.7
the alarm occurred.
(Note 1) Mounting an optional multi-function keypad (TP-G1) adds the data copying function to the menu,
enabling reading, writing, and verifying of function code data.
(Note 2) The o codes are displayed only when the corresponding option is mounted. For details, refer to the
Instruction Manual for the corresponding option.
Selecting menus to display

The menu-driven system allows you to cycle through menus. To cycle through necessary menus
only for simple operation, use function code E52 that provides a choice of three display modes as
listed below.
The factory default (E52 = 0) is to display only two menus--Menu #0 "Quick Setup" and Menu #1
"Data Setting," allowing no switching to any other menu.
Table 3.10 Keypad Display Mode Selection – Function Code E52
Data for E52 Mode Menus selectable
Menu #0 "Quick Setup"
0 Function code data editing mode (factory default) Menu #1 "Data Setting"
1 Function code data check mode Menu #2 "Data Checking"
2 Full-menu mode Menus #0 through #6
Pressing the / key will cycle through the menu. With the key, you can select the
desired menu item. Once the entire menu has been cycled through, the display will return
to the first menu item.
3-12
3.4.1 Setting up basic function codes quickly -- Menu #0 "Quick Setup" --
Menu #0 "Quick Setup" in Programming mode allows you to quickly display and set up a basic set of
function codes specified in Chapter 5, Section 5.1, "Function Code Tables."
To use Menu #0 "Quick Setup," you need to set function code E52 to "0" (Function code data editing
mode) or "2" (Full-menu mode).
The predefined set of function codes that are subject to quick setup are held in the inverter.
Listed below are the function codes (including those not subject to quick setup) available on the
FRENIC-Multi.
Table 3.11 Function Codes Available on FRENIC-Multi
Function code
Function codes Function Description
group
F codes F00 to F51 Fundamental Functions concerning basic motor running

functions
E codes E01 to E99 Extension terminal Functions concerning the assignment of
functions control circuit terminals
Functions concerning the display of the LED
monitor
C codes C01 to C53 Control functions Functions associated with frequency
settings
P codes P01 to P99 Motor 1 parameters Functions for setting up characteristics
parameters (such as capacity) of the motor
H codes H03 to H98 High performance Highly added-value functions
functions
Functions for sophisticated control
A codes A01 to A46 Motor 2 parameters Functions for setting up characteristics
parameters (such as capacity) of the motor
J codes J01 to J92 Application Functions for applications such as PID
functions control
y codes y01 to y99 Link functions Functions for controlling communication
o codes o01 to o59 Optional functions Functions for options (Note)
(Note) The o codes are displayed only when the corresponding option is mounted. For details of the o codes,
refer to the Instruction Manual for the corresponding option.
For the list of function codes subject to quick setup and their descriptions, refer to Chapter 5,
Section 5.1 "Function Code Tables."
Through a multi-function keypad, you can add or delete function codes that are subject to
Quick Setup. For details, refer to the "Multi-function Keypad Instruction Manual."
Once you have added or deleted function codes for Quick Setup through a multi-function
keypad, they will remain valid even after you switch to a standard keypad. To restore the
function code settings subject to Quick Setup to their factory defaults, initialize the whole
data using function code H03 (data = 1).
3-13
Figure 3.2 shows the menu transition in Menu #0 "Quick Setup."
Figure 3.2 Menu Transition in Menu #0 "Quick Setup"
Basic key operation

This section gives a description of the basic key operation, following the example of the function
code data changing procedure shown in Figure 3.3.
This example shows you how to change function code F01 data from the factory default " /
keys on keypad (F01 = 0)" to "Current input to terminal [C1] (C1 function) (4 to 20 mA DC) (F01 = 2)."
(1) Turn the inverter ON. It automatically enters Running mode. In that mode, press the key to
switch to Programming mode. The function selection menu appears. (In this example, *fn: is
displayed.)
(2) If anything other than *fn: is displayed, use the and keys to display *fn:.
(3) Press the key to proceed to a list of function codes.
(4) Use the and keys to display the desired function code (f 01 in this example), then
press the key.
The data of this function code appears. (In this example, data 0 of f 01 appears.)
3-14
(5) Change the function code data using the and keys. (In this example, press the key
two times to change data 0 to 2.)
(6) Press the key to establish the function code data.
The saue appears and the data will be saved in the memory inside the inverter. The display will
return to the function code list, then move to the next function code. (In this example, f 02.)
Pressing the key instead of the key cancels the change made to the data. The data
reverts to the previous value, the display returns to the function code list, and the original
function code reappears.
(7) Press the key to return to the menu from the function code list.
Cursor movement
You can move the cursor when changing function code data by holding down the key
for 1 second or longer in the same way as with the frequency settings. This action is called
"Cursor movement."
Figure 3.3 Example of Function Code Data Changing Procedure
3.4.2 Setting up function codes -- Menu #1 "Data Setting" --
Menu #1 "Data Setting" in Programming mode allows you to set up function codes for making the
inverter functions match your needs.
To set function codes in this menu, it is necessary to set function code E52 to "0" (Function code data
editing mode) or "2" (Full-menu mode).
Basic key operation

For details of the basic key operation, refer to Menu #0 "Quick Setup" in Section 3.4.1.
3-15
3.4.3 Checking changed function codes -- Menu #2 "Data Checking" --
Menu #2 "Data Checking" in Programming mode allows you to check function codes that have been
changed. Only the function codes whose data has been changed from the factory defaults are
displayed on the LED monitor. You can refer to the function code data and change it again if
necessary. The menu transition in Menu #2 "Data Checking" is as same as its of Menu #0 "Quick
Setup."
Basic key operation

For details of the basic key operation, refer to Menu #0 "Quick Setup" in Section 3.4.1.
To check function codes in Menu #2 "Data Checking," it is necessary to set function code
E52 to "1" (Function code data check mode) or "2" (Full-menu mode).
3.4.4 Monitoring the running status -- Menu #3 "Drive Monitoring" --
Menu #3 "Drive Monitoring" is used to monitor the running status during maintenance and trial
running. The display items for "Drive Monitoring" are listed in Table 3.12. Figure 3.4 shows the menu
transition in Menu #3 "Drive Monitoring."
Figure 3.4 Menu Transition in Menu #3 "Drive Monitoring"
3-16
Basic key operation
To monitor the running status on the drive monitor, set function code E52 to "2" (Full-menu mode)
beforehand.
switch to Programming mode. The function selection menu appears.
(2) Use the and keys to display "Drive Monitoring" (#ope ).
(3) Press the key to proceed to a list of monitoring items (e.g. 3_00 ).
(4) Use the and keys to display the desired monitoring item, then press the key.
The running status information for the selected item appears.
(5) Press the key to return to a list of monitoring items. Press the key again to return to the
menu.
Table 3.12 Drive Monitor Display Items
LED
monitor Item Unit Description
shows:
Output
3_00 Hz Output frequency before slip compensation
frequency
Output Hz
3_01 frequency Output frequency after slip compensation
3_02 Output current A Output current
3_03 Output voltage V Output voltage

Calculated
3_04 % Calculated output torque of the motor in %
torque
Reference Hz
3_05 frequency Frequency specified by a frequency command
Rotational N/A Rotational direction being outputted

3_06 direction f: forward, r: reverse, ----: stop
Running N/A Running status in hexadecimal format
3_07 status Refer to " Displaying running status" on the next page.
120
Display value = (Output frequency Hz)
3_08 Motor speed r/min (Function code P01)
For motor 2, read P01 as A15.
Load shaft r/min Display value = (Output frequency Hz) (Function code E50)
speed
or m/min The 7-segment letters appear for 10000 (r/min) or more. If
3_09
Line speed appear, decrease function code E50 data so that the LED
monitor displays 9999 or below, referring to the above equation.
PID command N/A Virtual physical value (e.g., temperature or pressure) of the object to
be controlled, which is converted from the PID command using
3_10 function code E40 and E41 data (PID display coefficients A and B)
Display value = (PID command) (Coefficient A - B) + B
If PID control is disabled, "----" appears.
PID feedback N/A Virtual physical value (e.g., temperature or pressure) of the object to
amount be controlled, which is converted from the PID command using
3_11 function code E40 and E41 data (PID display coefficients A and B)
Display value = (PID feedback amount) (Coefficient A - B) + B
If PID control is disabled, "----" appears.
Torque limit
3_12 value % Driving torque limit value A (based on motor rated torque)
Torque limit
3_13 value % Braking torque limit value B (based on motor rated torque)
3-17
Displaying running status
To display the running status in hexadecimal format, each state has been assigned to bits 0 to 15 as
listed in Table 3.13. Table 3.14 shows the relationship between each of the status assignments and
the LED monitor display. Table 3.15 gives the conversion table from 4-bit binary to hexadecimal.
Table 3.13 Running Status Bit Assignment
Bit Notation Content Bit Notation Content
"1" when function code data is
15 BUSY 7 VL "1" under voltage limiting control.
being written.
14 Always "0." 6 TL "1" under torque limiting control.
WR "1" when the DC link bus voltage is

13 Always "0." 5 NUV higher than the undervoltage
level.
"1" when communication is
enabled (when ready for run and
12 RL 4 BRK "1" during braking.
frequency commands via
communications link).
"1" when the inverter output is
11 ALM "1" when an alarm has occurred. 3 INT
shut down.
10 DEC "1" during deceleration. 2 EXT "1" during DC braking.
"1" during running in the reverse
9 ACC "1" during acceleration. 1 REV
direction.
"1" during running in the forward
8 IL "1" under current limiting control. 0 FWD
direction.
Table 3.14 Running Status Display

LED No. LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Notation BUSY WR RL ALM DEC ACC IL VL TL NUV BRK INT EXT REV FWD
Binary 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
Hexa-
Example
decimal
on the
LED
monitor
Hexadecimal expression
A 4-bit binary number can be expressed in hexadecimal format (1 hexadecimal digit). Table 3.15
shows the correspondence between the two notations. The hexadecimals are shown as they appear
on the LED monitor.
Table 3.15 Binary and Hexadecimal Conversion
Binary Hexadecimal Binary Hexadecimal
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 8
0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 9
0 0 1 0 2 1 0 1 0 a
0 0 1 1 3 1 0 1 1 b
0 1 0 0 4 1 1 0 0 c
0 1 0 1 5 1 1 0 1 d
0 1 1 0 6 1 1 1 0 e
0 1 1 1 7 1 1 1 1 f
3-18
3.4.5 Checking I/O signal status -- Menu #4 "I/O Checking" --
Using Menu #4 "I/O Checking" displays the I/O status of external signals including digital and analog
I/O signals without using a measuring instrument. Table 3.16 lists check items available. The menu
transition in Menu #4 "I/O Checking" is shown in Figure 3.5.
Figure 3.5 Menu Transition in Menu #4 "I/O Checking"
3-19
Basic key operation
To check the status of the I/O signals, set function code E52 to "2" (Full-menu mode) beforehand.
(2) Use the and keys to display "I/O Checking" ($i_o).
(3) Press the key to proceed to a list of I/O check items (e.g. 4_00 ).
(4) Use the and keys to display the desired I/O check item, then press the key.
The corresponding I/O check data appears. For the item 4_00 or 4_01, using the and
keys switches the display method between the segment display (for external signal information
in Table 3.17) and hexadecimal display (for I/O signal status in Table 3.18).
(5) Press the key to return to a list of I/O check items. Press the key again to return to the
menu.
Table 3.16 I/O Check Items
LED monitor
Item Description
shows:
I/O signals on the control Shows the ON/OFF state of the digital I/O terminals.
4_00 circuit terminals Refer to " Displaying control I/O signal terminals" on
the next page for details.
Shows the ON/OFF state of the digital I/O terminals
that received a command via RS-485 and optional
I/O signals on the control
communications. Refer to " Displaying control I/O
4_01 circuit terminals under
signal terminals" and " Displaying control I/O signal
communications control
terminals under communications control" on the
following pages for details.
4_02 Input voltage on terminal [12] Shows the input voltage on terminal [12] in volts (V).
4_03 Input current on terminal [C1] Shows the input current on terminal [C1] in
milliamperes (mA).
4_04 Output voltage to analog meters Shows the output voltage on terminal [FM] in volts (V).
[FM]
4_06 Pulse rate of [FM] Shows the output pulse rate on terminal [FM] in pulses
per second (p/s).
4_07 Input voltage on terminal [C1] Shows the input voltage on terminal [C1] (V2 function
assigned) in volts (V).
4_10 Option control circuit terminal Shows the ON/OFF state of the digital I/O terminals on
(I/O) the digital I/O interface option. Refer to " Displaying
control I/O signal terminals on digital I/O interface
option" on page 3-22 for details.
4_15 PG pulse rate 1 Shows the PG pulse rate inputted when the PG
(A/B phase) interface is installed.
Displayed value = Pulse rate (p/s) 1000
4_16 PG pulse rate 1 (Z phase) Shows the pulse rate (p/s) in Z phase when the PG
interface is installed.
4_17 PG pulse rate 2 Shows the second PG pulse rate inputted when two
(A/B phase) PG interfaces are installed.
Displayed value = Pulse rate (p/s) 1000
4_18 PG pulse rate 2 (Z phase) Shows the second PG pulse rate (p/s) in Z phase
when two PG interfaces are installed.
3-20
Displaying control I/O signal terminals
The status of control I/O signal terminals may be displayed with ON/OFF of the LED segment or in
hexadecimal display.
• Display I/O signal status with ON/OFF of each LED segment
As shown in Table 3.17 and the figure below, each of segments "a" to "g" on LED1 lights when the
corresponding digital input terminal circuit ([FWD], [REV], [X1], [X2], [X3], [X4] or [X5]) is closed; it
goes off when it is open. Segment "a" and "b" on LED3 light when the circuit between output terminal
[Y1] or [Y2] and terminal [CMY], and do not light when the circuit is open. Segment "a" on LED4 is for
terminals [30A/B/C]. Segment "a" on LED4 lights when the circuit between terminals [30C] and [30A]
is short-circuited (ON) and does not light when it is open.
If all terminal input signals are OFF (open), segment "g" on all of LED1 to LED4 will light
("– – – –").
Table 3.17 Segment Display for External Signal Information

Segment LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1
a 30A/B/C Y1-CMY — FWD

b — Y2-CMY — REV
c — — — X1
d — — — X2
e — — — X3
f — — (XF)* X4
g — — (XR)* X5
dp — — (RST)* —
—: No corresponding control circuit terminal exists
* (XF), (XR), and (RST) are assigned for communication. Refer to " Displaying control I/O signal terminals
under communications control" on the next page.
• Displaying I/O signal status in hexadecimal format

Each I/O terminal is assigned to bit 15 through bit 0 as shown in Table 3.18. An unassigned bit is
interpreted as "0." Allocated bit data is displayed on the LED monitor as four hexadecimal digits (0
to f each).
With the FRENIC-Multi, digital input terminals [FWD] and [REV] are assigned to bit 0 and bit 1,
respectively. Terminals [X1] through [X5] are assigned to bits 2 through 6. The bit is set to "1" when
the corresponding input terminal is short-circuited (ON), and is set to "0" when it is open (OFF). For
example, when [FWD] and [X1] are ON (short-circuited) and all the others are OFF (open), 0005 is
displayed on LED4 to LED1.
Digital output terminal [Y1] and [Y2] are assigned to bits 0 and 1. Each bit is set to "1" when the
terminal is short-circuited with [CMY], and "0" when it is open.
The status of the relay contact output terminal [30A/B/C] is assigned to bit 8. It is set to "1" when the
circuit between output terminals [30A] and [30C] is closed, and "0" when the circuit between [30A]
and [30C] is open.
For example, if [Y1] is ON, [Y2] is OFF, and the circuit between [30A] and [30C] is closed, then
"0101 " is displayed on the LED4 to LED1.
Table 3.18 presents an example of bit assignment and corresponding hexadecimal display on the
7-segment LED.
3-21
Table 3.18 Segment Display for I/O Signal Status in Hexadecimal Format
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Input
(RST)* (XR)* (XF)* - - - - - - X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 REV FWD
terminal
Output 30
- - - - - - - - - - - - - Y2 Y1
terminal A/B/C
Binary 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
Example
Hexa-
decimal on
the LED
monitor
– No corresponding control circuit terminal exists.

* (XF), (XR), and (RST) are assigned for communication. Refer to " Displaying control I/O signal
terminals under communications control" below.
Displaying control I/O signal terminals under communications control

Under communications control, input commands (function code S06) sent via RS-485 or other
optional communications can be displayed in two ways: "with ON/OFF of each LED segment" and "in
hexadecimal format." The content to be displayed is basically the same as that for the control I/O
signal terminal status display; however, (XF), (XR), and (RST) are added as inputs. Note that under
communications control, the I/O display is in normal logic (using the original signals not inverted).
Refer to the RS-485 Communication User's Manual (MEH448b) for details on input commands
sent through RS-485 communications and the instruction manual of communication-related
options as well.
Displaying control I/O signal terminals on digital I/O interface option

The LED monitor can also show the signal status of the terminals on the digital I/O interface option,
just like the control circuit terminals.
Table 3.19 lists the assignment between LED segments and I/O signals.
Table 3.19 Segment Display for External Signal Information

Segment LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1
a — O1 I9 I1
b — O2 I10 I2
c — O3 I11 I3
d — O4 I12 I4
e — O5 SEL I5
f — O6 — I6
g — O7 — I7
dp — O8 — I8

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Input
terminal - - - SEL I12 I11 I10 I9 I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1
Output
terminal - - - - - - - - O8 O7 O6 O5 O4 O3 O2 O1
3-22
3.4.6 Reading maintenance information -- Menu #5 "Maintenance Information" --
Menu #5 "Maintenance Information" contains information necessary for performing maintenance on

the inverter. The menu transition in Menu #5 "Maintenance information" is as same as its of in Menu
#3 "Drive Monitoring."
Basic key operation
To view the maintenance information, set function code E52 to "2" (Full-menu mode) beforehand.
(2) Use the and keys to display "Maintenance Information" (%che ).
(3) Press the key to proceed to a list of maintenance item codes (e.g. 5_00 ).
(4) Use the and keys to display the desired maintenance item, then press the key.
The data of the corresponding maintenance item appears.
(5) Press the key to return to a list of maintenance items. Press the key again to return to the
menu.
Table 3.20 Display Items for Maintenance Information
LED
Monitor Item Description
shows:
Cumulative run Shows the content of the cumulative power-ON time counter of the
time inverter.
Unit: thousands of hours.
(Display range: 0.001 to 9.999, 10.00 to 65.53)
5_00 When the total ON-time is less than 10000 hours (display: 0.001 to
9.999), data is shown in units of one hour (0.001). When the total time is
10000 hours or more (display: 10.00 to 65.53), it is shown in units of 10
hours (0.01). When the total time exceeds 65535 hours, the counter will
be reset to 0 and the count will start again.
DC link bus Shows the DC link bus voltage of the inverter main circuit.
5_01 voltage Unit: V (volts)
Max. Shows the maximum temperature of the heat sink for every hour.
5_03 temperature of Unit: C (Temperatures below 20 C are displayed as 20 C.)
heat sink
Max. effective Shows the maximum current in RMS for every hour.
5_04 output current Unit: A (amperes)
Capacitance of Shows the current capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor (reservoir
the DC link bus capacitor) in %, based on the capacitance when shipping as 100%.
5_05 capacitor Refer to Chapter 7 "MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION" for details.
Unit: %
Cumulative run Shows the content of the cumulative run time counter of the electrolytic
time of capacitors mounted on the printed circuit boards.
electrolytic Unit: thousands of hours. (Display range: 0.001 to 99.99)
5_06 capacitors on the
Shown in units of 10 hours.
printed circuit
boards When the total time exceeds 99990 hours, the count stops and the
display remains at 99.99.
Cumulative run Shows the content of the cumulative run time counter of the cooling fan.
time of the This counter does not work when the cooling fan ON/OFF control
cooling fan (function code H06) is enabled and the fan is stopped.
5_07 Unit: thousands of hours. (Display range: 0.001 to 99.99)
Shown in units of 10 hours.
When the total time exceeds 99990 hours, the count stops and the
display remains at 99.99.
3-23
Table 3.20 Display Items for Maintenance Information (Continued)
LED
Monitor Item Description
shows:
Number of Shows the content of the cumulative counter of times the inverter is
startups started up (i.e., the number of run commands issued).
1.000 indicates 1000 times. When any number from 0.001 to 9.999 is
5_08 displayed, the counter increases by 0.001 per startup, and when any
number from 10.00 to 65.53 is counted, the counter increases by 0.01
every 10 startups. When the counted number exceeds 65535, the
counter will be reset to 0 and the count will start again.
Input watt-hour Shows the input watt-hour of the inverter.
Unit: 100 kWh (Display range: 0.001 to 9999)
Depending on the value of integrated input watt-hour, the decimal point
5_09 on the LED monitor shifts to show it within the LED monitor’s resolution
(e.g. the resolution varies between 0.001, 0.01, 0.1 or 1). To reset the
integrated input watt-hour and its data, set function code E51 to "0.000."
When the input watt-hour exceeds 1000000 kWh, it returns to "0."
Input watt-hour Shows the value expressed by "input watt-hour (kWh) × E51 (whose
data data range is 0.000 to 9999)."
Unit: None.
(Display range: 0.001 to 9999. The data cannot exceed 9999. (It will be
fixed at 9999 once the calculated value exceeds 9999.))
5_10
Depending on the value of integrated input watt-hour data, the decimal
point on the LED monitor shifts to show it within the LED monitors’
resolution.
To reset the integrated input watt-hour data, set function code E51 to
"0.000."
Number of Shows the total number of errors that have occurred in standard RS-485
RS-485 communication (via the RJ-45 connector as standard) since the power
5_11 errors is turned ON.
(standard) Once the number of errors exceeds 9999, the count returns to 0.
Content of Shows the most recent error that has occurred in standard RS-485
RS-485 communication in decimal format.
5_12 communications For error contents, refer to the RS-485 Communication User’s Manual
error (standard) (MEH448b).
Number of Shows the total number of optional communications card errors since
5_13 option errors the power is turned ON.
Once the number of errors exceeds 9999, the count returns to 0.
Inverter's ROM Shows the inverter's ROM version as a 4-digit code.
5_14
version
Keypad's ROM Shows the keypad's ROM version as a 4-digit code.
5_16
version
Number of Shows the total number of errors that have occurred in optional RS-485
5_17 RS-485 errors communication since the power is turned ON.
(option) Once the number of errors exceeds 9999, the count returns to 0.
Content of Shows the most recent error that has occurred in optional RS-485
RS-485 communication in decimal format.
5_18 communications For error contents, refer to the RS-485 Communication User’s Manual
error (option) (MEH448b).
Option's ROM Shows the option's ROM version as a 4-digit code.
5_19
version
Cumulative Shows the content of the cumulative power-ON time counter of the
motor run time motor.
5_23
The display method is the same as for "Cumulative run time" (5_00 )
above.
3-24
3.4.7 Reading alarm information -- Menu #6 "Alarm Information" --
Menu #6 "Alarm Information" shows the causes of the past 4 alarms in alarm code. Further, it is also
possible to display alarm information that indicates the status of the inverter when the alarm
occurred. Figure 3.6 shows the menu transition in Menu #6 "Alarm Information" and Table 3.21 lists
the details of the alarm information.
Figure 3.6 "Alarm Information" Menu Transition
3-25
Basic key operation
To view the alarm information, set function code E52 to "2" (Full-menu mode) beforehand.
(2) Use the and keys to display "Alarm Information" (&al).
(3) Press the key to proceed to a list of alarm codes (e.g. !0l1 ).
In the list of alarm codes, the alarm information for the last 4 alarms is saved as an alarm history.
(4) Each time the or key is pressed, the last 4 alarms are displayed in order from the most
recent one as ! , " , # and $ .
(5) While the alarm code is displayed, press the key to have the corresponding alarm item
number (e.g. 6_00 ) and data (e.g. Output frequency) displayed alternately in intervals of
approximately 1 second. You can also have the item number (e.g. 6_01 ) and data (e.g. Output
current) for any other item displayed using the and keys.
(6) Press the key to return to a list of alarm codes. Press the key again to return to the menu.
Table 3.21 Alarm Information Displayed
LED monitor
shows: Item displayed Description
(item No.)
6_00 Output frequency Output frequency
6_01 Output current Output current
6_02 Output voltage Output voltage
Calculated
6_03 Calculated motor output torque
torque
Reference
6_04 Frequency specified by frequency command
frequency
Rotational This shows the rotational direction being output.
6_05 direction f: forward, r: reverse, ----: stop
This shows the running status in hexadecimal. Refer to
6_06 Running status
" Displaying running status" in Section 3.4.4.
Shows the content of the cumulative power-ON time counter of the
inverter.
Unit: thousands of hours.
(Display range: 0.001 to 9.999, 10.00 to 65.53)
Cumulative run
6_07 When the total ON-time is less than 10000 hours (display: 0.001 to
time
9.999), data is shown in units of one hour (0.001). When the total
time is 10000 hours or more (display: 10.00 to 65.53), it is shown in
units of 10 hours (0.01). When the total time exceeds 65535 hours,
the counter will be reset to 0 and the count will start again.
Shows the content of the cumulative counter of times the inverter is
started up (i.e., the number of run commands issued).
1.000 indicates 1000 times. When any number from 0.001 to 9.999
6_08 No. of startups is displayed, the counter increases by 0.001 per startup, and when
any number from 10.00 to 65.53 is counted, the counter increases
by 0.01 every 10 startups. When the counted number exceeds
65535, the counter will be reset to 0 and the count will start again.
DC link bus Shows the DC link bus voltage of the inverter main circuit.
6_09
voltage Unit: V (volts)
3-26
Table 3.21 Alarm Information Displayed (Continued)
LED monitor
shows: Item displayed Description
(item No.)
Shows the temperature of the heat sink.
6_11 Max. temperature of heat sink
Unit: ºC
Terminal I/O signal status
6_12 (displayed with the ON/OFF of
LED segments)
Shows the ON/OFF status of the digital I/O terminals.
Terminal input signal status
6_13 Refer to " Displaying control I/O signal terminals" in
(in hexadecimal format)
Section 3.4.5 "Checking I/O signal status" for details.
Terminal output
6_14 signal status
No. of consecutive This is the number of times the same alarm occurs
6_15
occurrences consecutively.
Simultaneously occurring alarm codes (1)
6_16 Multiple alarm 1
("----" is displayed if no alarms have occurred.)
Simultaneously occurring alarm codes (2)
6_17 Multiple alarm 2
("----" is displayed if no alarms have occurred.)
Terminal I/O signal status
under communications control
6_18 (displayed with the ON/OFF of Shows the ON/OFF status of the digital I/O terminals
LED segments)
under RS-485 communications control. Refer to
Terminal input signal status
under communications control " Displaying control I/O signal terminals under
6_19
(in hexadecimal format) communications control" in Section 3.4.5 "Checking
Terminal output signal status I/O signal status" for details.
6_20 under communications control
6_21 Error sub code Secondary error code for the alarm.
When the same alarm occurs repeatedly in succession, the alarm information for the first
occurrences will be preserved and the information for other occurrences in-between will be
discarded. The number of consecutive occurrences will be preserved as the first alarm
information.
3.5 Alarm Mode

If an abnormal condition arises, the protective function is invoked and issues an alarm, then the
inverter automatically enters Alarm mode. At the same time, an alarm code appears on the LED
monitor.
Releasing the alarm and switching to Running mode

Remove the cause of the alarm and press the key to release the alarm and return to Running
mode. The alarm can be removed using the key only when the latest alarm code is displayed.
Displaying the alarm history

It is possible to display the most recent 3 alarm codes in addition to the one currently displayed.
Previous alarm codes can be displayed by pressing the / key while the current alarm code is
displayed.
3-27
Displaying the status of inverter at the time of alarm
When the alarm code is displayed, you may check various running status information (output
frequency and output current, etc.) by pressing the key. The item number and data for each
running information will be displayed alternately.
Further, you can view various pieces of information on the running status of the inverter using the
/ key. The information displayed is the same as for Menu #6 "Alarm Information" in Programming
mode. Refer to Table 3.21 in Section 3.4.7, "Reading alarm information."
Pressing the key while the running status information is displayed returns the display to the alarm
codes.
When the running status information is displayed after removal of the alarm cause, pressing
the key twice returns to the alarm code display and releases the inverter from the alarm
state. This means that the motor starts running if a run command has been received by this
time.
Switching to Programming mode

You can also switch to Programming mode by pressing + keys simultaneously with the alarm
displayed, and modify the function code data.
Figure 3.7 summarizes the possible transitions between different menu items.
Figure 3.7 Menu Transition in Alarm Mode
3-28
Chapter 4 RUNNING THE MOTOR
4.1 Running the Motor for a Test
4.1.1 Inspection and preparation prior to powering on
Check the following prior to powering on.
(1) Check if connection is correct.
Especially check if the power wires are connected to the inverter input terminals L1/R, L2/S and
L3/T or L1/L and L2/N, and output terminals U, V and W respectively and that the grounding
wires are connected to the ground electrodes correctly. Refer to Figure 4.1.
• Do not connect power supply wires to the inverter output terminals U, V, and W. Otherwise, the
inverter may be broken if you turn the power ON.
• Be sure to connect the grounding wires of the inverter and the motor to the ground electrodes.
Otherwise, electric shock may occur.
(2) Check for short circuits between terminals and

exposed live parts and ground faults.
(3) Check for loose terminals, connectors and screws.
(4) Check if the motor is separated from mechanical
equipment.
(5) Turn the switches OFF so that the inverter does not
start or operate erroneously at power-on.
(6) Check if safety measures are taken against (E.g. Wire connection for three-phase
power supply)
runaway of the system, e.g., a defense to protect
people from unexpectedly approaching your power Figure 4.1 Connection of Main Circuit
system. Terminals
4.1.2 Turning ON power and checking
• Be sure to install the terminal cover if any before turning the power ON.
Do not remove any cover while powering on.
• Do not operate switches with wet hands.
Otherwise electric shock could occur.
Turn the power ON and check the following points. This is a

case when no function code data is changed from the
factory setting.
(1) Check if the LED monitor displays *00 (means that
the frequency command is 0 Hz) that is blinking. (See
Figure 4.2.)
If the LED monitor displays numbers except *00,
press / keys to set *00 as the frequency
command.
(2) Check if a built-in cooling fan rotates.
Figure 4.2 Display of the LED Monitor
(For the inverter of 0.75 kW or below, no cooling fan is
after Power-on
mounted.)
4-1
4.1.3 Preparation before running the motor for a test--Setting function code data
Before running the motor, set function code data specified in Table 4.1 to the motor ratings and your
system design values. For the motor, check the rated values printed on the nameplate of the motor.
For your system design values, ask system designers about them.
For details about how to change function code data, refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.4.1 "Setting
up function codes quickly." Refer to the function code H03 in Chapter 5 "FUNCTION CODES"
for the factory default setting of motor parameters. If any of them is different from the default
setting, change the function code data.
Table 4.1 Settings of Function Code Data before Driving the Motor for a Test
Function code Name Function code data Factory setting
f 04 (a 02) Base frequency 50.0 (Hz)
Three-phase 200 V class series: 200 (V)

f 05 (a 03) Rated voltage
at base frequency Three-phase 400 V class series: 400 (V)
Motor ratings
p 02 (a 16) Motor parameter (printed on the nameplate Applicable motor rated capacity
(Rated capacity)
of the motor)
p 03 (a 17) Motor parameter Rated current of applicable motor
(Rated current)
p 99 (a 39) Motor selection 0: Motor characteristics 0

(Fuji standard 8-series motors)
System design values
f 03 (a 01) Maximum frequency 60.0 (Hz)
* For a test-driving of the
motor, increase values
f 07 so that they are longer
Acceleration time 1* 6.0 (s)
than your system design
values. If the set time is
short, the inverter may
f 08 Deceleration time 1* not start running the 6.0 (s)
motor.
In any of the following cases, the default settings may not produce the best results for
auto torque boost, torque calculation monitoring, auto energy saving, torque limiter,
automatic deceleration, auto search for idling motor speed, slip compensation, torque
vector, droop control, or overload stop, since the standard settings of motor parameters
for Fuji motors are not applicable. Tune the motor parameters according to the
procedure set forth below.
• The motor to be driven is not a Fuji product or is a non-standard product.
• The cabling between the motor and the inverter is long.
• A reactor is inserted between the motor and the inverter.
A codes are used to specify the data for motor 2. Use them if necessary.
＜Tuning procedure＞
1) Preparation
Referring to the rating plate on the motor, set the following function codes to their nominal
ratings:
• F04 and A02: Base frequency
• F05 and A03: Rated voltage at base frequency
• P02 and A16: Rated capacity
• P03 and A17: Rated current
4-2
2) Selection of tuning process
Check the situation of the machine system and choose between "Tuning while the motor is
stopped (P04 or A18 = 1)" and "Tuning while the motor is running (P04 or A18 = 2)." In the
case of "Tuning while the motor is running (P04 or A18 = 2)," also adjust the acceleration
and deceleration times (F07 and F08) and set the rotation direction properly so that it
matches the actual rotation direction of the machine system.
Data for Motor parameters Selection condition
Tuning type
P04, A18 subjected to tuning: of tuning type
Primary resistance Tuning the %R1 and %X, The motor cannot be rotated,
(%R1) with the motor being or more than 50% of the rated
1 stopped. load would be applied on the
Leakage reactance
(%X) motor if rotated.
Primary resistance Tuning the %R1, %X and Even if the motor is rotated, it
(%R1) rated slip frequency, with is safe and the load applied
Leakage reactance the motor being stopped. on the motor would be no
(%X) Tuning the no-load current, more than 50% of the rating.
2 with the motor running at (If you do the tuning with no
No-load current
50% of the base frequency. load, you will get the highest
Rated slip frequency precision.)
Lastly, tuning the rated slip
frequency, with the motor
being stopped.
Upon completion of the tuning, each motor parameter will be automatically saved into the
applicable function code.
3) Preparation of machine system

Perform appropriate preparations on the motor and its load, such as disengaging the
coupling and deactivating the safety device.
Switch to the motor 1 or motor 2, which the tuning is to be performed on.
Tuning results by P04 will be applied to P codes for the motor 1, and the tuning results by
A18 will be applied to A codes for the motor 2.
Assigning the command "Switch to motor 2 SWM2" to any of the terminal [Y1],
[Y2], or [30A/B/C] will automatically switch the output status of SWM2 depending
on the motor selected for the tuning.
4) Perform tuning
Set function code P04 or A18 to "1" or "2" and press the key. (The blinking of 1 or
2 on the LED monitor will slow down.)
Enter a run command for the rotation direction selected. The factory default is " key
on the keypad for forward rotation." To switch to reverse rotation, change the data of
function code F02.
The display of 1 or 2 stays lit, and tuning takes place while the motor being stopped.
(Maximum tuning time: Approx. 40 s.)
If P04 or A18 = 2, the motor is accelerated to approximately 50% of the base frequency
and then tuning takes place. Upon completion of measurements, the motor will
decelerate to a stop.
Tuning will continue after the motor is stopped.
(Maximum tuning time: Approx. 10 s.)
If the terminal signal FWD or REV is selected as the run command (F02 = 1), end
will appear upon completion of the measurements.
The run command is turned OFF. (The run command given through the keypad or the
communications link is automatically turned OFF).
The tuning completes and the next function code p05 or a20 appears on the keypad.
4-3
Errors during tuning
Improper tuning would negatively affect the operation performance and, in the worst case,
could even cause hunting or deteriorate precision. Therefore, if the inverter finds any
abnormality in the results of the tuning or any error in the process of the tuning, it will
display er7 and discard the tuning data.
Listed below are the abnormal or error conditions that can be recognized during tuning.
Possible tuning
Details
error causes
Error in tuning - An interphase voltage unbalance has been detected.
results - Tuning has resulted in an abnormally high or low value of a parameter.
Output current
An abnormally high current has flown during tuning.
error
During tuning, a run command has been turned OFF, or STOP (Force to
Sequence error stop), BX (Coast to a stop), DWP (Protect from dew condensation), or other
similar terminal command has been received.
- During tuning, any of the operation limiters has been activated.
Error due to
limitation - The maximum frequency or the frequency limiter (high) has limited tuning
operation.
Other errors An undervoltage or any other alarm has occurred.
If any of these conditions has occurred, either eliminate the abnormal or error factor(s) and
perform tuning again, or consult your Fuji Electric representative.
If a filter other than Fuji optional output filter (OFL- -4A) is connected to
the inverter's output (secondary) circuit, the result of tuning can be
unpredictable. When you replace an inverter, make a note of the old inverter’s
settings for the primary resistance %R1, leakage reactance %X, no-load
current, and rated slip frequency, and set those values to the new inverter’s
function codes.
4.1.4 Test run
If the user specifies the function codes wrongly or without completely understanding this
Instruction Manual and the FRENIC-Multi User's Manual (MEH457), the motor may rotate with a
torque or at a speed not permitted for the machine.
Accident or injury may result.
Follow the descriptions given in Section 4.1.1, "Inspection and preparation prior to powering on" to
Section 4.1.3, "Preparation before running the motor for a test," then begin test-driving of the motor.
If any abnormality is found in the inverter or motor, immediately stop operation and determine the
cause referring to Chapter 6, "TROUBLESHOOTING."
4-4
------------------------------------------------ Test Run Procedure -------------------------------------------------
(1) Turn the power ON and check that the reference frequency *00 Hz is blinking on the LED
monitor.
(2) Set a low reference frequency such as 5 Hz, using / keys. (Check that the frequency is
blinking on the LED monitor.)
(3) Press the key to start running the motor in the forward direction. (Check that the reference
frequency is displayed on the LED monitor.)
(4) To stop the motor, press the key.
< Check points during a test run >

• Check that the motor is running in the forward direction.
• Check for smooth rotation without motor humming or excessive vibration.
• Check for smooth acceleration and deceleration.
When no abnormality is found, press the key again to start driving the motor, then increase the
reference frequency using / keys. Check the above points again.
If any problem is found, modify the function code data again as described below.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.2 Operation
After confirming that the inverter normally drives the motor in a test run, make mechanical
connections (connections to the machine system) and electrical connections (wiring and cabling),
and configure the necessary function codes properly before starting a production run.
Depending on the production run conditions, further adjustments can be required, such
as adjustments of torque boost (F09/A05), acceleration time (F07/E10), and deceleration
time (F08/E11).
4.2.1 Jogging Operation
This section provides the procedure for jogging the motor.
Making the inverter ready to jog with the steps below. The LED monitor should display jog .
• Enter Running mode (see page 3-3).
• Press the + keys simultaneously. The LED monitor displays the jogging frequency for
approximately one second and then returns to jog again.
• Function codes C20 and H54 specify the jogging frequency and acceleration/
deceleration time, respectively. Use these function codes exclusively for the
jogging operation with your needs.
• Using the input terminal command "Ready for jogging" JOG switches between the
normal operation state and ready-to-jog state.
• Switching between the normal operation state and read-to-jog state with the +
keys is possible only when the inverter is stopped.
Jogging the motor.

Hold down the key during which the motor continues jogging. To decelerate to stop the motor,
release the key.
Exiting the ready-to-jog state and returning to the normal operation state
Press the + keys simultaneously.
4-5
Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES
5.1 Function Code Tables
The following tables list the function codes available for the FRENIC-Multi series of inverters.
F codes: Fundamental Functions
Change
Incre- Data Default Refer to
Code Name Data setting range Unit when
ment copying setting page:
running
F00 Data Protection 0: Disable both data protection and digital reference protection －－ Y Y 0 5-18
1: Enable data protection and disable digital reference protec tion
2: Disable data protection and enable digital reference protec tion
3: Enable both data protec tion and digital reference protection
F01 Frequency Command 1 0: UP/DOWN keys on keypad －－ N Y 0
1: Voltage input to terminal [12] (-10 to +10 VDC)
2: Current input to terminal [C1] (C1 function) (4 to 20 mA DC)
3: Sum of voltage and current inputs to terminals [12] and [C1]
(C1 function)
5: Voltage input to terminal [C1] (V2 function) (0 to 10 VDC)
7: Terminal command UP /DOWN control
11: Digital I/O interface option
12: PG interfac e card (option)
F02 Operation Method 0: RUN/STOP keys on keypad (Motor rotational direction specified by －－ N Y 2 5-20
terminal command FWD /REV )
1: Terminal command FWD or REV
2: RUN/STOP keys on keypad (forward)
3: RUN/STOP keys on keypad (reverse)
F03 Maximum Frequency 1 25.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz N Y *4
F04 Base Frequency 1 25.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz N Y *4 5-21
F05 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1 0: Output a voltage in proportion to input voltage 1 V N Y2 *4
80 to 240: Output an AVR-controlled voltage (for 200 V class series)
F06 Maximum Output Voltage 1 80 to 240: Output an AVR-controlled voltage (for 200 V class series) 1 V N Y2 *4
F07 Acceleration T ime 1 0.00 to 3600 0.01 s Y Y 6.00 5-22
Note: Entering 0.00 cancels the acceleration time, requiring external
soft-start.
F08 Deceleration T ime 1 0.00 to 3600 0.01 s Y Y 6.00
Note: Entering 0.00 cancels the deceleration time, requiring external
soft-start.
F09 Torque Boost 1 0.0 to 20.0 0.1 % Y Y *5 5-23
(percentage with respect to "F05: Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1")
Note: This setting takes effect when F37 = 0, 1, 3, or 4.
F10 Electronic T hermal Overload 1: For a general-purpose motor with shaft-driven cooling fan －－ Y Y 1 5-25
Protection for Motor 1 2: For an inverter-driven motor, non-ventilated motor, or motor with
(Select motor characteristics) separately powered cooling fan
F11 (Overload detection level) 0.00: Disable 0.01 A Y Y1 *5
0.01 to 100.00 Y2
1 to 135% of the rated current (allowable continuous drive current) of the
motor
F12 (Thermal time constant) 0.5 to 75.0 0.1 min Y Y 5.0
F14 Restart Mode after Momentary Power 0: Disable restart (Trip immediately) －－ Y Y *4 5-28
Failure 1: Disable restart (Trip after a recovery from power failure)
(Mode selection) 4: Enable restart (Res tart at the frequency at which the power failure
occurred, for general loads)
5: Enable restart (Res tart at the starting frequenc y, for low-inertia load)
F15 Frequency Limiter (High) 0.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz Y Y 70.0 5-31
F16 (Low) 0.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz Y Y 0.0
F18 Bias　　 (Frequency command 1) -100.00 to 100.00 *1 0.01 % Y* Y 0.00 5-32
F20 DC Braking 1 0.0 to 60.0 0.1 Hz Y Y 0.0 5-33
(Braking starting frequency)
F21 (Braking level) 0 to 100 1 % Y Y 0
F22 (Braking time) 0.00 : Disable 0.01 s Y Y 0.00
0.01 to 30.00
F23 Starting Frequency 1 0.1 to 60.0 0.1 Hz Y Y 0.5 5-34
F24 (Holding time) 0.00 to 10.00 0.01 s Y Y 0.00
F25 Stop Frequency 0.1 to 60.0 0.1 Hz Y Y 0.2
The shaded function codes ( ) are applicable to the quick setup.

*1 When you make settings from the keypad, the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can
display.
(Example) If the setting range is from -200.00 to 200.00, the incremental unit is:
"1" for -200 to -100, "0.1" for -99.9 to -10.0 and for 100.0 to 200.0, and "0.01" for -9.99 to -0.01 and for 0.00 to 99.99.
4
* Default settings for these function codes vary depending on the shipping destination. See Table 5.1 "Factory Defaults
According to Shipping Destination" on page 5-14.
*5 Default settings for these function codes vary depending on the inverter capacity. See Table 5.2 "Factory Defaults According
to Inverter Capacity" on pages 5-15 and 5-16.
5-1
(F codes continued)
Change
running
F26 Motor Sound　 (Carrier frequency) 0.75 to 15 1 kHz Y Y *4 5-34
F27 (Tone) 0: Level 0 (Inactive) －－ Y Y 0
1: Level 1
2: Level 2
3: Level 3
F29 Analog Output [FM] 0: Output in voltage (0 to 10 VDC) ( FMA ) －－ Y Y 0 5-35
(Mode selection) 2: Output in pulse (0 to 6000 p/s) ( FMP )
F30 (Voltage adjustment) 0 to 300 (FMA ) 1 % Y* Y 100
F31 (Function) Select a function to be monitored from the followings. －－ Y Y 0
0: Output frequency 1 (before slip compensation)
1: Output frequency 2 (after slip compensation)
2: Output current
3: Output voltage
4: Output torque
5: Load factor
6: Input power
7: PID feedback amount (PV)
8: PG feedback value
9: DC link bus voltage
10: Universal AO
13: Motor output
14: Calibration
15: PID command (SV)
16: PID output (MV)
F33 (Pulse rate) 25 to 6000 (FMP , Pulse rate at 100% output) 1 p/s Y* Y 1440
F37 Load Selection/Auto Torque Boost/ 0: Variable torque load －－ N Y 1 5-23
Auto Energy Saving Operation 1 1: Constant torque load
2: Auto-torque boost
3: Auto-energy saving operation (Variable torque load during ACC/DEC)
4: Auto-energy saving operation (Constant torque load during ACC/DEC)
5: Auto-energy saving operation (Auto-torque boost during ACC/DEC)
F39 Stop Frequency 0.00 to 10.00 0.01 s Y Y 0.00 5-34
(Holding Time)
F40 Torque Limiter 1 20 to 200 1 % Y Y 999 5-36
(Limiting level for driving) 999: Disable
F41 (Limiting level for braking) 20 to 200 1 % Y Y 999
999: Disable
F42 Control Mode Selection 1 0: V/f control with slip compensation inactive －－ N Y 0 5-37
1: Dynamic torque vector c ontrol
2: V/f control with slip compensation active
3: V/f control with optional PG interface
4: Dynamic torque vector c ontrol with optional PG interface
F43 Current Limiter 0: Disable (No current limiter works.) －－ Y Y 2 (Note) 5-38
(Mode selection) 1: Enable at constant speed (Disable during ACC/DEC)
2: Enable during ACC/constant speed operation
F44 (Level) 20 to 200 (The data is interpreted as the rated output c urrent of the inverter 1 % Y Y 180 (Note)
for 100%.)
F50 Electronic T hermal Overload Protection 1 to 900 1 kWs Y Y 999
for Braking Resis tor 999: Disable
(Discharging capability) 0: Reserved
F51 (Allowable average loss) 0.001 to 50.000 0.001 kW Y Y 0.000
0.000: Reserved

(Note) Default settings for inverters with inverter's ROM version 0799 or earlier: F43 = 0 and F44 = 200 (For the inverter's ROM
version checking procedure, refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.4.6 "Reading maintenance information".)
*4 Default settings for these function codes vary depending on the shipping destination. See Table 5.1 "Factory Defaults
5-2
E codes: Extension Terminal Functions
Change
running
E01 Terminal [X1] Function Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding function to －－ N Y 0 5-40
terminals [X1] to [X5] as listed below.
E02 Terminal [X2] Function 0 (1000): Select multi-frequency ( SS1 ) －－ N Y 1
4 (1004): Select ACC/DEC time ( RT1 )
6 (1006): Enable 3-wire operation ( HLD )
7 (1007): Coast to a stop ( BX )
8 (1008): Reset alarm ( RST )
9 (1009): Enable external alarm trip ( THR )
10 (1010): Ready for jogging ( JOG )
11 (1011): Select frequency command 2/1 ( Hz2/Hz1 )
12 (1012): Select motor 2/motor 1 ( M2/M1 )
13 : Enable DC braking ( DCBRK )
14 (1014): Select torque limiter level ( TL2/TL1 )
17 (1017): UP (Increase output frequency) ( UP )
18 (1018): DOWN (Decrease output frequency) ( DOWN )
19 (1019): Enable data change with keypad ( WE-KP )
20 (1020): Cancel PID control ( Hz/PID )
21 (1021): Switch normal/invers e operation ( IVS )
24 (1024): Enable communications link via ( LE )
RS-485 or field bus
25 (1025): Universal DI ( U-DI )
26 (1026): Enable auto search for idling motor ( STM )
speed at starting
27 (1027): Switch to speed feedback control ( PG/Hz ) *6
30 (1030): Force to stop ( STOP )
33 (1033): Reset PID integral and differential ( PID-RST )
components
34 (1034): Hold PID integral component ( PID-HLD )
42 (1042): Activate the limit switch at start point ( LS ) *6
43 (1043): Start/reset ( S/R ) *6
44 (1044): Switch to the serial pulse receiving ( SPRM ) *6
mode
45 (1045): Enter the return mode ( RTN ) *6
46 (1046): Enable overload stop ( OLS ) *6
Setting the value of 1000s in parentheses ( ) shown above assigns a
negative logic input to a terminal.
Note: In the case of THR and STOP , data (1009) and (1030) are for normal
logic, and "9" and "30" are for negative logic, respectively.
E10 Acceleration T ime 2 0.00 to 3600 0.01 s Y Y 10.0 5-22
Note: Entering 0.00 cancels the acceleration time, requiring external soft-
start and -stop.
E11 Deceleration T ime 2 0.00 to 3600 0.01 s Y Y 10.0
Note: Entering 0.00 cancels the acceleration time, requiring external soft-
start and -stop.
E16 Torque Limiter 2 20 to 200 1 % Y Y 999 5-36
(Limiting level for driving) 999 : Disable
E17 (Limiting level for braking) 20 to 200 1 % Y Y 999
999 : Disable
*6 These are available on inverters with inverter's ROM version 0700 or later. (For the version checking procedure, refer to
Chapter 3, Section 3.4.6 "Reading maintenance information."
5-3
(E codes continued)
Change
running
E20 Terminal [Y1] Function Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding function to －－ N Y 0 5-48
terminals [Y1], [Y2], and [30A/B/C] as listed below.
E21 Terminal [Y2] Function 0 (1000): Inverter running ( RUN ) －－ N Y 7
E27 Terminal [30A/B/C] Function 1 (1001): Frequency arrival signal ( FAR ) －－ N Y 99
2 (1002): Frequency detected ( FDT )
3 (1003): Undervoltage detected ( LU )
(Inverter stopped)
4 (1004): Torque polarity detected ( B/D )
5 (1005): Inverter output limiting ( IOL )
6 (1006): Auto-restarting after momentary ( IPF )
power failure
7 (1007): Motor overload early warning ( OL )
10 (1010): Inverter ready to run ( RDY )
21 (1021): Frequency arrival signal 2 ( FAR2 )
22 (1022): Inverter output limiting with delay ( IOL2 )
26 (1026): Auto-resetting ( TRY )
27 (1027): Universal DO ( U-DO ) *7
28 (1028): Heat sink overheat early warning ( OH )
30 (1030): Service lifetime alarm ( LIFE )
33 (1033): Reference loss detected ( REF OFF )
35 (1035): Inverter output on ( RUN2 )
36 (1036): Overload prevention control ( OLP )
37 (1037): Current detected ( ID )
38 (1038): Current detected 2 ( ID2 )
42 (1042): PID alarm ( PID-ALM )
49 (1049): Switched to motor 2 ( SWM2 )
56 (1056): Motor overheat detected by ( THM ) *7
thermistor (PTC)
57 (1057): Brake signal ( BRKS )
59 (1059): Terminal [C1] wire break ( C1OFF ) *7
76 (1076): PG error detected ( PG-ERR ) *6
80 (1080): Stop position override alarm ( OT ) *6
81 (1081): Timer output ( TO ) *6
82 (1082): Positioning completed ( PSET ) *6
83 (1083): Current pos ition count overflowed ( POF ) *6
99 (1099): Alarm output (for any alarm) ( ALM )
E29 Frequency Arrival Delay T ime 0.01 to 10.00 0.01 s Y Y 0.10 5-52
E30 Frequency Arrival 0.0 to 10.0 0.1 Hz Y Y 2.5
(Hysteres is width)
E31 Frequency Detection (FDT) 0.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz Y Y *4 -
(Detection level)
E32 (Hysteres is width) 0.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz Y Y 1.0
E34 Overload Early Warning/Current *5 5-52
Detection
(Level) 0.00 : Disable 0.01 A Y Y1
Current value of 1 to 200% of the inverter rated current Y2
E35 (Timer) 0.01 to 600.00 *1 0.01 s Y Y 10.00
E37 Current Detection 2　 (Level) 0.00 : Disable 0.01 A Y Y1 *5
Current value of 1 to 200% of the inverter rated current Y2
E38 (T imer) 0.01 to 600.00 *1 0.01 s Y Y 10.00

E39 Coefficient for Constant Feeding Rate 0.000 to 9.999 0.001 － Y Y 0.000 5-53
Time
display.
5-4
(E codes continued)
Change
running
E40 PID Display Coefficient A -999 to 0.00 to 9990 *1 0.01 － Y Y 100 -
E41 PID Display Coefficient B -999 to 0.00 to 9990 *1 0.01 － Y Y 0.00
E42 LED Display Filter 0.0 to 5.0 0.1 s Y Y 0.5
E43 LED Monitor (Item selection) 0: Speed monitor (select by E48) －－ Y Y 0
3: Output current
4: Output voltage
8: Calculated torque
9: Input power
10: PID command
12: PID feedback amount
13: Timer
14: PID output
15: Load factor
16: Motor output
21: Current position pulse c ount *6
22: Position deviation pulse count *6
E45 LCD Monitor *3 (Item selection) 0: Running status, rotational direction and operation guide －－ Y Y 0
1: Bar charts for output frequency, current and calculated torque
E46 (Language selection) 0: Japanese －－ Y Y *4
1: Englis h
2: German
3: French
4: Spanish
5: Italian
E47 (Contrast control) 0 (Low) to 10 (High) 1 － Y Y 5
E48 LED Monitor (Speed monitor item) 0: Output frequency (Before slip compensation) －－ Y Y 0
1: Output frequency (After slip compensation)
2: Reference frequency
3: Motor speed in r/min
4: Load shaft speed in r/min
5: Line speed in m/min
6: Constant feeding rate time
E50 Coefficient for Speed Indication 0.01 to 200.00 *1 0.01 － Y Y 30.00 5-53
E51 Display Coefficient for Input Watt-hour 0.000 (Cancel/reset） 0.001 － Y Y 0.010
Data 0.001 to 9999
E52 Keypad (Menu dis play mode) 0: Function code data editing mode (Menus #0 and #1) －－ Y Y 0 -
1: Function code data check mode (Menu #2)
2: Full-menu mode (Menus #0 through #6)
E59 Terminal [C1] Signal Definition 0: Current input (C1 function), 4 to 20 mADC －－ N Y 0 5-53
(C1/V2 Function) 1: Voltage input (V2 function), 0 to +10 VDC
E61 Terminal [12] Extended Function Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding function to －－ N Y 0 5-54
terminals [12] and [C1] (C1/V2 function) as listed below.
E62 Terminal [C1] Extended Function 0: None －－ N Y 0
(C1 function) 1: Auxiliary frequency command 1
E63 Terminal [C1] Extended Function 2: Auxiliary frequency command 2 －－ N Y 0
(V2 function) 3: PID command 1
5: PID feedback amount
E65 Referenc e Loss Detection 0: Decelerate to stop 1 % Y Y 999
(Continuous running frequency) 20 to 120
999: Disable

display.
*3 These function codes are for use with an optional multi-function keypad.
5-5
(E codes continued)
Change
running
E98 Terminal [FWD] Function Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding function to －－ N Y 98 5-40
terminals [FWD] and [REV] as listed below.
E99 Terminal [REV] Function 0 (1000): Select multi-frequency ( SS1 ) －－ N Y 99
1 (1001): Select multi-frequency ( SS2 )
4 (1004): Select ACC/DEC time ( RT1 )
6 (1006): Enable 3-wire operation ( HLD )
7 (1007): Coast to a stop ( BX )
8 (1008): Reset alarm ( RST )
9 (1009): Enable external alarm trip ( THR )
10 (1010): Ready for jogging ( JOG )
11 (1011): Select frequency command 2/1 ( Hz2/Hz1 )
12 (1012): Select motor 2/motor 1 ( M2/M1 )
13 : Enable DC braking ( DCBRK )
14 (1014): Select torque limiter level ( TL2/TL1 )
17 (1017): UP (Increase output frequency) ( UP )
18 (1018): DOWN (Decrease output ( DOWN )
frequency)
19 (1019): Enable data change with keypad ( WE-KP )
20 (1020): Cancel PID control ( Hz/PID )
21 (1021): Switch normal/invers e operation ( IVS )
24 (1024): Enable communications link via ( LE )
RS-485 or field bus
25 (1025): Universal DI ( U-DI )
26 (1026): Enable auto search for idling motor ( STM )
speed at starting
27 (1027): Switch to speed feedback control ( PG/Hz ) *6
30 (1030): Force to stop ( STOP )
33 (1033): Reset PID integral and differential ( PID-RST )
components
34 (1034): Hold PID integral component ( PID-HLD )
42 (1042): Activate the limit switch at start point ( LS ) *6
43 (1043): Start/reset ( S/R ) *6
44 (1044): Switch to the serial pulse receiving ( SPRM ) *6
mode
45 (1045): Enter the return mode ( RTN ) *6
46 (1046): Enable overload stop ( OLS ) *6
98 : Run forward ( FWD )
99 : Run reverse ( REV )
Note: In the case of THR and STOP , data (1009) and (1030) are for normal
logic, and "9" and "30" are for negative logic, respectively.
5-6
C codes: Control Functions
Change
running
C01 Jump Frequency 1 0.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz Y Y 0.0 -
C02 2 Y Y 0.0
C03 3 Y Y 0.0
C04 (Hysteres is width) 0.0 to 30.0 0.1 Hz Y Y 3.0
C05 Multi-Frequency 1 0.00 to 400.00 *1 0.01 Hz Y Y 0.00
C06 2 Y Y 0.00
C07 3 Y Y 0.00
C08 4 Y Y 0.00
C09 5 Y Y 0.00
C10 6 Y Y 0.00
C11 7 Y Y 0.00
C12 8 Y Y 0.00
C13 9 Y Y 0.00
C14 10 Y Y 0.00
C15 11 Y Y 0.00
C16 12 Y Y 0.00
C17 13 Y Y 0.00
C18 14 Y Y 0.00
C19 15 Y Y 0.00
C20 Jogging Frequency 0.00 to 400.00 *1 0.01 Hz Y Y 0.00
C21 Timer Operation 0: Disable －－ N Y 0 5-55
1: Enable
C30 Frequency Command 2 0: UP/DOWN keys on keypad －－ N Y 2 5-18
1: Voltage input to terminal [12] (-10 to +10 VDC)
2: Current input to terminal [C1] (C1 function) (4 to 20 mA DC)
3: Sum of voltage and current inputs to terminals [12] and [C1]
(C1 function)
5: Voltage input to terminal [C1] (V2 function) (0 to 10 VDC)
11: Digital I/O interface option
12: PG interfac e card (option)
C31 Analog Input Adjustment for [12] -5.0 to 5.0 0.1 % Y* Y 0.0 5-55
(Offset)
C32 (Gain) 0.00 to 200.00 *1 0.01 % Y* Y 100.0 5-32
C33 (Filter time constant) 0.00 to 5.00 0.01 s Y Y 0.05 5-55
C34 (Gain base point) 0.00 to 100.00 *1 0.01 % Y* Y 100.0 5-32
C35 (Polarity) 0: Bipolar －－ N Y 1 -
1: Unipolar
C36 Analog Input Adjustment for [C1] -5.0 to 5.0 0.1 % Y* Y 0.0 5-55
(C1 function) (Offset)
C37 (Gain) 0.00 to 200.00 *1 0.01 % Y* Y 100.0 5-32
C41 Analog Input Adjustment for [C1] -5.0 to 5.0 0.1 % Y* Y 0.0 5-55
(V2 function) (Offset)
C42 (Gain) 0.00 to 200.00 *1 0.01 % Y* Y 100.0 5-32
C50 Bias (Frequency command 1) 0.00 to 100.00 *1 0.01 % Y* Y 0.00
(Bias base point)
C51 Bias (PID command 1) -100.00 to 100.00 -
(Bias value) 0.01 % Y* Y 0.00
C52 (Bias base point) 0.00 to 100.00 *1 0.01 % Y* Y 0.00
C53 Selection of Normal/Invers e Operation 0: Normal operation －－ Y Y 0
(Frequency command 1) 1: Inverse operation
display.
5-7
P codes: Motor 1 Parameters
Change
running
P01 Motor 1 (No. of poles) 2 to 22 2 poles N Y1 4 5-56
Y2
P02 (Rated capacity) 0.01 to 30.00 (where, P99 data is 0, 3, or 4.) 0.01 kW N Y1 *5
0.01 to 30.00 (where, P99 data is 1.) 0.01 HP Y2
P03 (Rated current) 0.00 to 100.0 0.01 A N Y1 Rated value

Y2 of Fuji
standard
motor
P04 (Auto-tuning) 0: Disable －－ N N 0
1: Enable (Tune %R1 and %X while the motor is stopped.)
2: Enable (Tune %R1, %X and rated slip while the motor is stopped, and
no-load current while running.)
P05 (Online tuning) 0: Disable －－ Y Y 0
1: Enable
P06 (No-load current) 0.00 to 50.00 0.01 A N Y1 Rated value
Y2 of Fuji
standard
motor
P07 (%R1) 0.00 to 50.00 0.01 % Y Y1 Rated value
Y2 of Fuji
standard
motor
P08 (%X) 0.00 to 50.00 0.01 % Y Y1 Rated value
Y2 of Fuji
standard
motor
P09 (Slip compensation gain for driving) 0.0 to 200.0 0.1 % Y* Y 100.0 5-57
P10 (Slip compensation res ponse time) 0.01 to 10.00 0.01 s Y Y1 0.50
Y2
P11 (Slip compensation gain for braking) 0.0 to 200.0 0.1 % Y* Y 100.0
P12 (Rated slip frequency) 0.00 to 15.00 0.01 Hz N Y1 Rated value 5-56
Y2 of Fuji
standard
motor
P99 Motor 1 Selection 0: Motor characteristics 0 (Fuji standard motors, 8-series) －－ N Y1 0 5-57
1: Motor characteristics 1 (HP rating motors) Y2
3: Motor characteristics 3 (Fuji standard motors, 6-series)
4: Other motors

5-8
H codes: High Performance Functions
Change
running
H03 Data Initialization 0: Disable initialization －－ N N 0 5-58
1: Initialize all function code data to the factory defaults
2: Initialize motor 1 parameters
3: Initialize motor 2 parameters
H04 Auto-reset (Times) 0: Disable 1 times Y Y 0 5-63
1 to 10
H05 (Reset interval) 0.5 to 20.0 0.1 s Y Y 5.0
H06 Cooling Fan ON/OFF Control 0: Disable (Always in operation) －－ Y Y 0 5-64
1: Enable (ON/OFF controllable)
H07 Acceleration/Deceleration Pattern 0: Linear －－ Y Y 0
1: S-curve (Weak)
2: S-curve (Strong)
3: Curvilinear
H08 Rotational Direction Limitation 0: Disable －－ N Y 0 -
1: Enable (Reverse rotation inhibited）
2: Enable (Forward rotation inhibited）
H09 Starting Mode (Auto search) 0: Disable －－ N Y 0 5-65
1: Enable (At restart after momentary power failure)
2: Enable (At restart after momentary power failure and at normal start)
H11 Deceleration Mode 0: Normal deceleration －－ Y Y 0 5-67
1: Coast-to-stop
H12 Instantaneous Overcurrent 0: Disable －－ Y Y 1
Limiting 1: Enable
(Mode selection)
H13 Restart Mode after Momentary Power 0.1 to 10.0 0.1 s Y Y1 *5 5-28
Failure Y2
　(Restart time)
H14 (Frequency fall rate) 0.00: Deceleration time selected by F08 0.01 Hz/s Y Y 999
0.01 to 100.00
999: Follow the current limit command
H16 (Allowable momentary 0.0 to 30.0 0.1 s Y Y 999
power failure time) 999 : Automatically determined by inverter
H26 Thermistor (Mode selection) 0: Disable －－ Y Y 0 -
1: Enable (With PTC, the inverter immediately trips with 0h4 dis played.)
2: Enable (With PTC, the inverter issues output signal THM and
continues to run. *7
H27 (Level) 0.00 to 5.00 0.01 V Y Y 1.60
H28 Droop Control -60.0 to 0.0 0.1 Hz Y Y 0.0 5-68
H30 Communications Link Function Frequency command Run command －－ Y Y 0
(Mode selection) 0: F01/C30 F02
1: RS-485 F02
2: F01/C30 RS-485
3: RS-485 RS-485
4: RS-485 (option) F02
5: RS-485 (option) RS-485
6: F01/C30 RS-485 (option)
7: RS-485 RS-485 (option)
8: RS-485 (option) RS-485 (option)
H42 Capacitance of DC Link Bus Capacitor Indication for replacing DC link bus c apacitor (0000 to FFFF: Hexadecimal) 1 － Y N － -
H43 Cumulative Run Time of Cooling Fan Indication of cumulative run time of c ooling fan for replacement －－ Y N －
H44 Startup T imes of Motor 1 Indication of cumulative startup times －－ Y N －
H45 Mock Alarm 0: Disable －－ Y N 0 5-70
1: Enable (Once a mock alarm occurs, the data automatically returns to
0.)
H47 Initial Capacitance of DC Link Bus Indication for replacing DC link bus c apacitor (0000 to FFFF: Hexadecimal) －－ Y N Set at -
Capacitor factory
shipping
H48 Cumulative Run Time of Capacitors on Indication for replacing capacitors on printed circuit boards (0000 to FFFF: －－ Y N －
Printed Circuit Boards Hexadecimal). Resettable.
H49 Starting Mode (Delay time) 0.0 to 10.0 0.1 s Y Y 0.0 5-65
H50 Non-linear V/f Pattern 1 0.0 : Canc el 0.1 Hz N Y 0.0 5-21

(Frequency) 0.1 to 400.0
H51 (Voltage) 0 to 240 : Output an AVR-controlled voltage (for 200 V class series ) 1 V N Y2 0
0 to 500 : Output an AVR-controlled voltage (for 400 V class series )
H52 Non-linear V/f Pattern 2 0.0 : Canc el 0.1 Hz N Y 0.0
(Frequency) 0.1 to 400.0
H53 (Voltage) 0 to 240: Output an AVR-controlled voltage (for 200 V clas s series) 1 V N Y2 0
0 to 500: Output an AVR-controlled voltage (for 400 V clas s series)
5-9
(H codes continued)
Change
running
H54 ACC/DEC Time 0.00 to 3600 0.01 s Y Y 6.00 -
(Jogging operation) *ACC time and DEC time are common.
H56 Deceleration T ime for Forced Stop 0.00 to 3600 0.01 s Y Y 6.00
H61 UP /DOWN Control 0: 0.00 －－ N Y 1
(Initial frequency setting) 1: Last UP /DOWN command value on releasing run command
H63 Low Limiter (Mode selection) 0: Limit by F16 (Frequency limiter: Low) and continue to run －－ Y Y 0 5-31
1: If the output frequency lowers below the one limited by F16 (Frequency
limiter: Low), decelerate to stop the motor.
H64 (Lower limiting frequency) 0.0 (Depends on F16 (Frequency limiter: Low)) 0.1 Hz Y Y 1.6 -
0.1 to 60.0
H68 Slip Compensation 1 0: Enable during ACC/DEC and enable at base frequency or above －－ N Y 0 5-37
(Operating conditions) 1: Disable during ACC/DEC and enable at base frequency or above
2: Enable during ACC/DEC and disable at base frequency or above
3: Disable during ACC/DEC and disable at base frequency or above
H69 Automatic Deceleration 0: Disable －－ Y Y 0 5-70
(Mode selection) 2: Enable (Canceled if actual deceleration time exceeds three times the
one specified by F08/E11.)
4: Enable (Not canceled if actual deceleration time exceeds three times
the one specified by F08/E11.)
H70 Overload Prevention Control 0.00 : Follow deceleration time spec ified by F08/E11 0.01 Hz/s Y Y 999 5-71
0.01 to 100.0
999: Disable
H71 Deceleration Characteristics 0: Disable －－ Y Y 0
1: Enable
H76 Torque Limiter (Frequency inc rement 0.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz Y Y 5.0 5-70
limit for braking)
H80 Output Current Fluctuation Damping 0.00 to 0.40 0.01 － Y Y 0.20 -
Gain for Motor 1
H89 Reserved *2 0, 1 －－ Y Y 0
H90 Reserved *2 0, 1 －－ Y Y 0
H91 C1 Disconnection Detection Time 0.0: Disable 0.1 s Y Y 0.0
(PID control feedback line) *7 0.1 to 60.0: Detection time
H94 Cumulative Motor Run Time 1 Change or reset the cumulative data －－ N N － 5-71
H95 DC Braking 0: Slow －－ Y Y 1 5-33
(Braking response mode) 1: Quick
H96 STOP Key Priority/Start Check Function Data STOP key priority Start check function －－ Y Y 0 -
0: Disable Disable
1: Enable Disable
2: Disable Enable
3: Enable Enable
H97 Clear Alarm Data 0: Does not clear alarm data －－ Y N 0 5-70
1: Clear alarm data and return to zero
H98 Protection/Maintenance Function 0 to 31: Display data on the keypad's LED monitor in decimal format －－ Y Y 19 5-71
(In eac h bit, "0" for disabled, "1" for enabled.) (bit4,
(Mode selection) Bit 0: Lower the carrier frequency automatically 1,0＝1)
Bit 1: Detect input phase loss
Bit 2: Detect output phase loss
Bit 3: Select life judgment threshold of DC link bus capacitor
Bit 4: Judge the life of DC link bus capacitor
A codes: Motor 2 Parameters

Change
running
A01 Maximum Frequency 2 25.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz N Y *4 -
A02 Base Frequency 2 25.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz N Y *4
A03 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 2 0: Output a voltage in proportion to input voltage 1 V N Y2 *4
A04 Maximum Output Voltage 2 80 to 240V: Output an AVR-controlled voltage (for 200 V class series) 1 V N Y2 *4
160 to 500V: Output an AVR-controlled voltage (for 400 V class series)
*2 These function codes and their data are displayed, but they are reserved for particular manufacturers. Unless otherwise
specified, do not access these function codes.
5-10
(A codes continued)
Change
running
A05 Torque Boost 2 0.0 to 20.0 0.1 % Y Y *5 -
(percentage with respect to "A03: Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 2")
Note: This setting takes effect when A13 = 0, 1, 3, or 4.
A06 Electronic T hermal Overload Protection 1: For a general-purpose motor with shaft-driven cooling fan －－ Y Y 1
for Motor 2 2: For an inverter-driven motor, non-ventilated motor, or motor with
(Select motor characteristics) separately powered cooling fan
A07 (Overload detection level) 0.00: Disable 0.01 A Y Y1 *5
1 to 135% of the rated current (allowable continuous drive current) of the Y2
motor
A08 (Thermal time constant) 0.5 to 75.0 0.1 min Y Y 5.0
A09 DC Braking 2 0.0 to 60.0 0.1 Hz Y Y 0.0
(Braking starting frequency)
A10 (Braking level) 0 to 100 1 % Y Y 0
A11 (Braking time) 0.00 : Disable 0.01 s Y Y 0.00
0.01 to 30.00
A12 Starting Frequency 2 0.1 to 60.0 0.1 Hz Y Y 0.5
A13 Load Selection/ 0: Variable torque load －－ N Y 1
Auto T orque Boost/ 1: Constant torque load
Auto Energy Saving Operation 2 2: Auto-torque boost
3: Auto-energy saving operation (Variable torque load during ACC/DEC)
4: Auto-energy saving operation (Constant torque load during ACC/DEC)
5: Auto-energy saving operation (Auto-torque boost during ACC/DEC)
A14 Control Mode Selection 2 0: V/f control with slip compensation inactive －－ N Y 0
1: Dynamic torque vector c ontrol
2: V/f control with slip compensation active
3: V/f control with optional PG interface
4: Dynamic torque vector c ontrol with optional PG interface
A15 Motor 2 (No. of poles) 2 to 22 2 poles N Y1 4
Y2
A16 (Rated capacity) 0.01 to 30.00 (where, P99 data is 0, 3, or 4.) 0.01 kW N Y1 *5
0.01 to 30.00 (where, P99 data is 1.) 0.01 HP Y2
A17 (Rated current) 0.00 to 100.0 0.01 A N Y1 Rated value

Y2 of Fuji
standard
motor
A18 (Auto-tuning) 0: Disable －－ N N 0
1: Enable (Tune %R1 and %X while the motor is stopped.)
2: Enable (Tune %R1, %X and rated slip while the motor is stopped, and
no-load current while running.)
A19 (Online tuning) 0: Disable －－ Y Y 0
1: Enable
A20 (No-load current) 0.00 to 50.00 0.01 A N Y1 Rated value
Y2 of Fuji
standard
motor
A21 (%R1) 0.00 to 50.00 0.01 % Y Y1 Rated value
Y2 of Fuji
standard
motor
A22 (%X) 0.00 to 50.00 0.01 % Y Y1 Rated value
Y2 of Fuji
standard
motor
A23 (Slip compensation gain for driving) 0.0 to 200.0 0.1 % Y* Y 100.0
A24 (Slip compensation res ponse time) 0.01 to 10.00 0.01 s Y Y1 0.50
A25 (Slip compensation gain for braking) 0.0 to 200.0 0.1 % Y* Y 100.0
A26 (Rated slip frequency) 0.00 to 15.00 0.01 Hz N Y1 Rated value
Y2 of Fuji
standard
motor
A39 Motor 2 Selection 0: Motor characteristics 0 (Fuji standard motors, 8-series) －－ N Y1 0
1: Motor characteristics 1 (HP rating motors) Y2
3: Motor characteristics 3 (Fuji standard motors, 6-series)
4: Other motors
A40 Slip Compensation 2 0: Enable during ACC/DEC and enable at base frequency or above －－ N Y 0
(Operating conditions) 1: Disable during ACC/DEC and enable at base frequency or above
2: Enable during ACC/DEC and disable at base frequency or above
3: Disable during ACC/DEC and disable at base frequency or above
A41 Output Current Fluctuation 0.00 to 0.40 0.01 － Y Y 0.20
Damping Gain for Motor 2
A45 Cumulative Motor Run Time 2 Change or reset the cumulative data －－ N N －
A46 Startup T imes of Motor 2 Indication of cumulative startup times －－ Y N －
5-11
J codes: Application Functions
Change
running
J01 PID Control (Mode s election) 0: Disable －－ N Y 0 -
1: Enable (Process control, normal operation)
2: Enable (Process control, inverse operation)
3: Enable (Dancer control)
J02 (Remote c ommand SV) 0: UP/DOWN keys on keypad －－ N Y 0
1: PID command 1
4: Command via communications link
J03 P (Gain) 0.000 to 30.000 *1 0.001 times Y Y 0.100
J04 I (Integral time) 0.0 to 3600.0 *1 0.1 s Y Y 0.0
J05 D (Differential time) 0.00 to 600.00 *1 0.01 s Y Y 0.00
J06 (Feedback filter) 0.0 to 900.0 0.1 s Y Y 0.5
J10 (Anti reset windup) 0 to 200 1 % Y Y 200
J11 (Select alarm output) 0: Absolute-value alarm －－ Y Y 0
1: Absolute-value alarm (with Hold)
2: Absolute-value alarm (with Latch)
3: Absolute-value alarm (with Hold and Latch)
4: Deviation alarm
5: Deviation alarm (with Hold)
6: Deviation alarm (with Latch)
7: Deviation alarm (with Hold and Latch)
J12 (Upper level alarm (AH)) -100 to 100 1 % Y Y 100
J13 (Lower level alarm (AL)) -100 to 100 1 % Y Y 0
J18 (Upper limit of PID process output) -150 to 150 1 % Y Y 999
999: The F15 data applies.
J19 (Lower limit of PID process output) -150 to 150 1 % Y Y 999
999: The F16 data applies.
J56 (Speed command filter) 0.00 to 5.00 0.01 s Y Y 0.10
J57 (Danc er reference position) -100 to 100 1 % Y Y 0
J58 (Detection width of dancer 0: Disable switching PID cons tant 1 % Y Y 0
position deviation) 1 to 100
J59 P (Gain) 2 0.000 to 30.000 *1 0.001 times Y Y 0.100
J60 I (Integral time) 2 0.0 to 3600.0 *1 0.1 s Y Y 0.0
J61 D (Differential time) 2 0.00 to 600.00 *1 0.01 s Y Y 0.00
J62 (PID control block selection) Bit 0: PID output polarity 1 － N Y 0
0 = addition, 1 = subtraction
Bit 1: Select compensation of output ratio
0 =Ratio (relative to the main setting)
1 = Speed command (relative to maximum frequency)
J63 Overload Stop 0: Torque －－ Y Y 0 5-73
(Detection value) 1: Current
J64 (Detection level) 20 to 200 0.1 % Y Y 100
J65 (Mode selection) 0: Disable －－ N Y 0
1: Decelerate to stop
2: Coast to a stop
3: Hit and stop
J66 (Operation condition) 0: Enable at constant speed and during dec eleration －－ Y Y 0
1: Enable at constant speed
2: Enable anytime
J67 (Timer) 0.00 to 600.00 0.01 s Y Y 0
J68 Braking Signal 0 to 200 1 % Y Y 100 5-74
(Brake OFF current)
J69 (Brake OFF frequency) 0.0 to 25.0 0.1 Hz Y Y 1.0
J70 (Brake OFF timer) 0.0 to 5.0 0.1 s Y Y 1.0
J71 (Brake ON frequency) 0.0 to 25.0 0.1 Hz Y Y 1.0
J72 (Brake ON timer) 0.0 to 5.0 0.1 s Y Y 1.0
display.
5-12
(J codes continued)
Change
running
J73 Positioning Control (Start timer) *6 0.0 to 1000.0 0.1 s Y Y 0.0 -
J74 (Start point; upper digits) *6 -999 to 999 1 p Y Y 0
J75 (Start point; lower digits) *6 [P], 0 to 9999 *8 1 p Y Y 0
J76 (Preset point; upper digits) *6 -999 to 999 1 p Y Y 0
J77 (Preset point; lower digits) *6 [P], 0 to 9999 *8 1 p Y Y 0
J78 (Creep speed SW point; 0 to 999 1 p Y Y 0
upper digits) *6
J79 (Creep speed SW point; 0 to 9999 1 p Y Y 0
lower digits) *6
J80 (Creep speed) *6 0 to 400 1 Hz Y Y 0
J81 (End point; upper digits) *6 -999 to 999 1 p Y Y 0
J82 (End point; lower digits) *6 0 to 9999 1 p Y Y 0
J83 (Pos itioning allowance) *6 0 to 9999 1 p Y Y 0
J84 (End timer) *6 0.0 to 1000.0 0.1 s Y Y 0.0
J85 (Coasting compensation) *6 0 to 9999 1 p Y Y 0
J86 (End point command) *6 0, 1 －－ Y Y 0
J87 (Preset positioning requirement) *6 0, 1, 2 －－ N Y 0
J88 (Position detection direction) *6 0, 1 －－ N Y 0
J90 Overload Stop Function 0.000 to 2.000, 999 0.001 － Y Y 999
P (Gain) *6
J91 I (Integral time) *6 0.001 to 9.999, 999 0.001 s Y Y 999
J92 (Level adjus tment) *6 50.0 to 150.0 0.1 % Y Y 100.0
*8 [P]: Current position (Absolute position)
Switching between "0" and [P] requires the simultaneous keying: + keys from "0" to [P] and + keys from [P] to
"0."
5-13
y codes: Link Functions
Change
running
y01 RS-485 Communication (Standard) 1 to 255 -
(Station address) 1 － N Y 1
y02 (Communications error proces sing) 0: Immediately trip with alarm er8 －－ Y Y 0
1: Trip with alarm er8 after running for the period specified by timer y03
2: Retry during the period specified by timer y03. If the retry fails, trip with
alarm er8 . If it succeeds, continue to run.
3: Continue to run
y03 (Timer) 0.0 to 60.0 0.1 s Y Y 2.0
y04 (Baud rate) 0: 2400 bps －－ Y Y 3
1: 4800 bps
2: 9600 bps
3: 19200 bps
4: 38400 bps
y05 (Data length) 0: 8 bits －－ Y Y 0
1: 7 bits
y06 (Parity check) 0: None (2 stop bits for Modbus RT U) －－ Y Y 0
1: Even parity (1 stop bit for Modbus RT U)
2: Odd parity (1 stop bit for Modbus RT U)
3: None (1 stop bit for Modbus RT U)
y07 (Stop bits) 0: 2 bits －－ Y Y 0
1: 1 bit
y08 (No-response error detection time) 0: No detection 1 s Y Y 0
1 to 60
y09 (Response interval) 0.00 to 1.00 0.01 s Y Y 0.01
y10 (Protocol selection) 0: Modbus RT U protocol －－ Y Y 1
1: FRENIC Loader protocol (SX protocol)
2: Fuji general-purpos e inverter protocol
y11 RS-485 Communication (Option) 1 to 255
(Station address) 1 － N Y 1
y12 (Communications error proces sing) 0: Immediately trip with alarm erp －－ Y Y 0
1: Trip with alarm erp after running for the period specified by timer y13
2: Retry during the period specified by timer y13. If the retry fails, trip with
alarm erp . If it succeeds, continue to run.
3: Continue to run
y13 (Timer) 0.0 to 60.0 0.1 s Y Y 2.0
y14 (Baud rate) 0: 2400 bps －－ Y Y 3
1: 4800 bps
2: 9600 bps
3: 19200 bps
4: 38400 bps
y15 (Data length) 0: 8 bits －－ Y Y 0
1: 7 bits
y16 (Parity check) 0: None (2 stop bits for Modbus RT U) －－ Y Y 0
1: Even parity (1 stop bit for Modbus RT U)
2: Odd parity (1 stop bit for Modbus RT U)
3: None (1 stop bit for Modbus RT U)
y17 (Stop bits) 0: 2 bits －－ Y Y 0
1: 1 bit
y18 (No-response error detection time) 0: No detection 1 s Y Y 0
1 to 60
y19 (Response interval) 0.00 to 1.00 0.01 s Y Y 0.01
y20 (Protocol selection) 0: Modbus RT U protocol －－ Y Y 0
2: Fuji general-purpos e inverter protocol
y98 Bus Link Function (Mode selection) Frequency command Run command －－ Y Y 0 5-68
0: Follow H30 data Follow H30 data
1: Via field bus option Follow H30 data
2: Follow H30 data Via field bus option
3: Via field bus option Via field bus option
y99 Loader Link Func tion (Mode s election) 　 Frequency command Run command －－ Y N 0 -
0: Follow H30 and y98 data Follow H30 and y98 data
1: Via RS-485 link (Loader) Follow H30 and y98 data
2: Follow H30 and y98 data Via RS-485 link (Loader)
3: Via RS-485 link (Loader) Via RS-485 link (Loader)
Table 5.1 Factory Defaults According to Shipping Destination

Shipping Destination
Function
Taiwan and Remarks
code Asia China EU Japan
Korea
F03/A01 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0
F04/A02 60.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0
F05/A03 220 200 230 200 200 For 200 V class series
F06/A04 380 380 400 400 400 For 400 V class series
F14 1 1 0 1 1
F26 2 2 15 2 2
E31 60.0 50.0 50.0 60.0 60.0
E46 1 0 1 0 1
5-14
Table 5.2 (1) Factory Defaults According to Inverter Capacity
Restart mode after
Nominal Fuji's standard Rated capacity of momentary power
Power torque boost motor failure
applied
supply Inverter type (%) (kW) (Restart time)
motor
voltage (s)
(kW)
F09/A05 P02/A16 H13
0.1 FRN0.1E1 -2 8.4 0.10 0.5
0.2 FRN0.2E1 -2 8.4 0.20 0.5
0.4 FRN0.4E1 -2 7.1 0.40 0.5
0.75 FRN0.75E1 -2 6.8 0.75 0.5
Three- 1.5 FRN1.5E1 -2 6.8 1.50 0.5

phase 2.2 FRN2.2E1 -2 6.8 2.20 0.5
200 V 3.7 FRN3.7E1 -2 5.5 3.70 0.5
5.5 FRN5.5E1 -2 4.9 5.50 0.5
7.5 FRN7.5E1 -2 4.4 7.50 0.5
11 FRN11E1 -2 3.5 11.00 1.0
15 FRN15E1 -2 2.8 15.00 1.0
0.4 FRN0.4E1 -4 7.1 0.40 0.5
0.75 FRN0.75E1 -4 6.8 0.75 0.5
1.5 FRN1.5E1 -4 6.8 1.50 0.5
2.2 FRN2.2E1 -4 6.8 2.20 0.5
Three-
3.7 FRN3.7E1 -4
phase 5.5 3.70 0.5
4.0 * FRN4.0E1 -4E
400 V
5.5 FRN5.5E1 -4 4.9 5.50 0.5
7.5 FRN7.5E1 -4 4.4 7.50 0.5
11 FRN11E1 -4 3.5 11.00 1.0
15 FRN15E1 -4 2.8 15.00 1.0
0.1 FRN0.1E1 -7 8.4 0.10 0.5
0.2 FRN0.2E1 -7 8.4 0.20 0.5
Single- 0.4 FRN0.4E1 -7 7.1 0.40 0.5
phase
200 V 0.75 FRN0.75E1 -7 6.8 0.75 0.5
1.5 FRN1.5E1 -7 6.8 1.50 0.5
2.2 FRN2.2E1 -7 6.8 2.20 0.5
* The nominal applied motor rating of the FRN4.0E1 -4E destined for the EU is 4.0 kW.
5-15
Table 5.2 (2) Factory Defaults According to Inverter Capacity
Rated current of Fuji standard motor

Nominal (A)
Power
applied
motor F11/E34/E37/A07
voltage
(kW)
=A =E =C = J, K
0.1 FRN0.1E1 -2 0.62 0.73 0.68 0.68
0.2 FRN0.2E1 -2 1.18 1.38 1.30 1.30
0.4 FRN0.4E1 -2 2.10 2.36 2.30 2.30
0.75 FRN0.75E1 -2 3.29 3.58 3.60 3.60
Three- 1.5 FRN1.5E1 -2 5.56 5.77 6.10 6.10

phase 2.2 FRN2.2E1 -2 8.39 8.80 9.20 9.20
200 V 3.7 FRN3.7E1 -2 13.67 14.26 15.00 15.00
5.5 FRN5.5E1 -2 20.50 21.25 22.50 22.50
7.5 FRN7.5E1 -2 26.41 26.92 29.00 29.00
11 FRN11E1 -2 38.24 38.87 42.00 42.00
15 FRN15E1 -2 50.05 50.14 55.00 55.00
0.4 FRN0.4E1 -4 1.07 1.15 1.15 1.15
0.75 FRN0.75E1 -4 1.72 1.80 1.82 1.80
1.5 FRN1.5E1 -4 3.10 3.10 3.20 3.10
2.2 FRN2.2E1 -4 4.54 4.60 4.72 4.60
Three-
3.7 FRN3.7E1 -4
phase 7.43 7.50 7.70 7.50
4.0 * FRN4.0E1 -4E
400 V
5.5 FRN5.5E1 -4 11.49 11.50 11.84 11.50
7.5 FRN7.5E1 -4 14.63 14.50 15.00 14.50
11 FRN11E1 -4 21.23 21.00 21.73 21.00
15 FRN15E1 -4 28.11 27.50 28.59 27.50
0.1 FRN0.1E1 -7 0.62 0.73 0.68 0.68
0.2 FRN0.2E1 -7 1.18 1.38 1.30 1.30
Single- 0.4 FRN0.4E1 -7 2.10 2.36 2.30 2.30
phase
0.75 FRN0.75E1 -7 3.29 3.58 3.60 3.60
200 V
1.5 FRN1.5E1 -7 5.56 5.77 6.10 6.10
2.2 FRN2.2E1 -7 8.39 8.80 9.20 9.20
* The nominal applied motor rating of the FRN4.0E1 -4E destined for the EU is 4.0 kW.
5-16
Changing, validating, and saving function code data when the inverter is running
Function codes are indicated by the following based on whether they can be changed or not when
the inverter is running:
Change when
Notation Validating and saving function code data
running
Y* Possible If the data of the codes marked with Y* is changed with and keys,
the change will immediately take effect; however, the change is not
saved into the inverter's memory. To save the change, press the key.
If you press the key without pressing the key to exit the current
state, then the changed data will be discarded and the previous data will
take effect for the inverter operation.
Y Possible Even if the data of the codes marked with Y is changed with and
keys, the change will not take effect. Pressing the key will make the
change take effect and save it into the inverter's memory.
N Impossible —
Copying data
The data copying feature copies the function code data stored in the inverter's memory into the
keypad's memory. With this feature, you can easily transfer the data saved in a source inverter to
other destination inverters.
The standard keypad does not support this feature. The optional multi-function keypad supports it
with Menu #8 in Programming mode.
If the specifications of the source and destination inverters differ, some code data may not be copied
to ensure safe operation of your power system. Whether data will be copied or not is detailed with
the following symbols in the "Data copying" column of the function code tables given below.
Y: Will be copied unconditionally.
Y1: Will not be copied if the rated capacity differs from the source inverter.
Y2: Will not be copied if the rated input voltage differs from the source inverter.
N: Will not be copied. (The function code marked with "N" is not subject to the Verify operation,
either.)
If necessary, set up uncopied code data manually and individually.
Using negative logic for programmable I/O terminals

The negative logic signaling system can be used for the digital input and output terminals by setting
the function code data specifying the properties for those terminals. Negative logic refers to the
inverted ON/OFF (logical value 1 (true)/0 (false)) state of input or output signal. An active-ON signal
(the function takes effect if the terminal is short-circuited.) in the normal logic system is functionally
equivalent to active-OFF signal (the function takes effect if the terminal is opened.) in the negative
logic system. An active-ON signal can be switched to active-OFF signal, and vice versa, with the
function code data setting.
To set the negative logic system for an I/O terminal, enter data of 1000s (by adding 1000 to the data
for the normal logic) in the corresponding function code. Some signals cannot switch to active-OFF
depending upon their assigned functions.
Example: "Coast to a stop" command BX assigned to any of digital input terminals [X1] to [X5] using
any of function codes E01 through E05
Function code data BX

7 Turning BX ON causes the motor to coast to a stop. (Active ON)
1007 Turning BX OFF causes the motor to coast to a stop. (Active OFF)
5-17
5.2 Overview of Function Codes
This section provides an overview of the function codes frequently used for the FRENIC-Multi series
of inverter.
For details about the function codes given below and other function codes not given below,
refer to the FRENIC-Multi User’s Manual (MEH457), Chapter 9 "FUNCTION CODES" and the
RS-485 Communications User's Manual (MEH448b).
F00 Data Protection

F00 specifies whether to protect function code data (except F00) and digital reference data
(such as frequency command, PID command and timer operation) from accidentally getting
changed by pressing the / keys.
Data for F00 Function

0 Disable both data protection and digital reference protection,
allowing you to change both function code data and digital reference data with
the / keys.
1 Enable data protection and disable digital reference protection,
allowing you to change digital reference data with the / keys. But you
cannot change function code data (except F00).
2 Disable data protection and enable digital reference protection,
allowing you to change function code data with the / keys. But you
cannot change digital reference data.
3 Enable both data protection and digital reference protection,
not allowing you to change function code data or digital reference data with the
/ keys.
Enabling the protection disables the / keys to change function code data.
To change F00 data, simultaneous keying of + (from 0 to 1) or + (from 1 to 0)
keys is required.
Even when F00 = 1 or 3, function code data can be changed via the
communications link.
For similar purposes, WE-KP, a signal enabling editing of function code data from
the keypad is provided as a terminal command for digital input terminals. (Refer to
the descriptions of E01 through E05.)
F01, C30 Frequency Command 1 and 2

F01 or C30 sets the source that specifies reference frequency 1 or reference frequency 2,
respectively.
Data for
Function
F01, C30
0 Enable / keys on the keypad.

(Refer to Chapter 3 "OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD.")
1 Enable the voltage input to terminal [12] (0 to 10 VDC, maximum frequency
obtained at 10 VDC).
5-18
Data for
Function
F01, C30
2 Enable the current input to terminal [C1] (C1 function) (+4 to +20 mA DC,
maximum frequency obtained at +20 mA DC).
3 Enable the sum of voltage (0 to +10 VDC) and current inputs (+4 to +20 mA DC)
given to terminals [12] and [C1] (C1 function), respectively. See the two items
listed above for the setting range and the value required for maximum
frequencies.
Note: If the sum exceeds the maximum frequency (F03), the maximum
frequency will apply.
5 Enable the voltage input to terminal [C1] (V2 function) (0 to +10 VDC,
maximum frequency obtained at 10 VDC).
7 Enable UP and DOWN commands assigned to the digital input terminals.
The UP command (data = 17) and DOWN command (data = 18) should be
assigned to the digital input terminals [X1] to [X5].
11 Enable the digital input of the binary coded decimal (BCD) code or binary data
entered via the digital I/O interface option.
For details, refer to the Digital I/O Interface Option Instruction Manual.
12 Enable the pulse train entered via the PG interface card (option).
For details, refer to the PG Interface Card Instruction Manual.
• To input bipolar analog voltage (0 to 10 VDC) to terminal [12], set function code
C35 to "0." Setting C35 to "1" enables the voltage range from 0 to +10 VDC and
interprets the negative polarity input from 0 to -10 VDC as 0 V.
• Terminal [C1] can be used for current input (C1 function) or voltage input (V2
function) depending upon the settings of switch SW7 on the interface PCB and
function code E59.
• In addition to the frequency command sources described above, higher priority
command sources including communications link and multi-frequency are
provided.
Using the terminal command Hz2/Hz1 assigned to one of the digital input terminals
switches between frequency command 1 (F01) and frequency command 2 (C30).
Refer to function codes E01 to E05.
5-19
F02 Operation Method
F02 selects the source that specifies a run command for running the motor.
Data for F02 Run Command Source Description
0 Keypad Enables the / keys to run and stop the motor.
(Rotation direction The rotation direction of the motor is specified by
specified by terminal terminal command FWD or REV.
command)
1 External signal Enables terminal command FWD or REV to run and
stop the motor.
2 Keypad Enables / keys to run and stop the motor.
Note that this run command enables only the forward
(Forward rotation)
rotation.
There is no need to specify the rotation direction.
3 Keypad Enables / keys to run and stop the motor.
Note that this run command enables only the reverse
(Reverse rotation)
rotation.
There is no need to specify the rotation direction.
• When function code F02 = 0 or 1, the "Run forward" FWD and "Run reverse" REV
terminal commands must be assigned to terminals [FWD] and [REV],
respectively.
• When the FWD or REV is ON, the F02 data cannot be changed.
• When assigning the FWD or REV to terminal [FWD] or [REV] with F02 being set
to "1," be sure to turn the target terminal OFF beforehand; otherwise, the motor
may unintentionally rotate.
• In addition to the run command sources described above, higher priority
command sources including communications link are provided. For details, refer
to the FRENIC-Multi User's Manual.
F03 Maximum Frequency 1

F03 specifies the maximum frequency to limit a reference frequency. Specifying the maximum
frequency exceeding the rating of the equipment driven by the inverter may cause damage or
a dangerous situation. Make sure that the maximum frequency setting matches the
equipment rating.
The inverter can easily accept high-speed operation. When changing the speed setting, carefully
check the specifications of motors or equipment beforehand.
Modifying F03 data to allow a higher reference frequency requires also changing
F15 data specifying a frequency limiter (high).
5-20
F04 Base Frequency 1
F05 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1
F06 Maximum Output Voltage 1
H50, H51 Non-linear V/f Pattern 1 (Frequency and Voltage)
H52, H53 Non-linear V/f Pattern 2 (Frequency and Voltage)
These function codes specify the base frequency and the voltage at the base frequency
essentially required for running the motor properly. If combined with the related function codes
H50 through H53, these function codes may profile the non-linear V/f pattern by specifying
increase or decrease in voltage at any point on the V/f pattern.
The following description includes setups required for the non-linear V/f pattern.
At high frequencies, the motor impedance may increase, resulting in an insufficient output
voltage and a decrease in output torque. This feature is used to increase the voltage with the
maximum output voltage 1 to prevent this problem from happening. Note, however, that you
cannot increase the output voltage beyond the voltage of the inverter’s input power.
Base Frequency 1 (F04)
Set the rated frequency printed on the nameplate labeled on the motor.
Rated Voltage at Base Frequency (F05)

Set 0 or the rated voltage printed on the nameplate labeled on the motor.
- If 0 is set, the rated voltage at base frequency is determined by the power source of the
inverter. The output voltage will vary in line with any variance in input voltage.
- If the data is set to anything other than 0, the inverter automatically keeps the output
voltage constant in line with the setting. When any of the auto torque boost settings, auto
energy saving or slip compensation is active, the voltage settings should be equal to the
rated voltage of the motor.
Non-linear V/f Patterns 1 and 2 for Frequency (H50 and H52)

Set the frequency component at an arbitrary point of the non-linear V/f pattern.
(Setting 0.0 to H50 or H52 disables the non-linear V/f pattern operation.)
Non-linear V/f Patterns 1 and 2 for Voltage (H51 and H53)

Sets the voltage component at an arbitrary point of the non-linear V/f pattern.
Maximum Output Voltage (F06)

Set the voltage for the maximum frequency 1 (F03).
• If F05 (Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1) is set to "0," settings of H50 through
H53 and F06 do not take effect. (When the non-linear point is below the base
frequency, the linear V/f pattern applies; when it is above, the output voltage is
kept constant.)
• When the auto torque boost (F37) is enabled, the non-linear V/f pattern takes no
effect.
5-21
Examples:
Normal (linear) V/f pattern
V/f pattern with two non-linear points
F07 Acceleration Time 1

F08 Deceleration Time 1
E10 Acceleration Time 2
E11 Deceleration Time 2
F07 specifies the acceleration time, the length of time the frequency increases from 0 Hz to
the maximum frequency. F08 specifies the deceleration time, the length of time the frequency
decreases from the maximum frequency down to 0 Hz.
5-22
• If you choose S-curve acceleration/deceleration or curvilinear acceleration/
deceleration in Acceleration/Deceleration Pattern (H07), the actual
acceleration/deceleration times are longer than the specified times. Refer to the
description of H07 for details.
• Specifying an improperly short acceleration/deceleration time may activate the
current limiter, torque limiter, or anti-regenerative control, resulting in a longer
acceleration/deceleration time than the specified one.
• Acceleration time 1 (F07, F08) and deceleration time 1 (E10, E11) is switched by
terminal command RT1 assigned to any of the digital input terminals with any of
function codes E01 through E05.
• Acceleration/deceleration time 1 (F07/F08) and acceleration/deceleration time 2
(E10/E11) are switched by terminal command RT1 assigned to any of the digital
input terminals with any of function codes E01 through E05.
F09 Torque Boost 1

F37 Load Selection/Auto Torque Boost/Auto Energy Saving Operation 1
F37 specifies V/f pattern, torque boost type, and auto energy saving operation for optimizing
the operation in accordance with the characteristics of the load. F09 specifies the type of
torque boost in order to provide sufficient starting torque.
Data for Torque boost Auto energy

V/f pattern Applicable load
F37 (F09) saving
Variable Torque Variable torque load
0 torque V/f boost (General purpose fans and pumps)
pattern specified by
1 F09 Disable Constant torque load
Linear Constant torque load
V/f pattern Auto torque
2 (To be selected if a motor may be
boost
over-excited at no load.)
Variable Torque Variable torque load
3 torque V/f boost (General purpose fans and pumps)
pattern specified by
4 F09 Enable Constant torque load
Linear Constant torque load
V/f pattern Auto torque
5 (To be selected if a motor may be
boost
over-excited at no load.)
Note: If a required "load torque + acceleration toque" is more than 50% of the rated torque, it
is recommended to select the linear V/f pattern (factory default).
V/f characteristics
The FRENIC-Multi series of inverters offers a variety of V/f patterns and torque boosts, which
include V/f patterns suitable for variable torque load such as general fans and pumps or for
special pump load requiring high starting torque. Two types of torque boost are available:
manual and automatic.
Variable torque V/f pattern (F37 = 0) Linear V/f pattern (F37 = 1)

5-23
When the variable torque V/f pattern is selected (F37 = 0 or 3), the output voltage
may be low and insufficient voltage output may result in less output torque of the
motor at a low frequency zone, depending on some characteristics of the motor itself
and load. In such a case, it is recommended to increase the output voltage at the low
frequency zone using the non-linear V/f pattern.
Recommended value: H50 =1/10 of the base frequency
H51 =1/10 of the voltage at base frequency
Torque boost
• Manual torque boost (F09)

In torque boost using F09, constant voltage is added to the basic V/f pattern, regardless of the
load, to give the output voltage. To secure a sufficient starting torque, manually adjust the
output voltage to optimally match the motor and its load by using F09. Specify an appropriate
level that guarantees smooth start-up and yet does not cause over-excitation with no or light
load.
Torque boost per F09 ensures high driving stability since the output voltage remains constant
regardless of the load fluctuation.
Specify the F09 data in percentage to the rated voltage at base frequency 1 (F05). At factory
shipment, F09 is preset to a level that provides approx. 100% of starting torque.
Specifying a high torque boost level will generate a high torque, but may cause
overcurrent due to over-excitation at no load. If you continue to drive the motor, it
may overheat. To avoid such a situation, adjust torque boost to an appropriate level.
When the non-linear V/f pattern and the torque boost are used together, the torque
boost takes effect below the frequency on the non-linear V/f pattern’s point.
5-24
• Auto torque boost
This function automatically optimizes the output voltage to fit the motor with its load. Under
light load, auto torque boost decreases the output voltage to prevent the motor from
over-excitation. Under heavy load, it increases the output voltage to increase output torque of
the motor.
• Since this function relies also on the characteristics of the motor, set the base
frequency 1 (F04), the rated voltage at base frequency 1 (F05), and other
pertinent motor parameters (P01 through P03 and P06 through P99) in line with
the motor capacity and characteristics, or else perform auto-tuning (P04).
• When a special motor is driven or the load does not have sufficient rigidity, the
maximum torque might decrease or the motor operation might become unstable.
In such cases, do not use auto torque boost but choose manual torque boost per
F09 (F37 = 0 or 1).
Auto energy saving operation

This feature automatically controls the supply voltage to the motor to minimize the total power
loss of motor and inverter. (Note that this feature may not be effective depending upon the
motor or load characteristics. Check the advantage of energy saving before actually apply this
feature to your power system.)
This feature applies to constant speed operation only. During acceleration/deceleration, the
inverter will run with manual torque boost (F09) or auto torque boost, depending on the F37
data. If auto energy saving operation is enabled, the response to a change in motor speed
may be slow. Do not use this feature for such a system that requires quick acceleration/
deceleration.
• Use auto energy saving only where the base frequency is 60 Hz or lower. If the
base frequency is set at 60 Hz or higher, you may get a little or no energy saving
advantage. The auto energy saving operation is designed for use with the
frequency lower than the base frequency. If the frequency becomes higher than
the base frequency, the auto energy saving operation will be invalid.
• Since this function relies also on the characteristics of the motor, set the base
frequency 1 (F04), the rated voltage at base frequency 1 (F05), and other
pertinent motor parameters (P01 through P03 and P06 through P99) in line with
the motor capacity and characteristics, or else perform auto-tuning (P04).
F10 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 1 (Select motor characteristics)
F11 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 1 (Overload detection level)
F12 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 1 (Thermal time constant)
F10 through F12 specify the thermal characteristics of the motor for its electronic thermal
overload protection that is used to detect overload conditions of the motor.
F10 selects the motor cooling mechanism to specify its characteristics, F11 specifies the
overload detection current, and F12 specifies the thermal time constant.
Thermal characteristics of the motor specified by F10 and F12 are also used for the
overload early warning. Even if you need only the overload early warning, set these
characteristics data to these function codes. To disable the electronic thermal
overload protection, set function code F11 to "0.00."
Select motor characteristics (F10)

F10 selects the cooling mechanism of the motor-- shaft-driven or separately powered cooling
fan.
Data for F10 Function
1 For a general-purpose motor with shaft-driven cooling fan
(The cooling effect will decrease in low frequency operation.)
2 For an inverter-driven motor, non-ventilated motor, or motor with separately
powered cooling fan
(The cooling effect will be kept constant regardless of the output frequency.)
5-25
The figure below shows operating characteristics of the electronic thermal overload protection
when F10 = 1. The characteristic factors 1 through 3 as well as their corresponding
switching frequencies f2 and f3 vary with the characteristics of the motor. The tables below list
the factors of the motor selected by P99 (Motor 1 Selection).
Cooling Characteristics of Motor with Shaft-driven Cooling Fan

Nominal Applied Motor and Characteristic Factors when P99 (Motor 1 selection) = 0 or 4
Nominal Reference current Output frequency for Characteristic

Thermal time
applied for setting the motor characteristic factor factor (%)
constant
motor thermal time
(Factory default) f2 f3 1 2 3
(kW) constant (Imax)
0.1 to 0.75 75 85 100

7 Hz
1.5 to 4.0 85 85 100
Allowable
5.5 to 11 5 min continuous current 5 Hz 6 Hz 90 95 100
150%
15 7 Hz 85 85 100
18.5, 22 5 Hz 92 100 100
Nominal Applied Motor and Characteristic Factors when P99 (Motor 1 Selection) = 1 or 3
Nominal Reference current Output frequency for Characteristic

Thermal time motor characteristic factor factor (%)
applied for setting the
constant
motor thermal time
(Factory default)
(kW) constant (Imax) f2 f3 1 2 3
Allowable Base Base

0.1 to 22 5 min continuous current frequency frequency 69 90 90
150% 33% 33%
Overload detection level (F11)
F11 specifies the level at which the electronic thermal overload protection becomes activated.
In general, set F11 to the rated current of motor when driven at the base frequency (i.e. 1.0 to
1.1 multiple of the rated current of motor 1 (P03)). To disable the electronic thermal overload
protection, set F11 to "0.00: Disable."
5-26
Thermal time constant (F12)
F12 specifies the thermal time constant of the motor. If the current of 150% of the overload
detection level specified by F11 flows for the time specified by F12, the electronic thermal
overload protection becomes activated to detect the motor overload. The thermal time
constant for general-purpose motors including Fuji motors is approx. 5 minutes by factory
default.
- Data setting range: 0.5 to 75.0 (minutes) in increments of 0.1 (minute)
(Example) When the F12 data is set at "5.0" (5 minutes)
As shown below, the electronic thermal overload protection is activated to detect an alarm
condition (alarm code 0l1 ) when the output current of 150% of the overload detection level
(specified by F11) flows for 5 minutes, and 120% for approx. 12.5 minutes.
The actual driving time required for issuing a motor overload alarm tends to be shorter than
the value specified as the time period from when the output current exceeds the rated current
(100%) until it reaches 150% of the overload detection level.
Example of Operating Characteristics
5-27
F14 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure
H13 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure, Restart time
H14 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure, Frequency fall rate
Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure, Allowable momentary power failure
H16 time
F14 specifies the action to be taken by the inverter such as trip and restart in the event of a
momentary power failure.
Restart mode after momentary power failure (Mode selection) (F14)
Data for F14 Mode Description

0 Disable restart As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the
(Trip immediately) undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power
failure, the inverter issues undervoltage alarm lu and
shuts down its output so that the motor enters a
coast-to-stop state.
1 Disable restart As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the
(Trip after recovery undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power
from power failure) failure, the inverter shuts down its output so that the
motor enters a coast-to-stop state, but it does not enter
the undervoltage state or issue undervoltage alarm lu .
The moment the power is restored, an undervoltage
alarm lu is issued, while the motor remains in a
coast-to-stop state.
4 Enable restart As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the
(Restart at the undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power
frequency at which the failure, the inverter saves the output frequency being
power failure occurred, applied at that time and shuts down the output so that
for general loads) the motor enters a coast-to-stop state.
If a run command has been input, restoring power
restarts the inverter at the output frequency saved
during the last power failure processing.
This setting is ideal for applications with a moment of
inertia large enough not to slow down the motor quickly,
such as fans, even after the motor enters a
coast-to-stop state upon occurrence of a momentary
power failure.
5 Enable restart After a momentary power failure, restoring power and
(Restart at the starting then entering a run command restarts the inverter at the
frequency, for starting frequency specified by function code F23.
low-inertia load) This setting is ideal for heavy load applications such as
pumps, having a small moment of inertia, in which the
motor speed quickly goes down to zero as soon as it
enters a coast-to-stop state upon occurrence of a
momentary power failure.
When the motor restarts after a momentary power failure, the auto search mode can
apply, which detects the idling motor speed and runs the idling motor without
stopping it. Refer to H09.
If you enable the "Restart mode after momentary power failure" (Function code F14 = 4 or 5), the
inverter automatically restarts the motor running when the power is restored. Design the
machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured after restarting.
5-28
Restart mode after momentary power failure (Basic operation)
The inverter recognizes a momentary power failure upon detecting the condition that DC link
bus voltage goes below the undervoltage detection level, while the inverter is running. If the
load of the motor is light and the duration of the momentary power failure is extremely short,
the voltage drop may not be great enough for a momentary power failure to be recognized,
and the motor may continue to run uninterrupted.
Upon recognizing a momentary power failure, the inverter enters the restart mode (after a
recovery from momentary power failure) and prepares for restart. When power is restored, the
inverter goes through an initial charging stage and enters the ready-to-run state. When a
momentary power failure occurs, the power supply voltage for external circuits such as relay
sequence circuits may also drop so as to turn the run command OFF. In consideration of such
a situation, the inverter waits 2 seconds for a run command input after the inverter enters a
ready-to-run state. If a run command is received within 2 seconds, the inverter begins the
restart processing in accordance with the F14 data (Mode selection). If no run command has
been received within 2-second wait period, the inverter cancels the restart mode (after a
recovery from momentary power failure) and needs to be started again from the ordinary
starting frequency. Therefore, ensure that a run command is entered within 2 seconds after a
recovery of power, or install a mechanical latch relay.
When run commands are entered via the keypad, the above operation is also necessary for
the mode (F02 = 0) in which the rotational direction is determined by the terminal command,
FWD or REV. In the modes where the rotational direction is fixed (F02 = 2 or 3), it is retained
inside the inverter so that the restart will begin as soon as the inverter enters the ready-to-run
state.
• When the power is restored, the inverter will wait 2 seconds for input of a run
command. However, if the allowable momentary power failure time (H16) elapses
after the power failure was recognized, even within the 2 seconds, the restart time
for a run command is canceled. The inverter will start operation in the normal
starting sequence.
• If the "Coast to a stop" terminal command BX is entered during the power failure,
the inverter gets out of the restart mode and enters the normal running mode. If a
run command is entered with power supply applied, the inverter will start from the
normal starting frequency.
5-29
During a momentary power failure, the motor slows down. After power is restored, the inverter
restarts at the frequency just before the momentary power failure. Then, the current limiting
function works and the output frequency of the inverter automatically decreases. When the
output frequency matches the motor speed, the motor accelerates up to the original output
frequency. See the figure below. In this case, the instantaneous overcurrent limiting must be
enabled (H12 = 1).
Restart mode after momentary power failure (Allowable momentary power failure time)
(H16)
H16 specifies the maximum allowable duration (0.0 to 30.0 seconds) from an occurrence of a
momentary power failure (undervoltage) until the inverter is to be restarted. Specify the
coast-to-stop time during which the machine system and facility can be tolerated.
If the power is restored within the specified duration, the inverter restarts in the restart mode
specified by F14. If the power is restored after the specified duration, the inverter recognizes
that the power has been shut down so that it does not restart but starts (normal starting).
If H16 (Allowable momentary power failure time) is set to "999," restart will take place until the
DC link bus voltage drops down to the allowable voltage for restart after a momentary power
failure (50 V for 200 V class series and 100 V for 400 V class series). If the DC link bus voltage
drops below the allowable voltage, the inverter recognizes that the power has been shut down
so that it does not restart but starts (normal starting).
The time required from when the DC link bus voltage drops from the threshold of
undervoltage until it reaches the allowable voltage for restart after a momentary
power failure, greatly varies depending on the inverter capacity, the presence of
options, and other factors.
Auto-restart after momentary power failure (Restart time) (H13)

H13 specifies the time period from momentary power failure occurrence until the inverter
reacts for restarting process.
If the inverter starts the motor while motor’s residual voltage is still in a high level, a large
inrush current may flow or an overvoltage alarm may occur due to an occurrence of temporary
regeneration. For safety, therefore, it is advisable to set H13 to a certain level so that restart
will take place only after the residual voltage has dropped to a low level. Note that even when
power is restored, restart will not take place until the restart time (H13) has elapsed.
Factory default
By factory default, H13 is set at one of the values shown below according to the inverter
capacity. Basically, you do not need to change H13 data. However, if the long restart time
causes the flow rate of the pump to overly decrease or causes any other problem, you might
as well reduce the setting to about a half of the default value. In such a case, make sure that
no alarm occurs.
Inverter capacity (kW) Factory default of H13 (Restart time in seconds)
0.1 to 7.5 0.5
11 to 15 1.0
5-30
Restart after momentary power failure (Frequency fall rate) (H14)
During restart after a momentary power failure, if the inverter output frequency and the idling
motor speed cannot be harmonized with each other, an overcurrent will flow, activating the
overcurrent limiter. If it happens, the inverter reduces the output frequency to match the idling
motor speed according to the reduction rate (Frequency fall rate: Hz/s) specified by H14.
Data for H14 Inverter’s action for the output frequency fall
0.00 Follow the selected deceleration time
0.01 to 100.00 (Hz/s) Follow data specified by H14
Follow the setting of the PI controller in the current limiter (of the
current limit control block shown in FRENIC-Multi User's Manual
999
(MEH457), Chapter 4, Section 4.4, Figure 4.3.1 ").
(The PI constant is prefixed inside the inverter.)
If the frequency fall rate is too high, regeneration may take place at the moment the
motor rotation matches the inverter output frequency, causing an overvoltage trip.
On the contrary, if the frequency fall rate is too low, the time required for the output
frequency to match the motor speed (duration of current limiting action) may be
prolonged, triggering the inverter overload prevention control.
F15, F16 Frequency Limiter (High and Low)

H63 Low Limiter (Mode selection)
F15 and F16 specify the upper and lower limits of the output frequency, respectively.
H63 specifies the operation to be carried out when the reference frequency drops below the
low level specified by F16, as follows:
• If H63 = 0, the output frequency will be held at the low level specified by F16.
• If H63 = 1, the inverter decelerates to stop the motor.
• When you change the frequency limiter (High) (F15) in order to raise the
reference frequency, be sure to change the maximum frequency (F03/A01)
accordingly.
• Maintain the following relationship among the data for frequency control:
F15 > F16, F15 > F23/A12, and F15 > F25
F03/A01 > F16
where, F23/A12 is of the starting frequency and F25 is of the stop frequency.
If you specify any wrong data for these function codes, the inverter may not run
the motor at the desired speed, or cannot start it normally.
5-31
F18 Bias (Frequency command 1)
C50 Bias (for Frequency 1) (Bias base point)
C32, C34 Analog Input Adjustment for [12] (Gain, Gain base point)
C37, C39 Analog Input Adjustment [C1] (Gain, Gain base point)
C42, C44 Analog Input Adjustment [V2] (Gain, Gain base point)
When any analog input for frequency command 1 (F01) is used, it is possible to define the
relationship between the analog input and the reference frequency by multiplying the gain and
adding the bias specified by F18.
As shown in the graph below, the relationship between the analog input and the reference
frequency specified by frequency command 1 is determined by points "A" and "B." Point "A" is
defined by the combination of the bias (F18) and its base point (C50); Point "B," by the
combination of the gain (C32, C37 or C42) and its base point (C34, C39 or C44).
The combination of C32 and C34 applies to terminal [12], that of C37 and C39, to [C1] (C1
function), and that of C42 and C44, to [C1] (V2 function).
Configure the bias (F18) and gain (C32, C37 or C42), assuming the maximum frequency as
100%, and the bias base point (C50) and gain base point (C34, C39 or C44), assuming the full
scale (10 VDC or 20 mA DC) of analog input as 100%.
• The analog input less than the bias base point (C50) is limited by the bias value
(F18).
• Specifying that the data of the bias base point (C50) is equal to or greater than
that of each gain base point (C34, C39 or C44) will be interpreted as invalid, so
the inverter will reset the reference frequency to 0 Hz.
Example: Setting the bias, gain and their base points when the reference frequency 0 to 100%
follows the analog input of 1 to 5 VDC to terminal [12] (in frequency command 1).
5-32
(Point A)
To set the reference frequency to 0 Hz for an analog input being at 1 V, set the bias to 0% (F18
= 0). Since 1 V is the bias base point and it is equal to 10% of 10 V (full scale), set the bias
base point to 10% (C50 = 10).
(Point B)
To make the maximum frequency equal to the reference frequency for an analog input being
at 5 V, set the gain to 100% (C32 = 100). Since 5 V is the gain base point and it is equal to 50%
of 10 V (full scale), set the gain base point to 50% (C34 = 50).
The setting procedure for specifying a gain or bias alone without changing any
base points is the same as that of Fuji conventional inverters of
FRENIC5000G11S/P11S series, FVR-E11S series, etc.
F20 to F22 DC Braking 1 (Braking starting frequency, Braking level, and Braking time)
H95 DC Braking (Braking response mode)
F20 through F22 specify the DC braking that prevents motor 1 from running by inertia during
decelerate-to-stop operation.
If the motor enters a decelerate-to-stop operation by turning OFF the run command or by
decreasing the reference frequency below the stop frequency, the inverter activates the DC
braking by flowing a current at the braking level (F21) during the braking time (F22) when the
output frequency reaches the DC braking starting frequency (F20).
Setting the braking time to "0.0" (F22 = 0) disables the DC braking.
Braking starting frequency (F20)

F20 specifies the frequency at which the DC braking starts its operation during motor
decelerate-to-stop state.
Braking level (F21)
F21 specifies the output current level to be applied when the DC braking is activated. The
function code data should be set, assuming the rated output current of the inverter as 100%,
in increments of 1%.
Braking time (F22)
F22 specifies the braking period that activates DC braking.
Braking response mode (H95)

H95 specifies the DC braking response mode.
Data for H95 Characteristics Note
0 Slow response. Slows the rising edge of Insufficient braking torque may
the current, thereby preventing reverse result at the start of DC braking.
rotation at the start of DC braking.
1 Quick response. Quickens the rising Reverse rotation may result
edge of the current, thereby accelerating depending on the moment of
the build-up of the braking torque. inertia of the mechanical load and
the coupling mechanism.
It is also possible to use an external digital input signal as an "Enable DC braking"

terminal command DCBRK.
As long as the DCBRK command is ON, the inverter performs DC braking,
regardless of the braking time specified by F22.
Turning the DCBRK command ON even when the inverter is in a stopped state
activates DC braking. This feature allows the motor to be excited before starting,
resulting in smoother acceleration (quicker build-up of acceleration torque).
5-33
In general, specify data of function code F20 at a value close to the rated slip
frequency of motor. If you set it at an extremely high value, control may become
unstable and an overvoltage alarm may result in some cases.
The DC brake function of the inverter does not provide any holding mechanism.
Injuries could occur.
F23 Starting Frequency 1

F24 Starting Frequency 1 (Holding time)
F25 Stop Frequency
F39 Stop Frequency (Holding time)
At the startup of an inverter, the initial output frequency is equal to the starting frequency 1
specified by F23. The inverter stops its output when the output frequency reaches the stop
frequency specified by F25.
Set the starting frequency to a level at which the motor can generate enough torque for startup.
Generally, set the motor's rated slip frequency as the starting frequency.
In addition, F24 specifies the holding time for the starting frequency 1 in order to compensate
for the delay time for the establishment of a magnetic flux in the motor. F39 specifies the
holding time for the stop frequency in order to stabilize the motor speed at the stop of the
motor.
If the starting frequency is lower than the stop frequency, the inverter will not output
any power as long as the reference frequency does not exceed the stop frequency.
F26, F27 Motor Sound (Carrier frequency and tone)
Motor sound (Carrier frequency) (F26)

F26 controls the carrier frequency so as to reduce an audible noise generated by the motor or
electromagnetic noise from the inverter itself, and to decrease a leakage current from the
main output (secondary) wirings.
Carrier frequency 0.75 to 15 kHz
Motor sound noise emission High Low
Motor temperature (due to harmonics components) High Low
Ripples in output current waveform Large Small
Leakage current Low High
Electromagnetic noise emission Low High
Inverter loss Low High
5-34
Specifying a too low carrier frequency will cause the output current waveform to have a
large amount of ripples. As a result, the motor loss increases, causing the motor
temperature to rise. Furthermore, the large amount of ripples tends to cause a current
limiting alarm. When the carrier frequency is set to 1 kHz or below, therefore, reduce the
load so that the inverter output current comes to be 80% or less of the rated current.
When a high carrier frequency is specified, the temperature of the inverter may rise due to
an ambient temperature rise or an increase of the load. If it happens, the inverter
automatically decreases the carrier frequency to prevent the inverter overload alarm
0lu . With consideration for motor noise, the automatic reduction of carrier frequency can
be disabled. Refer to the description of H98.
Motor sound (Tone) (F27)

F27 changes the motor running sound tone. This setting is effective when the carrier
frequency set to function code F26 is 7 kHz or lower. Changing the tone level may reduce the
high and harsh running noise from the motor.
If the sound level is set too high, the output current may become unstable, or
mechanical vibration and noise may increase. Also, these function codes may not be
very effective for certain types of motor.
F29 to F31 Analog Output [FM] (Mode selection, Voltage adjustment, Function)
F33 Analog Output [FM] (Pulse rate)
These function codes allow terminal [FM] to output monitored data such as the output
frequency and the output current in an analog DC voltage or pulse (pulse duty: approximately
50%). The magnitude of such analog voltage or pulse rate is adjustable.
Mode selection (F29)
F29 specifies the property of the output to terminal [FM]. You need to set switch SW6 on the
interface printed circuit board (PCB). Refer to Chapter 2 "Mounting and Wiring of the Inverter."
Position of slide switch SW6

Data for F29 Output form
mounted on the interface PCB
0 Voltage (0 to +10 VDC) (FMA function) FMA
2 Pulse (0 to 6000 p/s) (FMP function) FMP
Voltage adjustment (F30) dedicated to FMA
F30 allows you to adjust the output voltage or current representing the monitored data
selected by F31 within the range of 0 to 300%.
5-35
Function (F31)
F31 specifies what is output to analog output terminal [FM].
Data for Function Meter scale
[FM] output
F31 (Monitor the following) (Full scale at 100%)
Output frequency Output frequency of the inverter
0 (before slip (Equivalent to the motor Maximum frequency (F03/A01)
compensation) synchronous speed)
Output frequency
1 (after slip Output frequency of the inverter Maximum frequency (F03/A01)
compensation)
Output current (RMS) of the
2 Output current inverter Twice the inverter rated current
Output voltage (RMS) of the 250 V for 200 V class series,
3 Output voltage inverter 500 V for 400 V class series
4 Output torque Motor shaft torque Twice the rated motor torque
Load factor
5 Load factor (Equivalent to the indication of Twice the rated motor load
the load meter)
6 Input power Input power of the inverter Twice the rated output of the
inverter
PID feedback Feedback amount under PID
7 amount (PV) control 100% of the feedback amount
Feedback value of closed loop Maximum speed
8 PG feedback value control through the PG (100% of the feedback value)
interface
DC link bus DC link bus voltage of the 500 V for 200 V class series,
9 voltage inverter 1000 V for 400 V class series
Command via communications
10 Universal AO link (Refer to the RS-485 20000 as 100%
Communication User's Manual
(MEH448b).)
13 Motor output Motor output (kW) Twice the rated motor output
Full scale output of the meter This always outputs the full-scale
14 Calibration calibration (100%).
PID command Command value under PID
15 (SV) control 100% of the feedback amount
Output level of the PID
16 PID output (MV) controller under PID control Maximum frequency (F03/A01)
(Frequency command)
If F31 = 16 (PID output), J01 = 3 (Dancer control), and J62 = 2 or 3 (Ratio

compensation enabled), the PID output is equivalent to the ratio against the primary
reference frequency and may vary within 300% of the frequency. The monitor
displays the PID output in a converted absolute value. To indicate the value up to
the full-scale of 300%, set F30 data to "33" (%).
Pulse rate (F33) dedicated to FMP

F33 specifies the number of pulses at which the output of the monitored item selected
reaches 100%, in accordance with the specifications of the counter to be connected.
F40, F41 Torque Limiter 1 (Limiting levels for driving and braking)
E16, E17 Torque Limiter 2 (Limiting levels for driving and braking)
If the inverter’s output torque exceeds the specified levels of the driving torque limiter
(F40/E16) and the braking torque limiter (F41/E17), the inverter controls the output frequency
and limits the output torque for preventing a stall.
Specify the limiting levels at which the torque limiter becomes activated, as the percentage of
the motor rated torque.
To switch the inverter’s output torque limiter between torque limiter 1 (F40/F41) and
torque limiter 2 (E16/E17), use the terminal command TL2/TL1 assigned to a digital
input terminal. (Refer to the descriptions of E01 to E05.)
5-36
The torque limiter and current limiter are very similar function each other. If both are
activated concurrently, they may conflict each other and cause a hunting in the
system. Avoid concurrent activation of these limiters.
F42 Control Mode Selection 1

H68 Slip Compensation 1 (Operating conditions)
F42 specifies the control mode of the inverter to control a motor.
Data for F42 Control mode
0 V/f control with slip compensation inactive
1 Dynamic torque vector control
2 V/f control with slip compensation active
3 V/f control with optional PG interface
4 Dynamic torque vector control with optional PG interface
V/f control
In this control, the inverter controls a motor by the voltage and frequency according to the V/f
pattern specified by function codes.
Slip compensation
Applying any load to an induction motor causes a rotational slip due to the motor
characteristics, decreasing the motor rotation. The inverter’s slip compensation facility first
presumes the slip value of the motor based on the motor torque generated and raises the
output frequency to compensate for the decrease in motor rotation. This prevents the motor
from decreasing the rotation due to the slip.
That is, this facility is effective for improving the motor speed control accuracy.
The compensation value is specified by combination of function codes P12 (Rated slip
frequency), P09 (Slip compensation gain for driving)) and P11 (Slip compensation gain for
braking).
H68 enables or disables the slip compensation facility according to the motor driving
conditions.
Motor driving conditions Motor driving frequency zone
Data for
H68 Base frequency Above the base
Accl/Decel Constant speed
or below frequency
0 Enable Enable Enable Enable
1 Disable Enable Enable Enable
2 Enable Enable Enable Disable
3 Disable Enable Enable Disable
Dynamic torque vector control

To get the maximal torque out of a motor, this control calculates the motor torque for the load
applied and uses it to optimize the voltage and current vector output.
Selecting this control automatically enables the auto torque boost and slip compensation
function and disables auto energy saving operation. Using the PG feedback speed control at
same time, however, also disables the slip compensation function.
This control is effective for improving the system response against external disturbances and
the motor speed control accuracy.
PG speed feedback control (PG interface)

This control is made available by mounting an optional pulse generator (PG) interface card.
It uses the speed feedback from the PG on the motor shaft to control the motor speed with
high accuracy.
5-37
In the slip compensation and dynamic torque vector control, the inverter uses the
motor parameters to control its speed. Therefore, the following conditions should be
satisfied; if not, the inverter may not get the proper performance from the motor.
• A single motor should be controlled. (It is difficult to apply this control to a group
motor driving system.)
• Motor parameters P02, P03 and P06 to P12 are properly configured or they are
fully auto-tuned.
• The rating of the motor to be controlled should be two ranks lower than that of the
inverter. If not, the output current detection sensibility of the motor lowers, causing
it difficult to accurately control the motor.
• The wiring between the inverter output and motor input terminals should not
exceed 50 m in length. A long wiring run could not suppress the earth leakage
current since the cable's electrostatic capacitance against the earth increases,
causing it difficult to accurately control the motor speed.
F43, F44 Current Limiter (Mode selection, Level)

When the output current of the inverter exceeds the level specified by the current limiter (F44),
the inverter automatically manages its output frequency to prevent a stall and limit the output
current. (Refer to the description of function code H12.)
If F43 = 1, the current limiter is enabled only during constant speed operation. If F43 = 2, the
current limiter is enabled during both of acceleration and constant speed operation. Choose
F43 = 1 if you need to run the inverter at full capability during acceleration and to limit the
output current during constant speed operation.
Mode selection (F43)
F43 selects the motor running state in which the current limiter will be active.
Data for Running states that enable the current limiter
F43 During acceleration During constant speed During deceleration
0 Disable Disable Disable
1 Disable Enable Disable
2 Enable Enable Disable
Level (F44)
F44 specifies the operation level at which the output current limiter becomes activated, in ratio
to the inverter rating.
• Since the current limit operation with F43 and F44 is performed by software, it
may cause a delay in control. If you need a quick response, specify a current limit
operation by hardware (H12 = 1) at the same time.
• If an excessive load is applied when the current limiter operation level is set
extremely low, the inverter will rapidly lower its output frequency. This may cause
an overvoltage trip or dangerous turnover of the motor rotation due to
undershooting.
• The torque limiter and current limiter are very similar function each other. If both
are activated concurrently, they may conflict each other and cause a hunting in
the system. Avoid concurrent activation of these limiters.
Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Braking Resistor

F50, F51 (Discharging capability and Allowable average loss)
These function codes specify the electronic thermal overload protection feature for the
braking resistor.
Set F50 and F51 data to the discharging capability and allowable average loss, respectively.
Those values differ depending on the specifications of the braking resistor, as listed on the
following pages.
Depending on the thermal marginal characteristics of the braking resistor, the
electronic thermal overload protection feature may act so that the inverter issues the
overheat protection alarm dbh even if the actual temperature rise is not enough. If it
happens, review the relationship between the performance index of the braking
resistor and settings of related function codes.
5-38
The table below lists the discharging capability and allowable average loss of the braking resistor.
These values depend upon the inverter and braking resistor models.
External Braking Resistors

Standard models
The thermal sensor relay mounted on the braking resistor acts as a thermal protector of the motor for
overheat, so assign an "Enable external alarm trip" terminal command THR to any of digital input
terminals [X1] to [X5], [FWD] and [REV] and connect that terminal and its common terminal to
braking resistor's terminals 2 and 1.
To protect the motor from overheat without using the thermal sensor relay mounted on the braking
resistor, configure the electronic thermal overload protection facility by setting F50 and F51 data to
the discharging capability and allowable average loss values listed below, respectively.
Braking Continuous braking Intermittent braking
Power resistor (100% braking torque) (Period: Less than 100s)
Resistance
supply Inverter type Discharging Braking Allowable
( ) Duty
voltage Type Qty. capability time average loss
(%ED)
(kWs) (s) (kW)
FRN0.1E1 -2
90 0.037 37
FRN0.2E1 -2 9
DB0.75-2 100
FRN0.4E1 -2 0.044 22
FRN0.75E1 -2 17 45 0.068 18
Three- FRN1.5E1 -2 34 0.075 10
DB2.2-2 40
phase FRN2.2E1 -2 33 30 0.077 7
200 V FRN3.7E1 -2 DB3.7-2 33 37 0.093
20
FRN5.5E1 -2 DB5.5-2 20 55 0.138
FRN7.5E1 -2 DB7.5-2 15 37 0.188 5
FRN11E1 -2 DB11-2 10 55 10 0.275
FRN15E1 -2 DB15-2 8.6 75 0.375
FRN0.4E1 -4 9 0.044 22
DB0.75-4 200
FRN0.75E1 -4 17 45 0.068 18
FRN1.5E1 -4 1 34 0.075 10
DB2.2-4 160
FRN2.2E1 -4 33 30 0.077 7
Three-
FRN3.7E1 -4
phase DB3.7-4 130 37 0.093
FRN4.0E1 -4E* 20
400 V
FRN5.5E1 -4 DB5.5-4 80 55 0.138
5
FRN7.5E1 -4 DB7.5-4 60 38 0.188
FRN11E1 -4 DB11-4 40 55 10 0.275
FRN15E1 -4 DB15-4 34.4 75 0.375
FRN0.1E1 -7
90 0.037 37
FRN0.2E1 -7 9
Single- FRN0.4E1 -7 DB0.75-2 100
0.044 22
phase
200 V FRN0.75E1 -7 17 45 0.068 18
FRN1.5E1 -7 34 0.075 10
DB2.2-2 40
FRN2.2E1 -7 33 30 0.077 7
* The FRN4.0E1 -4E is for the EU.
Note 1: A box ( ) in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure.
Note 2: A box ( ) in the above table replaces A, C, E, J, or K depending on the shipping destination.
Compact models
When using the compact models of braking resistor TK80W120 or TK80W100 , set F50 to "7" and
F51 to "0.033."
5-39
10% ED models
Continuous braking Intermittent braking
Braking resistor
Power (100% braking torque) (Period: Less than 100 s)
Resistance
supply Inverter type Discharging Braking Allowable
( ) Duty
voltage Type Qty. capacity time average loss
(%ED)
(kWs) (s) (kW)
FRN0.1E1 -2 1000 100
FRN0.2E1 -2 500 75
DB0.75-2C 100 50 0.075
FRN0.4E1 -2 250 37
FRN0.75E1 -2 133 20
Three- FRN1.5E1 -2 DB2.2-2C 40 55
73
0.110
14
phase FRN2.2E1 -2 50
200 V FRN3.7E1 -2 DB3.7-2C 33 140 75 0.185
FRN5.5E1 -2 DB5.5-2C 20 55 20 0.275
10
FRN7.5E1 -2 DB7.5-2C 15 37 0.375
FRN11E1 -2 DB11-2C 10 55 10 0.55
FRN15E1 -2 DB15-2C 8.6 75 0.75
FRN0.4E1 -4 250 37
DB0.75-4C 200 50 0.075
FRN0.75E1 -4 133 20
FRN1.5E1 -4 1 73 14
DB2.2-4C 160 55 0.110
FRN2.2E1 -4 50
Three-
FRN3.7E1 -4
phase DB3.7-4C 130 140 75 0.185
FRN4.0E1 -4E*
400 V
FRN5.5E1 -4 DB5.5-4C 80 55 20 0.275 10
FRN7.5E1 -4 DB7.5-4C 60 38 0.375
FRN11E1 -4 DB11-4C 40 55 10 0.55
FRN15E1 -4 DB15-4C 34.4 75 0.75
FRN0.1E1 -7 1000 100
Single- FRN0.2E1 -7 DB0.75-2C 100 50
500
0.075
75
phase FRN0.4E1 -7 250 37
200 V FRN0.75E1 -7 133 20
FRN1.5E1 -7 73 14
DB2.2-2C 40 55 0.110
FRN2.2E1 -7 50 10
* The FRN4.0E1 -4E is for the EU.
Note 1: A box ( ) in the above table replaces S or E depending on the enclosure.
Note 2: A box ( ) in the above table replaces A, C, E, J, or K depending on the shipping destination.
E01 to E05, Terminal [X1] to [X5] Function

E98, E99 Terminal [FWD] and [REV] Function
Function codes E01 to E05, E98 and E99 allow you to assign commands to terminals [X1] to
[X5], [FWD], and [REV] which are general-purpose, programmable, digital input terminals.
These function codes may also switch the logic system between normal and negative to
define how the inverter logic interprets either ON or OFF status of each terminal. The default
setting is normal logic system "Active ON." So, explanations that follow are given in normal
logic system "Active ON."
In the case of digital input, you can assign commands to the switching means for the run
command and its operation and the reference frequency (e.g., SS1, SS2, SS4, SS8, Hz2/Hz1,
Hz/PID, IVS, and LE). Be aware that switching any of such signals may cause a sudden start
(running) or an abrupt change in speed.
An accident or physical injury may result.
5-40
Function code data
Terminal commands assigned Symbol
Active ON Active OFF
0 1000 SS1
1 1001 SS2
Select multi-frequency (0 to 15 steps)
2 1002 SS4
3 1003 SS8
4 1004 Select ACC/DEC time RT1
6 1006 Enable 3-wire operation HLD
7 1007 Coast to a stop BX
8 1008 Reset alarm RST
1009 9 Enable external alarm trip THR
10 1010 Ready for jogging JOG
11 1011 Select frequency command 2/1 Hz2/Hz1
12 1012 Select motor 2 / motor 1 M2/M1
13 Enable DC braking DCBRK
14 1014 Select torque limiter level TL2/TL1
17 1017 UP (Increase output frequency) UP
18 1018 DOWN (Decrease output frequency) DOWN
19 1019 Enable data change with keypad WE-KP
20 1020 Cancel PID control Hz/PID
21 1021 Switch normal/inverse operation IVS
Enable communications link via RS-485 or field bus
24 1024 LE
(option)
25 1025 Universal DI U-DI
26 1026 Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting STM
27 1027 Switch to speed feedback control PG/Hz *
1030 30 Force to stop STOP
33 1033 Reset PID integral and differential components PID-RST
34 1034 Hold PID integral component PID-HLD
42 1042 Activate the limit switch at start point LS *
43 1043 Start/reset S/R *
44 1044 Switch to the serial pulse receiving mode SPRM *
45 1045 Enter the return mode RTN *
46 1046 Enable overload stop OLS *
Run forward
98 (Exclusively assigned to [FWD] and [REV] terminals FWD
by E98 and E99)
Run reverse
99 (Exclusively assigned to [FWD] and [REV] terminals REV
by E98 and E99)
* These output signals are available on inverters with inverter's ROM version 0700 or later. (For the
version checking procedure, refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.4.6 "Reading maintenance information.")
Any negative logic (Active OFF) command cannot be assigned to the functions
marked with " " in the "Active OFF" column.
The "Enable external alarm trip" and "Force to stop" are fail-safe terminal commands.
For example, when data = 9 in "Enable external alarm trip," "Active OFF" (alarm is
triggered when OFF); when data = 1009, "Active ON" (alarm is triggered when ON).
5-41
Terminal function assignment and data setting
Select multi-frequency (0 to 15 steps) -- SS1, SS2, SS4, and SS8

(Function code data = 0, 1, 2, and 3)
The combination of the ON/OFF states of digital input signals SS1, SS2, SS4 and SS8 selects
one of 16 different frequency commands defined beforehand by 15 function codes C05 to C19
(Multi-frequency 0 to 15). With this, the inverter can drive the motor at 16 different preset
frequencies.
The table below lists the frequencies that can be obtained by the combination of switching
SS1, SS2, SS4 and SS8. In the "Selected frequency" column, "Other than multi-frequency"
represents the reference frequency sourced by frequency command 1 (F01), frequency
command 2 (C30), or others. For details, refer to the block diagram in FRENIC-Multi User's
Manual (MEH457), Chapter 4, Section 4.2 "Drive Frequency Command Block."
SS8 SS4 SS2 SS1 Selected frequency

OFF OFF OFF OFF Other than multi-frequency
OFF OFF OFF ON C05 (Multi-frequency 1)
OFF OFF ON OFF C06 (Multi-frequency 2)
OFF OFF ON ON C07 (Multi-frequency 3)
OFF ON OFF OFF C08 (Multi-frequency 4)
OFF ON OFF ON C09 (Multi-frequency 5)
OFF ON ON OFF C10 (Multi-frequency 6)
OFF ON ON ON C11 (Multi-frequency 7)
ON OFF OFF OFF C12 (Multi-frequency 8)
ON OFF OFF ON C13 (Multi-frequency 9)
ON OFF ON OFF C14 (Multi-frequency 10)
ON OFF ON ON C15 (Multi-frequency 11)
ON ON OFF OFF C16 (Multi-frequency 12)
ON ON OFF ON C17 (Multi-frequency 13)
ON ON ON OFF C18 (Multi-frequency 14)
ON ON ON ON C19 (Multi-frequency 15)
Select ACC/DEC time -- RT1 (Function code data = 4)
This terminal command switches between ACC/DEC time 1 (F07/F08) and ACC/DEC time 2
(E10/E11).
If no RT1 command is assigned, ACC/DEC time 1 (F07/F08) takes effect by default.
Input terminal command

Acceleration/deceleration time
RT1
OFF Acceleration/deceleration time 1 (F07/F08)

ON Acceleration/deceleration time 2 (E10/E11)
5-42
Enable 3-wire operation -- HLD (Function code data = 6)
Turning this terminal command ON self-holds the forward FWD or reverse REV run command
issued with it, to enable 3-wire inverter operation.
Short-circuiting the terminals between HLD and [CM] (i.e., when HLD is ON) self-holds the
first FWD or REV command at its leading edge. Turning HLD OFF releases the self-holding.
When HLD is not assigned, 2-wire operation involving only FWD and REV takes effect.
Coast to a stop -- BX (Function code data = 7)
Turning this terminal command ON immediately shuts down the inverter output so that the
motor coasts to a stop without issuing any alarms.
Reset alarm -- RST (Function code data = 8)
Turning this terminal command ON clears the ALM state--alarm output (for any fault). Turning
it OFF erases the alarm display and clears the alarm hold state.
When you turn the RST command ON, keep it ON for 10 ms or more. This command should
be kept OFF for the normal inverter operation.
Enable external alarm trip -- THR (Function code data = 9)
Turning this terminal command OFF immediately shuts down the inverter output (so that the
motor coasts to a stop), displays the alarm 0h2, and outputs the alarm relay (for any fault)
ALM. The THR command is self-held, and is reset when an alarm reset takes place.
Use this alarm trip command from external equipment when you have to
immediately shut down the inverter output in the event of an abnormal situation in a
peripheral equipment.
5-43
Ready for jogging -- JOG (Function code data = 10)
This terminal command is used to jog or inch the motor for positioning a work piece.
Turning this command ON makes the inverter ready for jogging.
Simultaneous keying + keys on the keypad is functionally equivalent to this command;
however, it is restricted by the run command source as listed below.
When the run command source is the keypad (F02 = 0, 2 or 3):

+ keys on the keypad Inverter running state
JOG
ON Ready for jogging

Pressing these keys toggles between Normal operation
OFF the "normal operation" and "ready for
jogging." Ready for jogging
When the run command source is digital input (F02 = 1):

+ keys on the keypad Inverter running state
JOG
ON Ready for jogging

Disable
OFF Normal operation
Jogging operation
Pressing the key or turning the FWD or REV terminal command ON starts jogging.
For the jogging by the keypad, the inverter jogs only when the key is held down. Releasing
the key decelerates to stop.
During jogging, the frequency specified by C20 (Jogging Frequency) and the
acceleration/deceleration time specified by H54 (ACC/DEC Time) apply.
• The inverter’s status transition between "ready for jogging" and "normal
operation" is possible only when the inverter is stopped.
• To start jogging operation with the JOG terminal command and a run command
(e.g., FWD), the input of the JOG should not be delayed 100 ms or more from that
of the run command. If the delay exceeds 100 ms, the inverter does not jog the
motor but runs it ordinarily until the next input of the JOG.
Select frequency command 2/1 -- Hz2/Hz1 (Function code data = 11)
Turning this terminal command ON and OFF switches the frequency command source
between frequency command 1 (F01) and frequency command 2 (C30).
If no Hz2/Hz1 terminal command is assigned, the frequency sourced by F01 takes effect by
default.

Frequency command source
Hz2/Hz1
OFF Follow F01 (Frequency command 1)

ON Follow C30 (Frequency command 2)
5-44
Select motor 2 / motor 1 -- M2/M1 (Function code data = 12)
Turning this terminal command ON switches from motor 1 to motor 2. Switching is possible
only when the inverter is stopped. Upon completion of switching, the digital terminal output
"Switched to motor 2" SWM2 (assigned to any of terminals [Y1], [Y2] and [30A/B/C]) turns ON.
If no M2/M1 terminal command is assigned, motor 1 is selected by default.
Input terminal command SWM2 status

Selected motor
M2/M1 after completion of switching
OFF Motor 1 OFF
ON Motor 2 ON
Switching between motors 1 and 2 automatically switches applicable function codes as listed
below. The inverter runs the motor with those codes that should be properly configured.
Function code name For Motor 1 For Motor 2

Maximum Frequency F03 A01
Base Frequency F04 A02
Rated voltage at Base Frequency F05 A03
Maximum Output Voltage F06 A04
Torque Boost F09 A05
Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor F10 A06
(Select motor characteristics)
(Overload detection level) F11 A07
(Thermal time constant) F12 A08
DC Braking (Braking starting frequency) F20 A09
(Braking level) F21 A10
(Braking time) F22 A11
Starting Frequency F23 A12
Load Selection/Auto Torque Boost/Auto Energy Saving Operation F37 A13
Control Mode Selection F42 A14
Motor (No. of poles) P01 A15
(Rated capacity) P02 A16
(Rated current) P03 A17
(Auto-tuning) P04 A18
(Online tuning) P05 A19
(No-load current) P06 A20
(%R1) P07 A21
(%X) P08 A22
(Slip compensation gain for driving) P09 A23
(Slip compensation response time) P10 A24
(Slip compensation gain for braking) P11 A25
(Rated slip frequency) P12 A26
Motor Selection P99 A39
Slip Compensation(Operating conditions) H68 A40
Output Current Fluctuation Damping Gain for Motor H80 A41
Cumulative Motor Run Time H94 A45
Startup Times of Motor H44 A46
5-45
Motor 2 imposes functional restrictions on the following function codes. Confirm the settings
of those function codes before use.
Related function
Functions Restrictions
codes
Non-linear V/f pattern Disabled. Linear V/f pattern only H50 to H53
Starting frequency Starting frequency holding time not supported. F24
Stop frequency Stop frequency holding time not supported. F39
Overload early warning Disabled. E34 and E35
Droop control Disabled. H28
UP/DOWN control Disabled. Fixed at default setting 0. H61
PID control Disabled. J01
Braking signal Disabled. J68 to J72
Software current limiter Disabled. F43 and F44
Rotation direction limitation Disabled. H08
Overload stop Disabled. J63 to J67
To run motor 2 with the M2/M1 terminal command and a run command (e.g., FWD),
the input of the M2/M1 should not be delayed 10 ms or more from that of the run
command. If the delay exceeds 10 ms, motor 1 will be driven by default.
Enable DC braking -- DCBRK (Function code data = 13)

This terminal command gives the inverter a DC braking command through the inverter’s
digital input.
(Refer to the descriptions of F20 to F22 for DC braking.)
Select torque limiter level -- TL2/TL1 (Function code data = 14)
This terminal command switches between torque limiter 1 (F40 and F41) and torque limiter 2
(E16 and E17) as listed below.
If no TL2/TL1 terminal command is assigned, torque limiter 1 (F40 and F41) takes effect by
default.
Input terminal command TL2/TL1 Torque limiter level
OFF Torque limiter 1 (F40 and F41)
ON Torque limiter 2 (E16 and E17)
UP (Increase output frequency) and DOWN (Decrease output frequency) commands

-- UP and DOWN (Function code data = 17, 18)
• Frequency setting
When the UP/DOWN control is selected for frequency setting with a run command ON,
turning the UP or DOWN terminal command ON causes the output frequency to increase or
decrease, respectively, within the range from 0 Hz to the maximum frequency as listed below.
UP DOWN
Function
Data = 17 Data = 18
OFF OFF Keep the current output frequency.
Increase the output frequency with the acceleration time
ON OFF
currently specified.
Decrease the output frequency with the deceleration time
OFF ON
currently specified.
ON ON Keep the current output frequency.
5-46
The UP/DOWN control is available in two modes--one mode (H61 = 0) in which the initial
value of the reference frequency is fixed to "0.00" at the start of the UP/DOWN control and the
other mode (H61 = 1) in which the reference frequency applied in the previous UP/DOWN
control applies as the initial value.
When H61 = 0, the reference frequency applied by the previous UP/DOWN control has been
cleared to "0," so at the next restart (including powering on), use the UP terminal command to
accelerate the speed as needed.
When H61 = 1, the inverter internally holds the current output frequency set by the UP/DOWN
control and applies the held frequency at the next restart (including powering on).
At the time of restart, if an UP or DOWN terminal command is entered before the
internal frequency reaches the output frequency saved in the memory, the inverter
saves the current output frequency into the memory and starts the UP/DOWN
control with the new frequency. The previous frequency held will be overwritten by
the current one.
Initial frequency for the UP/DOWN control when the frequency command source is switched
When the frequency command source is switched to the UP/DOWN control from other
sources, the initial frequency for the UP/DOWN control is as listed below:
Frequency command Initial frequency for UP/DOWN control

Switching command
source H61 = 0 H61 = 1
Reference frequency given by the

Other than UP/DOWN Select frequency
frequency command source used just
(F01, C30) command 2/1 (Hz2/Hz1)
before switching
Cancel PID control Reference frequency given by PID control
PID conditioner
(Hz/PID) (PID controller output)
Select multi-frequency Reference Reference
Multi-frequency (SS1, SS2, SS4 and frequency given frequency at the
SS8) by the frequency time of previous
command source UP/DOWN control
Enable communications
used just before
Communications link link via RS-485 or field
switching
bus (LE)
To enable the UP and DOWN terminal commands, you need to set frequency
command 1 (F01) or frequency command 2 (C30) to "7" beforehand.
5-47
Enable communications link via RS-485 or field bus (option) -- LE
(Function code data = 24)
Turning this terminal command ON assigns priorities to frequency commands or run
commands received via the RS-485 communications link (H30) or the field bus option (y98).
No LE assignment is functionally equivalent to the LE being ON. (Refer to H30
(Communications link function) and y98 (Bus link function.)
Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting -- STM

(Function code data = 26)
This digital terminal command determines, at the start of operation, whether or not to search
for idling motor speed and follow it. Refer to H09 (Starting mode).
Force to stop -- STOP (Function code data = 30)

Turning this terminal command OFF causes the motor to decelerate to a stop in accordance
with the H56 data (Deceleration time for forced stop). After the motor stops, the inverter enters
the alarm state with the alarm er6 displayed.
Run forward -- FWD (Function code data = 98)

Turning this terminal command ON runs the motor in the forward direction; turning it OFF
decelerates it to stop.
This terminal command can be assigned only by E98 or E99.
Run reverse -- REV (Function code data = 99)

Turning this terminal command ON runs the motor in the reverse direction; turning it OFF
decelerates it to stop.
This terminal command can be assigned only by E98 or E99.
E20, E21 Terminal [Y1] and [Y2] Function

E27 Terminal [30A/B/C] Function (Relay output)
E20, E21, and E27 assign output signals (listed on the next page) to general-purpose,
programmable output terminals [Y1], [Y2], and [30A/B/C]. These function codes can also
switch the logic system between normal and negative to define the property of those output
terminals so that the inverter logic can interpret either the ON or OFF status of each terminal
as active. The factory default settings are "Active ON."
Terminals [Y1] and [Y2] are transistor outputs and terminals [30A/B/C] are relay contact
outputs. In normal logic, if an alarm occurs, the relay will be energized so that [30A] and [30C]
will be closed, and [30B] and [30C] opened. In negative logic, the relay will be deenergized so
that [30A] and [30C] will be opened, and [30B] and [30C] closed. This may be useful for the
implementation of failsafe power systems.
• When a negative logic is employed, all output signals are active (e.g. an alarm would be
recognized) while the inverter is powered OFF. To avoid causing system malfunctions
by this, interlock these signals to keep them ON using an external power supply.
Furthermore, the validity of these output signals is not guaranteed for approximately 1.5
seconds after power-on, so introduce such a mechanism that masks them during the
transient period.
• Terminals [30A/B/C] use mechanical contacts that cannot stand frequent ON/OFF
switching. Where frequent ON/OFF switching is anticipated (for example, limiting a
current by using signals subjected to inverter output limit control such as switching to
commercial power line), use transistor outputs [Y1] and [Y2] instead. The service life of
a relay is approximately 200,000 times if it is switched ON and OFF at one-second
intervals.
5-48
The table below lists functions that can be assigned to terminals [Y1], [Y2], and [30A/B/C].
To make the explanations simpler, the examples shown below are all written for the normal
logic (Active ON).
Function code data
Functions assigned Symbol
Active ON Active OFF
0 1000 Inverter running RUN
1 1001 Frequency arrival signal FAR
2 1002 Frequency detected FDT
3 1003 Undervoltage detected (Inverter stopped) LU
4 1004 Torque polarity detected B/D
5 1005 Inverter output limiting IOL
6 1006 Auto-restarting after momentary power failure IPF
7 1007 Motor overload early warning OL
10 1010 Inverter ready to run RDY
21 1021 Frequency arrival signal 2 FAR2
22 1022 Inverter output limiting with delay IOL2
26 1026 Auto-resetting TRY
27 1027 Universal DO U-DO *1
28 1028 Heat sink overheat early warning OH
30 1030 Service lifetime alarm LIFE
33 1033 Reference loss detected REF OFF
35 1035 Inverter output on RUN2
36 1036 Overload prevention control OLP
37 1037 Current detected ID
38 1038 Current detected 2 ID2
42 1042 PID alarm PID-ALM
49 1049 Switched to motor 2 SWM2
56 1056 Motor overheat detected by thermistor (PTC) THM *1
57 1057 Brake signal BRKS
59 1059 Terminal [C1] wire break C1OFF *1
76 1076 PG error detected PG-ERR *2
80 1080 Stop position override alarm OT *2
81 1081 Timer output TO *2
82 1082 Positioning completed PSET *2
83 1083 Current position count overflowed POF *2
99 1099 Alarm output (for any alarm) ALM
*1 These output signals are available on inverters with inverter's ROM version 0800 or later. (For the
version checking procedure, refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.4.6 "Reading maintenance
information.")
*2 These output signals are available on inverters with inverter's ROM version 0700 or later. (For the
version checking procedure, refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.4.6 "Reading maintenance
information.")
Inverter running -- RUN (Function code data = 0)

This output signal tells the external equipment that the inverter is running at a starting
frequency or higher. It comes ON when the output frequency exceeds the starting frequency,
and it goes OFF when it is less than the stop frequency. It is also OFF when the DC braking is
in operation.
If this signal is assigned in negative logic (Active OFF), it can be used as a signal indicating
"Inverter being stopped."
5-49
Frequency arrival signal -- FAR (Function code data = 1)
This output signal comes ON when the difference between the output frequency and
reference frequency comes within the frequency arrival hysteresis width specified by E30.
(Refer to the description of E30.)
Frequency detected -- FDT (Function code data = 2)
This output signal comes ON when the output frequency exceeds the frequency detection
level specified by E31, and it goes OFF when the output frequency drops below the
"Frequency detection level (E31) - Hysteresis width (E32)."
Undervoltage detected -- LU (Function code data = 3)
This output signal comes ON when the DC link bus voltage of the inverter drops below the
specified undervoltage level, and it goes OFF when the voltage exceeds the level.
This signal is ON also when the undervoltage protective function is activated so that the motor
is in an abnormal stop state (e.g., tripped).
When this signal is ON, a run command is disabled if given.
Torque polarity detected -- B/D (Function code data = 4)
The inverter detects the polarity of the internally calculated torque and issues the driving or
braking polarity signal to this digital output. This signal comes OFF when the calculated torque
is the driving one, and it goes ON when it is the braking one.
Inverter output limiting -- IOL (Function code data = 5)

This output signal comes ON when the inverter is limiting the output frequency by activating
any of the following actions (minimum width of the output signal: 100 ms).
• Torque limiting (F40, F41, E16 and E17)
• Current limiting by software (F43 and F44)
• Instantaneous overcurrent limiting by hardware (H12 = 1)
• Automatic deceleration (Anti-regenerative control) (H69 = 2 or 4)
• Overload stop (Hit and stop) (J65 = 3)
When the IOL signal is ON, it may mean that the output frequency may have
deviated from the frequency specified by the frequency command because of this
limiting function.
Auto-restarting after momentary power failure -- IPF (Function code data = 6)

This output signal is ON either during continuous running after a momentary power failure or
during the period from when the inverter has detected an undervoltage condition and shut
down the output until restart has been completed (the output has reached the reference
frequency).
To enable this IPF signal, set F14 (Restart mode after momentary power failure) to "4: Enable
restart (Restart at the frequency at which the power failure occurred)" or "5: Enable restart
(Restart at the starting frequency)" beforehand.
Motor overload early warning -- OL (Function code data = 7)
This output signal is used to issue a motor overload early warning that enables you to take an
corrective action before the inverter detects a motor overload alarm 0l1 and shuts down its
output. (Refer to the description of E34.)
Inverter ready to run -- RDY (Function code data = 10)
This output signal comes ON when the inverter becomes ready to run by completing
hardware preparation (such as initial charging of DC link bus capacitors and initialization of
the control circuit) and no protective functions are activated.
Frequency arrival signal 2 -- FAR2 (Function code data = 21)
This output signal comes ON when a difference between the output frequency before the
torque limiting and the reference frequency comes to within the frequency arrival hysteresis
width (E30) and then the frequency arrival delay time (E29) has elapsed. (Refer to the
descriptions of E29 and E30.)
5-50
Inverter output limiting with delay -- IOL2 (Function code data = 22)
If the inverter enters any output limiting operation such as output torque limiting, output
current limiting, automatic deceleration (anti-regenerative control), or overload stop (hit and
stop), it automatically activates the stall-free facility and shifts the output frequency. When
such an output limiting operation continues for 20 ms or more, this output signal comes ON.
This signal is used for lessening the load or alerting the user to an overload status with the
monitor.
Heat sink overheat early warning -- OH (Function code data = 28)
This output signal is used to issue a heat sink overheat early warning that enables you to take
a corrective action before an overheat trip 0h1 actually happens.
This signal comes ON when the temperature of the heat sink exceeds the "overheat trip 0h1
temperature minus 5°C," and it goes OFF when it drops down to the "overheat trip 0h1
temperature minus 8°C."
Service lifetime alarm -- LIFE (Function code data = 30)
This output signal comes ON when it is judged that the service life of any one of capacitors
(DC link bus capacitors and electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit board) and cooling fan
has expired.
This signal should be used as a guide for replacement of the capacitors and cooling fan. If this
signal comes ON, use the specified maintenance procedure to check the service life of these
parts and determine whether the parts should be replaced or not.
Reference loss detected -- REF OFF (Function code data = 33)
This output signal comes ON when an analog input used as a frequency command source is
in a reference loss state (as specified by E65) due to a wire break or a weak connection. This
signal goes OFF when the operation under the analog input is resumed. (Refer to the
description of E65.)
Inverter output on -- RUN2 (Function code data = 35)
This output signal comes ON when the inverter is running at the starting frequency or below or
the DC braking is in operation.
Overload prevention control -- OLP (Function code data = 36)
This output signal comes ON when the overload prevention control is activated. The minimum
ON-duration is 100 ms. (Refer to the description of H70.)
Current detected and Current detected 2 -- ID and ID2 (Function code data = 37, 38)
The ID or ID2 output signal comes ON when the output current of the inverter exceeds the
level specified by E34 (Current detection (Level)) or E37 (Current detection 2 (Level)) for the
time longer than the one specified by E35 (Current detection (Timer)) or E38 (Current
detection 2 (Timer)), respectively. The minimum ON-duration is 100 ms.
The ID or ID2 goes OFF when the output current drops below 90% of the rated operation
level.
These two output signals can be assigned to two different digital output terminals
independently if necessary.
Function code E34 is effective for not only the motor overload early warning OL, but
also for the operation level of the current detection ID. (Refer to the description of
E34.)
Switched to motor 2 -- SWM2 (Function code data = 49)

This output signal comes ON when motor 2 is selected with the M2/M1 terminal command
assigned to a digital input terminal. For details, refer to the descriptions of E01 through E05
(Function code data = 12).
5-51
Brake signal -- BRKS (Function code data = 57)
This signal outputs a brake control command that releases or activates the brake. Refer to the
descriptions of J68 through J72.
Alarm output (for any alarm) -- ALM (Function code data = 99)
This output signal comes ON if any of the protective functions is activated and the inverter
enters Alarm mode.
E29 Frequency Arrival Delay Time (for FAR2)

E30 Frequency Arrival (Hysteresis width for FAR and FAR2)
The moment the output frequency reaches the zone defined by "Reference frequency
Hysteresis width specified by E30," the "Frequency arrival signal" FAR comes ON.
After the delay time specified by E29, the "Frequency arrival signal 2" FAR2 comes ON.
For details about the operation timings, refer to the graph below.
E34, E35 Overload Early Warning/Current Detection (Level and Timer)

E37, E38 Current Detection 2 (Level and Timer)
These function codes define the detection level and time for the "Motor overload early
warning" OL, "Current detected" ID, and "Current detected 2" ID2 output signals.
Motor overload early warning signal -- OL
The OL signal is used to detect a symptom of an overload condition (alarm code 0l1 ) of the
motor so that the user can take an appropriate action before the alarm actually happens.
The OL signal turns ON when the inverter output current has exceeded the level specified by
E34. In typical cases, set E34 data to 80 to 90% against F11 data (Electronic thermal overload
protection for motor 1, Overload detection level). Specify also the thermal characteristics of
the motor with F10 (Select motor characteristics) and F12 (Thermal time constant). To utilize
this feature, you need to assign OL (data = 7) to any of the digital output terminals.
Current detected and Current detected 2 signals -- ID and ID2
When the inverter output current has exceeded the level specified by E34 or E37 and it
continues longer than the period specified by E35 or E38, the ID or ID2 signal turns ON,
respectively. When the output current drops below 90% of the rated operation level, the ID or
ID2 turns OFF. (Minimum width of the output signal: 100 ms)
To utilize this feature, you need to assign ID (data = 37) or ID2 (data = 38) to any of digital
output terminals.
5-52
E39 Coefficient for Constant Feeding Rate Time
E50 Coefficient for Speed Indication
E39 and E50 specify coefficients for determining the constant feeding rate time, load shaft
speed, and line speed, as well as for displaying the output status monitored.
Calculation expression
Coefficient for speed indication (E50)

Constant feeding rate time (min) =
Frequency × Coefficient for constant feeding rate time (E39)
Load shaft speed = Coefficient for speed indication (E50) × Frequency (Hz)
Line speed = Coefficient for speed indication (E50) × Frequency (Hz)
Where, the "frequency" refers to the "reference frequency" to be applied for settings (constant
feeding rate time, load shaft speed, or line speed), or to the "output frequency before slip
compensation" to be applied for monitor.
If the constant feeding rate time is 999.9 min. or more or the denominator of the right-hand
side is zero (0), "999.9" appears.
E51 Display Coefficient for Input Watt-hour Data
Use this coefficient (multiplication factor) for displaying the input watt-hour data (5_10 ) in a
part of maintenance information on the keypad.
Input watt-hour data = Display coefficient (E51 data) Input watt-hour (kWh)
Setting E51 data to 0.000 clears the input watt-hour and its data to "0." After clearing,
be sure to restore E51 data to the previous value; otherwise, input watt-hour data will
not be accumulated.
E59 Terminal [C1] Signal Definition (C1/V2 function)

E59 defines the property of terminal [C1] for either a current input +4 to +20 mA DC (C1
function) or a voltage input 0 to +10 VDC (V2 function). In addition to this setting, you need to
turn SW7 on the interface PCB to the corresponding position as listed below.
Data for E59 Input configuration SW7 position
0 Current input: 4 to 20 mA DC (C1 function) C1
1 Voltage input: 0 to +10 VDC (V2 function) V2
5-53
E61 Terminal [12] Extended Function
E62 Terminal [C1] Extended Function (C1 function)
E63 Terminal [C1] Extended Function (V2 function)
E61, E62, and E63 define the property of terminals [12], [C1] (C1 function), and [C1] (V2
function), respectively.
There is no need to set up these terminals if they are to be used for frequency command
sources.
Data for E61,
Function Description
E62, or E63
0 None --
This is an auxiliary analog frequency input to be added
Auxiliary frequency to frequency command 1 (F01). It is never added to
1
command 1 frequency command 2, multi-frequency command or
other frequency commands.
This is an auxiliary analog frequency input to be added
Auxiliary frequency to all frequency commands including frequency
2
command 2 command 1, frequency command 2 and
multi-frequency commands.
This input includes temperature, pressure or other
3 PID command 1 commands to apply under the PID control.
Function code J02 should be also configured.
This input includes the feedback of the temperature or
5 PID feedback amount
pressure under the PID control.
If these terminals have been set up to have the same data, the operation priority is
given in the following order:
E61 > E62 > E63
Selecting the UP/DOWN control (F01, C30 = 7) ignores auxiliary frequency
command 1 and 2.
E65 Reference Loss Detection (Continuous running frequency)

When the analog frequency command (entered through terminals [12] and [C1] (C1/V2
function)) has dropped below 10% of the expected frequency command within 400 ms, the
inverter presumes that the analog frequency command wire has been broken and continues
its operation at the frequency determined by the ratio specified by E65 to the reference
frequency. When the frequency command level (in voltage or current) returns to a level higher
than that specified by E65, the inverter presumes that the broken wire has been fixed and
continues to run following the frequency command.
Avoid an abrupt voltage or current change for the analog frequency command. The
abrupt change may be interpreted as a wire break.
Setting E65 data at "999" (Disable) allows the "Reference loss detected" signal REF
OFF to be issued, but does not allow the reference frequency to change (the inverter
runs at the analog frequency command as specified).
When E65 = "0" or "999," the reference frequency level at which the broken wire is
recognized as fixed is "f1 0.2."
When E65 = "100" (%) or higher, the reference frequency level at which the broken
wire is recognized as fixed is "f1 1."
The reference loss detection is not affected by the setting of analog input adjustment
(filter time constants: C33, C38, and C43).
5-54
C21 Timer Operation
C21 enables or disables a timer operation that is triggered by a run command and continues
for the timer count previously specified with the ／ keys. The operating procedure for
the timer operation is given below.
Data for C21 Function
0 Disable timer operation
1 Enable timer operation
• Pressing the key during timer countdown quits the timer operation.
• Even if C21 = 1, setting the timer to 0 no longer starts the timer operation with the
key.
• Applying terminal command FWD or REV instead of the key command can also
start the timer operation.
Operating procedure for timer operation (example)
Preparation
• Set E43 data to "13" (LED monitor) to display the timer count on the LED monitor and set
C21 to "1" (Enable timer operation).
• Specify the reference frequency to apply to timer operation. When the keypad is selected as
a frequency command source, press the key to shift to the speed monitor and specify
the desired reference frequency.
Triggering the timer operation with the key

(1) While watching the timer count displayed on the LED monitor, press the ／ key to
set the timer for the desired count in seconds. Note that the timer count on the LED
monitor appears as an integral number without a decimal point.
(2) Press the key. The motor starts running and the timer starts counting down. If the timer
counts down, the motor stops without pressing the key. (Even if the LED monitor
displays any item except the timer count, the timer operation is possible.)
After the countdown of the timer operation triggered by a terminal command such as
FWD, the inverter decelerates to stop and at that moment the LED monitor displays
end and any LED monitor item (0 for the timer count) alternately. Turning FWD OFF
returns to the LED monitor item.
C31, C33 Analog Input Adjustment for [12] (Offset and Filter time constant)
C36, C38 Analog Input Adjustment for [C1] (C1 function) (Offset and Filter time constant)
C41, C43 Analog Input Adjustment for [C1] (V2 function) (Offset and Filter time constant)
C31, C36 or C41 configures an offset for an analog voltage/current input at terminal [12], [C1]
(C1 function) or [C1] (V2 function), respectively. The offset also applies to signals sent from
the external equipment.
C33, C38 or C43 configures a filter time constant for an analog voltage/current input at
terminal [12], [C1] (C1 function) or [C1] (V2 function), respectively. The larger the time
constant, the slower the response. Specify the proper filter time constant taking into account
the response speed of the machine (load). If the input voltage fluctuates due to line noises,
increase the time constant.
5-55
P01 Motor 1 (No. of poles)
P01 specifies the number of poles of the motor. Enter the value given on the nameplate of the
motor. This setting is used to display the motor speed on the LED monitor (refer to E43). The
following expression is used for the conversion.
120
Motor speed (r/min) = x Frequency (Hz)
No. of poles
P02 Motor 1 (Rated capacity)

P02 specifies the rated capacity of the motor. Enter the rated value given on the nameplate of
the motor.
Data for P02 Unit Remarks
kW When P99 = 0, 3 or 4
0.01 to 30.00
HP When P99 = 1
P03 Motor 1 (Rated current)

P03 specifies the rated current of the motor. Enter the rated value given on the nameplate of
the motor.
P04 Motor 1 (Auto-tuning)

The inverter automatically detects the motor parameters and saves them in its internal
memory. Basically, it is not necessary to perform tuning when using a Fuji standard motor with
a standard connection with the inverter.
In any of the following cases, perform auto-tuning since the motor parameters are different
from those of Fuji standard motors so as not to obtain the best performance under each of
these controls--auto torque boost, torque calculation monitoring, auto energy saving
operation, torque limiter, automatic deceleration (anti-regenerative control), auto search for
idling motor speed, slip compensation, torque vector, droop control, or overload stop.
• The motor to be driven is made by other manufacturer or is a non-standard motor.
• Cabling between the motor and the inverter is long.
• A reactor is inserted between the motor and the inverter.
For details of auto-tuning, refer to Section 4.1.3 "Preparation before running the motor
for a test -- Setting function code data."
P05 Motor 1 (Online tuning)

The primary and secondary % resistances (%R1) and (%R2) will change as the motor
temperature rises. P05 allows you to tune this change when the inverter is in operation
(online)
P06, P07 Motor 1 (No-load current, %R1, %X and Motor 1, Rated slip frequency)
P08, P12
P06 through P08 and P12 specify no-load current, %R1, %X, and rated slip frequency,
respectively. Obtain the appropriate values from the test report of the motor or by calling the
manufacturer of the motor.
Performing auto-tuning automatically sets these parameters.
No-load current (P06): Enter the value obtained from the motor manufacturer.
%R1 (P07): Enter the value calculated by the following expression.
R1 + Cable R1
%R1 = × 100 (%)
V / ( 3× I )
5-56
where,
R1: Primary resistance of the motor ( )
Cable R1: Resistance of the output cable ( )
V: Rated voltage of the motor (V)
I: Rated current of the motor (A)
%X (P08): Enter the value calculated by the following expression.
X1 + X2 × XM / (X2 + XM) + Cable X
%X = × 100 (%)
V / ( 3 ×I )
where,
X1: Primary leakage reactance of the motor ( )
X2: Secondary leakage reactance of the motor (converted to primary) ( )
XM: Exciting reactance of the motor ( )
Cable X: Reactance of the output cable ( )
V: Rated voltage of the motor (V)
I: Rated current of the motor (A)
Rated slip frequency (P12)
Convert the value obtained from the motor manufacturer to Hz using the following expression
and enter the converted value. (Note: The motor rating given on the nameplate sometimes
shows a larger value.)
(Synchronous speed - Rated speed)
Rated slip frequency (Hz) = x Base frequency
Synchronous speed
For reactance, choose the value at the base frequency 1 (F04).
P09 Motor 1 (Slip compensation gain for driving)

P10 (Slip compensation response time)
P11 (Slip compensation gain for braking)
P09 and P11 determine the slip compensation amount in % for driving and braking individually.
Specification of 100% fully compensates for the rated slip of the motor. Excessive
compensation (P09, P11 100%) may cause a system oscillation, so carefully check the
operation on the actual machine.
P10 determines the response time for slip compensation. Basically, there is no need to modify
the default setting. If you need to modify it, consult your Fuji Electric representatives.
P99 Motor 1 Selection

P99 specifies the motor to be used.
Data for P99 Motor type
0 Motor characteristics 0 (Fuji standard motors, 8-series)
1 Motor characteristics 1 (HP rating motors)
3 Motor characteristics 3 (Fuji standard motors, 6-series)
4 Other motors
Automatic control (such as auto torque boost and auto energy saving) or electronic thermal
overload protection for motor uses the motor parameters and characteristics. To match the
property of a control system with that of the motor, select characteristics of the motor and set
H03 data (Data Initialization) to "2" to initialize the old motor parameters stored in the inverter.
When initialization is complete, P03, P06, P07, and P08 data and the old related internal data
are automatically updated.
5-57
For P99, enter the following data according to the motor type.
• P99 = 0 (Motor characteristics 0): Fuji standard 8-series motors (Current standard)
• P99 = 3 (Motor characteristics 3): Fuji standard 6-series motors (Conventional standard)
• P99 = 4 (Other motors): Other manufacturer’s or unknown motors
• If P99 = 4 (Other motors), the inverter runs following the motor characteristics of
Fuji standard 8-series.
• The inverter also supports motors rated by HP (horse power: typical in North
America, P99 = 1).
H03 Data Initialization

H03 initializes the current function code data to the factory defaults or initializes the motor
parameters.
To change the H03 data, it is necessary to press the + keys or + keys
(simultaneous keying).
Data for H03 Function
Disable initialization
0
(Settings manually made by the user will be retained.)
1 Initialize all function code data to the factory defaults
Initialize motor 1 parameters in accordance with P02 (Rated capacity) and

P99 (Motor 1 selection)
Function codes subject to initialization: P01, P03, P06 to P12 and constants
2
for internal control
(These function codes will be initialized to the values listed in tables on the
following pages.)
Initialize motor 2 parameters in accordance with A16 (Rated capacity) and

A39 (Motor 2 selection)
Function codes subject to initialization: A15, A17, A20 to A26 and constants
3
for internal control
(These function codes will be initialized to the values listed in tables on the
following pages.)
• To initialize the motor parameters, set the related function codes as follows.
1) P02/A16 Set the rated capacity of the motor to be used in kW.
Motor (Rated
capacity)
2) P99/A39 Select the characteristics of the motor.
Motor Selection
3) H03 Data Initialization Initialize the motor parameters. (H03 = 2 or 3)
4) P03/A17 Set the rated current on the nameplate if the already set data
Motor (Rated current) differs from the rated current printed on the nameplate of the
motor.
• Upon completion of the initialization, the H03 data reverts to "0" (factory default).
• If the P02 or A16 data is set to a value other than the nominal applied motor rating, data
initialization with H03 internally converts the specified value forcedly to the equivalent
nominal applied motor rating (see the tables on the next page).
5-58
When Fuji standard 8-series motors (P99 = 0 or A39 = 0) or other motors (P99 = 4 or A39
= 4) are selected, the motor parameters are as listed in the following tables.
200 V class series (Example for FRN_ _ _E1 - A)
Nominal Rated No-load Rated slip

Motor capacity %R %X
applied current current frequency
(kW) (%) (%)
motor (A) (A) (Hz)
(kW)
P02/A16 P03/A17 P06/A20 P07/A21 P08/A22 P12/A26
0.01 to 0.09 0.06 0.40 0.37 11.40 9.71 1.77
0.10 to 0.19 0.1 0.62 0.50 10.74 10.50 1.77
0.20 to 0.39 0.2 1.18 0.97 10.69 10.66 2.33
0.40 to 0.74 0.4 2.10 1.52 8.47 11.34 2.40
0.75 to 1.49 0.75 3.29 2.11 7.20 8.94 2.33
1.50 to 2.19 1.5 5.56 2.76 5.43 9.29 2.00
2.20 to 3.69 2.2 8.39 4.45 5.37 9.09 1.80
3.70 to 5.49 3.7 13.67 7.03 4.80 9.32 1.93
5.50 to 7.49 5.5 20.50 10.08 4.37 11.85 1.40
7.50 to 10.99 7.5 26.41 11.46 3.73 12.15 1.57
11.00 to 14.99 11 38.24 16.23 3.13 12.49 1.07
15.00 to 18.49 15 50.05 18.33 2.69 13.54 1.13
18.50 to 21.99 18.5 60.96 19.62 2.42 13.71 0.87
22.00 to 30.00 22 70.97 23.01 2.23 13.24 0.90
400 V class series (Example for FRN_ _ _E1 - A)

(kW) (%) (%)
motor (A) (A) (Hz)
(kW)
P02/A16 P03/A17 P06/A20 P07/A21 P08/A22 P12/A26
0.01 to 0.09 0.06 0.19 0.16 12.54 10.68 1.77
0.10 to 0.19 0.10 0.31 0.21 12.08 11.81 1.77
0.20 to 0.39 0.20 0.58 0.42 12.16 12.14 2.33
0.40 to 0.74 0.4 1.07 0.66 9.99 13.38 2.40
0.75 to 1.49 0.75 1.72 0.91 8.72 10.82 2.33
1.50 to 2.19 1.5 3.10 1.20 6.89 11.80 2.00
2.20 to 3.69 2.2 4.54 1.92 6.73 11.40 1.80
3.70 to 5.49 3.7 7.43 3.04 6.04 11.73 1.93
5.50 to 7.49 5.5 11.49 4.35 5.55 15.05 1.40
7.50 to 10.99 7.5 14.63 4.95 4.78 15.59 1.57
11.00 to 14.99 11 21.23 7.01 4.02 16.06 1.07
15.00 to 18.49 15 28.11 7.92 3.50 17.61 1.13
18.50 to 21.99 18.5 35.01 8.47 3.16 17.97 0.87
22.00 to 30.00 22 40.11 9.98 2.92 17.32 0.90
5-59
200 V class series (Example for FRN_ _ _E1 - E)

(kW) (%) (%)
motor (A) (A) (Hz)
(kW)
P02/A16 P03/A17 P06/A20 P07/A21 P08/A22 P12/A26
0.01 to 0.09 0.06 0.49 0.46 13.35 11.38 1.77
0.10 to 0.19 0.1 0.73 0.63 12.10 11.83 1.77
0.20 to 0.39 0.2 1.38 1.22 11.95 11.93 2.33
0.40 to 0.74 0.4 2.36 1.91 9.10 12.19 2.40
0.75 to 1.49 0.75 3.58 2.65 7.50 9.30 2.33
1.50 to 2.19 1.5 5.77 3.46 5.39 9.22 2.00
2.20 to 3.69 2.2 8.80 5.58 5.39 9.12 1.80
3.70 to 5.49 3.7/4.0 14.26 8.82 4.79 9.30 1.93
5.50 to 7.49 5.5 21.25 12.65 4.34 11.75 1.40
7.50 to 10.99 7.5 26.92 14.38 3.63 11.85 1.57
11.00 to 14.99 11 38.87 20.36 3.04 12.14 1.07
15.00 to 18.49 15 50.14 23.00 2.58 12.98 1.13
18.50 to 21.99 18.5 60.45 24.61 2.29 13.01 0.87
22.00 to 30.00 22 70.40 28.87 2.12 12.56 0.90
400 V class series (Example for FRN_ _ _E1 - E)

(kW) (%) (%)
motor (A) (A) (Hz)
(kW)
P02/A16 P03/A17 P06/A20 P07/A21 P08/A22 P12/A26
0.01 to 0.09 0.06 0.22 0.20 13.79 11.75 1.77
0.10 to 0.19 0.10 0.35 0.27 12.96 12.67 1.77
0.20 to 0.39 0.20 0.65 0.53 12.95 12.92 2.33
0.40 to 0.74 0.4 1.15 0.83 10.20 13.66 2.40
0.75 to 1.49 0.75 1.80 1.15 8.67 10.76 2.33
1.50 to 2.19 1.5 3.10 1.51 6.55 11.21 2.00
2.20 to 3.69 2.2 4.60 2.43 6.48 10.97 1.80
3.70 to 5.49 3.7/4.0 7.50 3.84 5.79 11.25 1.93
5.50 to 7.49 5.5 11.5 5.50 5.28 14.31 1.40
7.50 to 10.99 7.5 14.5 6.25 4.50 14.68 1.57
11.00 to 14.99 11 21.0 8.85 3.78 15.09 1.07
15.00 to 18.49 15 27.5 10.0 3.25 16.37 1.13
18.50 to 21.99 18.5 34.0 10.7 2.92 16.58 0.87
22.00 to 30.00 22 39.0 12.6 2.70 16.00 0.90
5-60
200 V class series (Example for FRN_ _ _E1 - C)

(kW) (%) (%)
motor (A) (A) (Hz)
(kW)
P02/A16 P03/A17 P06/A20 P07/A21 P08/A22 P12/A26
0.01 to 0.09 0.06 0.44 0.40 13.79 11.75 1.77
0.10 to 0.19 0.1 0.68 0.55 12.96 12.67 1.77
0.20 to 0.39 0.2 1.30 1.06 12.95 12.92 2.33
0.40 to 0.74 0.4 2.30 1.66 10.20 13.66 2.40
0.75 to 1.49 0.75 3.60 2.30 8.67 10.76 2.33
1.50 to 2.19 1.5 6.10 3.01 6.55 11.21 2.00
2.20 to 3.69 2.2 9.20 4.85 6.48 10.97 1.80
3.70 to 5.49 3.7 15.0 7.67 5.79 11.25 1.93
5.50 to 7.49 5.5 22.5 11.0 5.28 14.31 1.40
7.50 to 10.99 7.5 29.0 12.5 4.50 14.68 1.57
11.00 to 14.99 11 42.0 17.7 3.78 15.09 1.07
15.00 to 18.49 15 55.0 20.0 3.25 16.37 1.13
18.50 to 21.99 18.5 67.0 21.4 2.92 16.58 0.87
22.00 to 30.00 22 78.0 25.1 2.70 16.00 0.90
400 V class series (Example for FRN_ _ _E1 - C)

(kW) (%) (%)
motor (A) (A) (Hz)
(kW)
P02/A16 P03/A17 P06/A20 P07/A21 P08/A22 P12/A26
0.01 to 0.09 0.06 0.21 0.19 13.86 11.81 1.77
0.10 to 0.19 0.10 0.34 0.26 13.25 12.96 1.77
0.20 to 0.39 0.20 0.64 0.50 13.42 13.39 2.33
0.40 to 0.74 0.4 1.15 0.79 10.74 14.38 2.40
0.75 to 1.49 0.75 1.82 1.09 9.23 11.45 2.33
1.50 to 2.19 1.5 3.20 1.43 7.12 12.18 2.00
2.20 to 3.69 2.2 4.72 2.31 7.00 11.85 1.80
3.70 to 5.49 3.7 7.70 3.65 6.26 12.16 1.93
5.50 to 7.49 5.5 11.84 5.23 5.72 15.51 1.40
7.50 to 10.99 7.5 15.00 5.94 4.90 15.98 1.57
11.00 to 14.99 11 21.73 8.41 4.12 16.44 1.07
15.00 to 18.49 15 28.59 9.50 3.56 17.92 1.13
18.50 to 21.99 18.5 35.46 10.17 3.21 18.20 0.87
22.00 to 30.00 22 40.66 11.97 2.96 17.56 0.90
5-61
200 V class series (Example for FRN_ _ _E1 - J, K)

(kW) (%) (%)
motor (A) (A) (Hz)
(kW)
P02/A16 P03/A17 P06/A20 P07/A21 P08/A22 P12/A26
0.01 to 0.09 0.06 0.44 0.40 13.79 11.75 1.77
0.10 to 0.19 0.1 0.68 0.55 12.96 12.67 1.77
0.20 to 0.39 0.2 1.30 1.06 12.95 12.92 2.33
0.40 to 0.74 0.4 2.30 1.66 10.20 13.66 2.40
0.75 to 1.49 0.75 3.60 2.30 8.67 10.76 2.33
1.50 to 2.19 1.5 6.10 3.01 6.55 11.21 2.00
2.20 to 3.69 2.2 9.20 4.85 6.48 10.97 1.80
3.70 to 5.49 3.7 15.0 7.67 5.79 11.25 1.93
5.50 to 7.49 5.5 22.5 11.0 5.28 14.31 1.40
7.50 to 10.99 7.5 29.0 12.5 4.50 14.68 1.57
11.00 to 14.99 11 42.0 17.7 3.78 15.09 1.07
15.00 to 18.49 15 55.0 20.0 3.25 16.37 1.13
18.50 to 21.99 18.5 67.0 21.4 2.92 16.58 0.87
22.00 to 30.00 22 78.0 25.1 2.70 16.00 0.90
400 V class series (Example for FRN_ _ _E1 - J, K)

(kW) (%) (%)
motor (A) (A) (Hz)
(kW)
P02/A16 P03/A17 P06/A20 P07/A21 P08/A22 P12/A26
0.01 to 0.09 0.06 0.22 0.20 13.79 11.75 1.77
0.10 to 0.19 0.10 0.35 0.27 12.96 12.67 1.77
0.20 to 0.39 0.20 0.65 0.53 12.95 12.92 2.33
0.40 to 0.74 0.4 1.15 0.83 10.20 13.66 2.40
0.75 to 1.49 0.75 1.80 1.15 8.67 10.76 2.33
1.50 to 2.19 1.5 3.10 1.51 6.55 11.21 2.00
2.20 to 3.69 2.2 4.60 2.43 6.48 10.97 1.80
3.70 to 5.49 3.7 7.50 3.84 5.79 11.25 1.93
5.50 to 7.49 5.5 11.5 5.50 5.28 14.31 1.40
7.50 to 10.99 7.5 14.5 6.25 4.50 14.68 1.57
11.00 to 14.99 11 21.0 8.85 3.78 15.09 1.07
15.00 to 18.49 15 27.5 10.0 3.25 16.37 1.13
18.50 to 21.99 18.5 34.0 10.7 2.92 16.58 0.87
22.00 to 30.00 22 39.0 12.6 2.70 16.00 0.90
5-62
H04, H05 Auto-reset (Times and Reset interval)
H04 and H05 specify the auto-reset function that makes the inverter automatically attempt to
reset the tripped state and restart without issuing an alarm (for any faults) even if any
protective function subject to reset is activated and the inverter enters the forced-to-stop state
(tripped state). If the protective function works in excess of the times specified by H04, the
inverter will issue an alarm (for any faults) and not attempt to auto-reset the tripped state.
Listed below are the recoverable alarm statuses to be retried.
Alarm status LED monitor displays: Alarm status LED monitor displays:
Overcurrent protection 0c1, 0c2 or 0c3 Motor overheated 0h4
Overvoltage protection 0u1, 0u2 or 0u3 Motor overloaded 0l1 or 0l2
Heat sink overheated 0h1 Inverter overloaded 0lu
Braking resistor
overheated
dbh
Number of reset times (H04)

H04 specifies the number of reset times for automatically escaping the tripped state. When
H04 = 0, the auto-reset function will not be activated.
If the "auto-reset" function has been specified, the inverter may automatically restart and run the
motor stopped due to a trip fault, depending on the cause of the tripping.
Design the machinery so that human body and peripheral equipment safety is ensured even
when the auto-resetting succeeds.
Reset interval (H05)

After the reset interval specified by H05 from when the inverter enters the tripped state, it
issues a reset command to auto-reset the tripped state. Refer to the timing scheme diagrams
below.
<Timing scheme for failed retry (No. of reset times: 3)>
- The reset operation state can be monitored by external equipment via the inverter’s digital
output terminal [Y1], [Y2], or [30A/B/C] to which the TRY is assigned by setting "26" with
function code E20, E21, or E27.
5-63
H06 Cooling Fan ON/OFF Control
To prolong the life of the cooling fan and reduce fan noise during running, the cooling fan stops
when the temperature inside the inverter drops below a certain level while the inverter stops.
However, since frequent switching of the cooling fan shortens its life, the cooling fan is kept
running for 10 minutes once it is started.
H06 specifies whether to keep running the cooling fan all the time or to control its ON/OFF.
Data for H06 Cooling fan ON/OFF

0 Disable (Always in operation)
1 Enable (ON/OFF controllable)
H07 Acceleration/Deceleration Pattern

H07 specifies the acceleration and deceleration patterns (patterns to control output
frequency).
Linear acceleration/deceleration
The inverter runs the motor with the constant acceleration and deceleration.
S-curve acceleration/deceleration
To reduce an impact that acceleration/deceleration would make on the machine, the inverter
gradually accelerates/decelerates the motor in both the acceleration/deceleration starting and
ending zones. Two types of S-curve acceleration/deceleration are available; 5% (weak) and
10% (strong) of the maximum frequency, which are shared by the four inflection points. The
acceleration/deceleration time command determines the duration of
acceleration/deceleration in the linear period; hence, the actual acceleration/deceleration
time is longer than the reference acceleration/deceleration time.
5-64
Acceleration/deceleration time
<S-curve acceleration/deceleration (weak): when the frequency change is 10% or more of the
maximum frequency>
Acceleration or deceleration time (s): (2 5/100 + 90/100+ 2 5/100) (reference
acceleration or deceleration time)
= 1.1 (reference acceleration or deceleration time)
<S-curve acceleration/deceleration (strong): when the frequency change is 20% or more of

the maximum frequency>
Acceleration or deceleration time (s): (2 10/100 + 80/100 + 2 10/100) (reference
acceleration or deceleration time)
= 1.2 (reference acceleration or deceleration time)
Curvilinear acceleration/deceleration
Acceleration/deceleration is linear below the base frequency (constant torque) but it slows
down above the base frequency to maintain a certain level of load factor (constant output).
This acceleration/deceleration pattern allows the motor to accelerate or decelerate with the
maximum performance of the motor.
Choose an appropriate acceleration/deceleration time, taking into account the
machinery’s load torque.
H09, H49 Starting Mode (Auto search and Delay time)

H09 specifies the auto search mode for idling motor speed to run the idling motor without
stopping it.
The auto search applies to both a restart of the inverter after a momentary power failure and
every normal startup.
The auto search mode can be switched by assigning an STM terminal command ("Enable
auto search for idling motor speed at starting") to a digital input terminal with any of E01 to E05
(function code data = 26). If no STM is assigned, the inverter interprets STM as being OFF by
default.
Auto search for idling motor speed
Starting the inverter (with a run command ON, BX OFF, auto-reset, etc.) with STM being ON
searches for the idling motor speed for a maximum of 1.2 seconds to run the idling motor
without stopping it. After completion of the auto search, the inverter accelerates the motor up
to the reference frequency according to the frequency command and the preset acceleration
time.
Auto search for idling motor speed to follow
5-65
H09 and STM terminal command ("Enable auto search for idling motor speed at starting")
The combination of H09 data and the STM state determines whether to perform the auto
search as listed below.
Auto search for idling motor speed at starting

Data for H09 STM
For restart after momentary
For normal startup
power failure (F14 = 4 or 5)
0: Disable OFF Disable Disable
1: Enable OFF Enable Disable
2: Enable OFF Enable Enable
-- ON Enable Enable
When the inverter is equipped with any of output circuit filters OFL- -2 and -4 in
the secondary lines, it cannot perform auto search. Use the filter OFL- - A
instead.
Auto search delay time (H49)
Auto search for the idling motor speed will become unsuccessful if it is done while the motor
retains residual voltage. It is, therefore, necessary to leave the motor for an enough time for
residual voltage to disappear. H49 specifies that time (0.0 to 10.0 sec.).
At the startup triggered by a run command ON, auto search starts with the delay specified by
H49. When two inverters share a single motor to drive it alternately, coast to stop it, and
perform auto search every switching, H49 can eliminate the need of the run command timing
control.
The H49 data should be the same value as the H13 data (Restart Mode after Momentary
Power Failure, Restart time). At the restart after a momentary power failure, at the start by
turning the terminal command BX ("Coast to a stop") OFF and ON, or at the restart by
auto-reset, the inverter applies the delay time specified by H13. The inverter will not start
unless the time specified by H13 has elapsed, even if the starting conditions are satisfied.
• Be sure to auto-tune the inverter preceding the start of auto search for the idling
motor speed.
• When the estimated speed exceeds the maximum frequency or the upper limit
frequency, the inverter disables auto search and starts in normal mode.
• In auto search with the restart after momentary power failure enabled (F14 = 4 or
5) and the allowable momentary power failure time specified (H16), turning a run
command ON will start auto search even if the time specified by H16 has elapsed.
• During auto search, if an overcurrent or overvoltage trip occurs, the inverter
restarts the suspended auto search.
• Perform auto search at 60 Hz or below.
• Note that auto search may not fully provide the expected/designed performance
depending on conditions including the load, motor parameters, power cable
length, and other externally determined events.
5-66
H11 Deceleration Mode
H11 specifies the deceleration mode to be applied when a run command is turned OFF.
0 Normal deceleration
The inverter decelerates and stops the motor according to deceleration
commands specified by H07 (Acceleration/deceleration pattern), F08
(Deceleration time 1), and E11 (Deceleration time 2).
1 Coast-to-stop
The inverter immediately shuts down its output, so the motor stops
according to the inertia of the motor and machine and their kinetic energy
losses.
When reducing the reference frequency, the inverter decelerates the motor
according to the deceleration commands even if H11 = 1 (Coast-to-stop).
H12 Instantaneous Overcurrent Limiting (Mode selection)

H12 specifies whether the inverter invokes the current limit processing or enters the
overcurrent trip when its output current exceeds the instantaneous overcurrent limiting level.
Under the current limit processing, the inverter immediately turns OFF its output gate to
suppress the further current increase and continues to control the output frequency.
Disable
0
An overcurrent trip occurs at the instantaneous overcurrent limiting level.
Enable
1
The current limiting operation is effective.
If any problem occurs when the motor torque temporarily drops during current limiting
processing, it is necessary to cause an overcurrent trip (H12 = 0) and actuate a mechanical
brake at the same time.
The similar function is the current limiter specified by F43 and F44. The current
limiter (F43/F44) implements the current control by software, so an operation delay
occurs. When you have enabled the current limiter (F43/F44), also enable the
instantaneous overcurrent limiting with H12 to obtain a quick response current
limiting.
Depending on the load, extremely short acceleration time may activate the current
limiting to suppress the increase of the inverter output frequency, causing the
system oscillation (hunting) or activating the inverter overvoltage trip (alarm 0u ).
When specifying the acceleration time, therefore, you need to take into account
machinery characteristics and moment of inertia of the load.
When the instantaneous overcurrent limiting is enabled, the motor output torque could
drop. For driving elevating machinery which could cause a serious problem with a drop of
the motor output torque, therefore, disable the instantaneous overcurrent limiting. Note
that disabling it will cause an overcurrent trip when a current exceeding the inverter
protection level flows, so secure the protective coordination using a mechanical brake.
5-67
H28 Droop Control
In a system in which two or more motors drive single machinery, any speed gap between
inverter-driven motors results in some load unbalance between motors. The droop control
allows each inverter to drive the motor with the speed droop characteristics for increasing its
load, eliminating such kind of load unbalance.
To use droop control, be sure to auto-tune the inverter for the motor.
H30 Communications Link Function (Mode selection)

y98 Bus Link Function (Mode selection)
Using the RS-485 communications link (standard/option) or field bus (option) allows you to
issue frequency commands and run commands from a computer or PLC at a remote location,
as well as monitoring the inverter running information and the function code data.
H30 and y98 specify the sources of those commands--"inverter itself" and "computers or
PLCs via the RS-485 communications link or field bus." H30 is for the RS-485
communications link; y98 for the field bus.
Command sources selectable

Command sources Description
Inverter itself Sources except RS-485 communications link and field bus
Frequency command source: Specified by F01/C30, or
multi-frequency command
Run command source: Via the keypad or digital input
terminals selected by F02
Via RS-485 communications link Via the standard RJ-45 port used for connecting keypad
(standard)
Via RS-485 communications link Via RS-485 communications link (option card)
(option card)
Via field bus (option) Via field bus (option) using FA protocol such as DeviceNet or
PROFIBUS-DP
5-68
Command sources specified by H30 (Mode selection)
Data for H30 Frequency command Run command
0 Inverter itself (F01/C30) Inverter itself (F02)
Via RS-485 communications link
1 Inverter itself (F02)
(standard)
2 Inverter itself (F01/C30)
(standard)
Via RS-485 communications link Via RS-485 communications link
3
(standard) (standard)
4 Inverter itself (F02)
(option card)
5
(option card) (standard)
6 Inverter itself (F01/C30)
(option card)
7
(standard) (option card)
8
(option card) (option card)
Command sources specified by y98

Data for y98 Frequency command Run command
0 Follow H30 data Follow H30 data
1 Via field bus (option) Follow H30 data
2 Follow H30 data Via field bus (option)
3 Via field bus (option) Via field bus (option)
Combination of command sources

Frequency command
Via RS-485 Via RS-485
Via field bus
Inverter itself communications communications
(option)
link (standard) link (option card)
H30 = 0 H30 = 1 H30=4 H30=0 (1 or 4)

Inverter itself
y98 = 0 y98 = 0 y98=0 y98=1
Run command source
Via RS-485
H30 = 2 H30 = 3 H30=5 H30=2 (3 or 5)
communications link
(standard) y98 = 0 y98 = 0 y98=0 y98=1
Via RS-485
H30 = 6 H30 = 7 H30=8 H30=6 (7 or 8)
communications link
(option card) y98 = 0 y98 = 0 y98=0 y98=1
Via field bus H30 = 0 (2 or 6) H30 = 1 (3 or 7) H30 = 4 (5 or 8) H30 = 0 (1 to 8)

(option) y98 = 2 y98 = 2 y98 = 2 y98 = 3
For details, refer to the FRENIC-Multi User's Manual (MEH457), Chapter 4 "BLOCK
DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC" and the RS-485 Communication User's Manual
(MEH448b) or the Field Bus Option Instruction Manual.
5-69
H45 Mock Alarm
H97 Clear Alarm Data
H45 causes the inverter to generate a mock alarm in order to check whether external
sequences function correctly at the time of machine setup.
Setting the H45 data to "1" displays mock alarm err on the LED monitor and issues alarm
output ALM to the digital output terminal specified (see E20, E21 and E27). (Accessing the
H45 data requires simultaneous keying of " key + key.") After that, the H45 data
automatically reverts to "0," allowing you to reset the alarm.
Just as for data (alarm history and relevant information) of those alarms that could occur in
running of the inverter, the inverter saves mock alarm data, enabling you to confirm the mock
alarm status.
To clear the mock alarm data, use H97. (Accessing the H97 data requires simultaneous
keying of " key + key.") For details, refer to the description of H97.
H69 Automatic Deceleration (Anti-regenerative control) (Mode selection)

H76 Torque Limiter (Frequency increment limit for braking)
H69 enables or disables the anti-regenerative control.

In the inverter not equipped with a PWM converter or braking unit, if the regenerative energy
returned exceeds the inverter's braking capability, an overvoltage trip occurs.
To avoid such an overvoltage trip, enable the automatic deceleration (anti-regenerative
control) with this function code, and the inverter controls the output frequency to keep the
braking torque around 0 Nm in both the acceleration/deceleration and constant speed running
phases.
Since increasing the output frequency too much in the anti-regenerative control is dangerous,
the inverter has a torque limiter (Frequency increment limit for braking) that can be specified
by H76. The torque limiter limits the inverter's output frequency to less than "Reference
frequency + H76 setting."
Note that the torque limiter activated restrains the anti-regenerative control, resulting in a trip
with an overvoltage alarm in some cases. Increasing the H76 data (0.0 to 400.0 Hz) makes
the anti-regenerative control capability high.
In addition, during deceleration triggered by turning the run command OFF, the
anti-regenerative control increases the output frequency so that the inverter may not stop the
load depending on the load state (huge moment of inertia, for example). To avoid that, H69
provides a choice of cancellation of the anti-regenerative control to apply when three times
the specified deceleration time is elapsed, thus decelerating the motor.
0 Disable
2 Enable
(Canceled if actual deceleration time exceeds three times the one specified by
F08/E11.)
4 Enable
(Not canceled even if actual deceleration time exceeds three times the one
specified by F08/E11.)
Enabling the anti-regenerative control may automatically increase the deceleration

time.
When a braking unit is connected, disable the anti-regenerative control.
5-70
H70 Overload Prevention Control
H70 specifies the decelerating rate of the output frequency to prevent a trip from occurring
due to an overload. This control decreases the output frequency of the inverter before the
inverter trips due to a heat sink overheat or inverter overload (with an alarm indication of 0h1
or 0lu , respectively). It is useful for equipment such as pumps where a decrease in the
output frequency leads to a decrease in the load and it is necessary to keep the motor running
even when the output frequency drops.

0.00 Decelerate the motor by selected deceleration time
0.01 to 100.0 Decelerate the motor by deceleration rate from 0.01 to 100.0 (Hz/s)
999 Disable overload prevention control
In equipment where a decrease in the output frequency does not lead to a decrease
in the load, the overload prevention control is of no use and should not be enabled.
H71 Deceleration Characteristics

Setting the H71 data to "1" (ON) enables forced brake control. If regenerative energy
produced during the deceleration of the motor and returned to the inverter exceeds the
inverter’s braking capability, an overvoltage trip will occur. The forced brake control increases
the motor energy loss during deceleration, increasing the deceleration torque.
This function is aimed at controlling the torque during deceleration; it has no effect if
there is braking load.
Enabling the automatic deceleration (anti-regenerative control, H69 = 2 or 4)
disables the deceleration characteristics specified by H71.
H94 Cumulative Motor Run Time 1

Operating the keypad can display the cumulative run time of motor 1. This feature is useful for
management and maintenance of the mechanical system. H94 allows you to set the
cumulative run time of the motor to the desired value. For example, specifying "0" clears the
cumulative run time of the motor.
The H94 data is in hexadecimal notation. It appears in decimal notation on the

keypad.
H98 Protection/Maintenance Function (Mode selection)

H98 specifies whether to enable or disable (a) automatic lowering of carrier frequency, (b)
input phase loss protection, (c) output phase loss protection, and (d) judgment on the life of
the DC link bus capacitor, as well as specifying the judgment threshold on the life of the DC
link bus capacitor, in a style of combination (Bit 0 to Bit 4).
Automatic lowering of carrier frequency (Bit 0)

This function should be used for important machinery that requires keeping the inverter
running.
Even if a heat sink overheat or overload occurs due to excessive load, abnormal ambient
temperature, or cooling system failure, enabling this function lowers the carrier frequency to
avoid tripping (0h1, or 0luv). Note that enabling this function results in increased motor
noise.
5-71
Input phase loss protection (lin ) (Bit 1)
Upon detection of an excessive stress inflicted on the apparatus connected to the main circuit
due to phase loss or line-to-line voltage unbalance in the three-phase power supplied to the
inverter, this feature stops the inverter and displays an alarm lin .
In configurations where only a light load is driven or a DC reactor is connected,

phase loss or line-to-line voltage unbalance may not be detected because of the
relatively small stress on the apparatus connected to the main circuit.
Output phase loss protection (0pl ) (Bit 2)

Upon detection of phase loss in the output while the inverter is running, this feature stops the
inverter and displays an alarm 0pl. Where a magnetic contactor is installed in the inverter
output circuit, if the magnetic contactor goes OFF during operation, all the phases will be lost.
In such a case, this protection feature does not work.
Judgment threshold on the life of DC link bus capacitor (Bit 3)

Bit 3 is used to select the threshold for judging the life of the DC link bus capacitor between
factory default setting and your own choice.
Before specifying the threshold of your own choice, measure and confirm the
reference level in advance.
Judgment on the life of DC link bus capacitor (Bit 4)

Whether the DC link bus capacitor has reached its life is determined by measuring the length
of time for discharging after power OFF. The discharging time is determined by the
capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor and the load inside the inverter. Therefore, if the load
inside the inverter fluctuates significantly, the discharging time cannot be accurately
measured, and as a result, it may be mistakenly determined that the life has been reached. To
avoid such an error, you can disable the judgment on the life of the DC link bus capacitor.
Since load may vary significantly in the following cases, disable the judgment on the life
during operation. Either conduct the measurement with the judgment enabled under
appropriate conditions during periodical maintenance or conduct the measurement under the
operating conditions matching the actual ones.
• An option card or multi-function keypad is used.
• Another inverter or equipment such as a PWM converter is connected to the terminals of
the DC link bus.
To set data of H98, assign functions to each bit (total 5 bits) and set it in decimal format. The
table below lists functions assigned to each bit.
Bit number Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Select life Lower the
Judge the life Detect Detect
judgment carrier
Function of DC link bus output input
threshold of DC frequency
capacitor phase loss phase loss
link bus capacitor automatically
Data = 0 Disable Use the factory Disable Disable Disable
default
Data = 1 Enable Use the user Enable Enable Enable
setting
Example of Enable (1) Use the factory Disable (0) Enable (1) Enable (1)
decimal default (0)
expression (19)
5-72
Conversion table (Decimal to/from binary)
Binary Binary
Decimal Decimal
Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 16 1 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 0 1 17 1 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 0 1 0 18 1 0 0 1 0
3 0 0 0 1 1 19 1 0 0 1 1
4 0 0 1 0 0 20 1 0 1 0 0
5 0 0 1 0 1 21 1 0 1 0 1
6 0 0 1 1 0 22 1 0 1 1 0
7 0 0 1 1 1 23 1 0 1 1 1
8 0 1 0 0 0 24 1 1 0 0 0
9 0 1 0 0 1 25 1 1 0 0 1
10 0 1 0 1 0 26 1 1 0 1 0
11 0 1 0 1 1 27 1 1 0 1 1
12 0 1 1 0 0 28 1 1 1 0 0
13 0 1 1 0 1 29 1 1 1 0 1
14 0 1 1 1 0 30 1 1 1 1 0
15 0 1 1 1 1 31 1 1 1 1 1
J63 to J67 Overload Stop

(Detection value, Detection level, Mode selection, Operation condition and Timer)
When the monitored status index of the load exceeds the detection level specified by J64 for
the period specified by J67, the inverter activates the overload stop function according to
operation specified by J65. Use this function for such as system protection from applying a
load that cannot be allowed by the system characteristics or any reason on the system design
or system in which the motor spindle is locked by a mechanical stopper.
Detection value (J63)

J63 specifies the detection value of status index to be monitored.
Data for J63 Detection value Description
To improve the accuracy of torque calculation, be sure to

0 Output torque auto-tune the inverter for the applied motor.
This setting covers the driving torque only.
The no-load current to the motor always flows. Specify J64

1 Output current (Detection level) correctly considering the no-load current of
the applied motor.
Detection level (J64)

J64 specifies the detection level assuming the inverter rated current and motor rated torque
as 100%.
When J65 = 3 (Hit and stop), the detection level (J64) is determined based on not the
J63 data but the motor rated toque.
5-73
Mode selection (J65)
J65 specifies operation when the load amount exceeds that of one specified by J64.
Data for J65 Mode Description
0 Disable The inverter cancels the overload stop function.
The inverter decelerate-to-stops the motor by the

1 Decelerate to stop
specified deceleration time.
The inverter shuts down the output immediately, and the

2 Coast to a stop
motor coast-to-stops.
The inverter decelerates the motor with the torque limit
operation, and is controlling the output current to keep
the hold toque until the run command turned OFF. Make
3 Hit and stop the mechanical brake turn ON before turning the run
command OFF.
The inverter issues an alarm IOL or IOL2 during the hit
and stop operation.
• Once the overload stop function is activated, the inverter holds it and cannot
accelerate the motor again. To reaccelerate the motor, turn the run command OFF
and ON again.
• If J65 = 3, the inverter ignores the driving toque limit operation already specified.
Operation condition (J66)

J66 specifies the inverter’s operation state to apply the overload stop function.
Note that carefully specify it so as not to induce a malfunction by any setting that is not
needed.
Data for J66 Applicable operation mode
0 Takes effect in the constant speed or deceleration operation mode.
1 Takes effect in the constant speed operation mode.
2 Takes effect in all the operation modes.
Timer (J67)
J67 configures the timer to suppress any activation of the overload stop function by any
unexpected momentary load fluctuation.
If an activation condition of the overload stop function is taken for the time specified by the
timer J67, the inverter activate it in case of J65 = 1 or 2.
If J65 = 3, the timer setting is ignored. In this case, the inverter decelerates the motor
instantaneously with the torque limit function so that referring to the timer is to
interfere running of this function.
J68 to J72 Braking Signal (Brake OFF current, Brake OFF frequency, Brake OFF timer,
Brake ON frequency and Brake ON timer)
These function codes are for the brake releasing/turning-on signals of hoisting/elevating
machines.
5-74
Releasing the Brake
The inverter releases the brake (Terminal command BRKS: ON) after checking torque
generation of the motor, monitoring whether it applies both the output current and frequency
to the motor, which are higher than ones specified for the time long enough.
Function code Name Data setting range
0 to 200%:
J68 Brake OFF current
Set it putting the inverter rated current at 100%.
J69 Brake OFF frequency 0.0 to 25.0 Hz
J70 Brake OFF timer 0.0 to 5.0 s
Turning-on the brake
To assure the service life of brake body, the inverter checks the motor speed lowering enough
less than one specified, monitoring that the run command turns OFF and the output frequency
lowers than one specified for the time long enough, and turn-on the brake (terminal command
BRKS: OFF.)
Function code Name Data setting range
J71 Brake ON frequency 0.0 to 25.0 Hz
J72 Brake ON timer 0.0 to 5.0 s
• The braking signal control is only applicable to motor 1. If the motor switching
function selects motor 2, the braking signal always remains at state of turning-on.
• When an event such as an occurrence of alarm and turning the coast-to-stop
terminal command BX ON shuts down the inverter, the braking signal turns-on
immediately.
5-75
Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING
6.1 Before Proceeding with Troubleshooting
If any of the protective functions have been activated, first remove the cause. Then, after
checking that the all run commands are set to off, reset the alarm. Note that if the alarm is reset
while any run commands are set to on, the inverter may supply the power to the motor which may
cause the motor to rotate.
Injury may occur.
- Even though the inverter has interrupted power to the motor, if the voltage is applied to the
main circuit power input terminals L1/R, L2/S and L3/T (L1/L and L2/N for single-phase
voltage input), voltage may be output to inverter output terminals U, V, and W.
- Turn OFF the power and wait more than five minutes. Make sure that the LED monitor is
turned OFF. Further, make sure, using a multimeter or a similar instrument, that the DC link
bus voltage between the terminals P (+) and N (-) has dropped below the safe voltage (+25
VDC).
Electric shock may occur.
5.2 Overview of Function

Follow the procedure below to solve problems.
Codes
(1) First, check that the inverter is correctly wired, referring to Chapter 2 Section 2.3.5 "Wiring for
main circuit terminals and grounding terminals."
(2) Check whether an alarm code is displayed on the LED monitor.
If any problems persist after the above recovery procedure, contact your Fuji Electric representative.
6-1
6.2 If No Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor
6.2.1 Motor is running abnormally
[1] The motor does not rotate.
Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures

(1) No power supplied to Check the input voltage, output voltage and interphase voltage
the inverter. unbalance.
Turn ON a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB), a
residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage
circuit breaker (ELCB) (with overcurrent protection) or a
magnetic contactor (MC).
Check for voltage drop, phase loss, poor connections, or poor
contacts, and fix them if necessary.
(2) No forward/reverse Check the input status of the forward/reverse command with Menu
operation command was #4 "I/O Checking" using the keypad.
inputted, or both the
Input a run command.
commands were
inputted simultaneously Set either the forward or reverse operation command to off if both
(external signal commands are being inputted.
operation). Correct the assignment of commands FWD and REV to function
codes E98 and E99.
Connect the external circuit wires to control circuit terminals
[FWD] and [REV] correctly.
Make sure that the sink/source slide switch on the interface
printed circuit board (interface PCB) is properly configured.
(3) No indication of rotation Check the input status of the forward/reverse rotation direction
direction (keypad command with Menu #4 "I/O Checking" using the keypad.
operation).
Input the rotation direction (F02 = 0), or select the keypad
operation with which the rotation direction is fixed (F02 = 2 or 3).
(4) The inverter could not Check which operation mode the inverter is in, using the keypad.
accept any run
Shift the operation mode to Running mode and enter a run
commands from the
command.
keypad since it was in
Programming mode.
(5) A run command with While referring to the block diagram of the drive command block*,
higher priority than the check the higher priority run command with Menu #2 "Data
one attempted was Checking" and Menu #4 "I/O Checking" using the keypad.
active, and the run *Refer to the FRENIC-Multi User's Manual, Chapter 4.
command was stopped.
Correct any incorrect function code data settings (in H30, y98,
etc.) or cancel the higher priority run command.
(6) The frequency Check that a frequency command has been entered, with Menu #4
command was set below "I/O Checking" using the keypad.
the starting or stop
Set the value of the frequency command to the same or higher
frequency.
than that of the starting or stop frequency (F23 or F25).
Reconsider the starting and stop frequencies (F23 and F25), and
if necessary, change them to lower values.
Inspect the frequency command, signal converters, switches, or
relay contacts. Replace any ones that are faulty.
Connect the external circuit wires correctly to terminals [13], [12],
[11], and [C1].
6-2
(7) A frequency command Check the higher priority run command with Menu #2 "Data
with higher priority than Checking" and Menu #4 "I/O Checking" using the keypad, referring
the one attempted was to the block diagram of the drive command block*.
active. *Refer to the FRENIC-Multi User's Manual, Chapter 4.
Correct any incorrect function code data settings (e.g. cancel the
higher priority run command).
(8) The upper and lower Check the data of function codes F15 (Frequency limiter (high)) and
frequencies for the F16 (Frequency limiter (low)).
frequency limiters were
set incorrectly. Change the settings of F15 and F16 to the correct ones.
(9) The coast-to-stop Check the data of function codes E01, E02, E03, E04, E05, E98 and
command was effective. E99 and the input signal status with Menu #4 "I/O Checking" using
the keypad.
Release the coast-to-stop command setting.
(10) Broken wire, incorrect Check the cabling and wiring (Measure the output current).
connection or poor
contact with the motor. Repair the wires to the motor, or replace them.
(11) Overload Measure the output current.

Lighten the load (In winter, the load tends to increase.)
Check that a mechanical brake is in effect.
Release the mechanical brake, if any.
(12) Torque generated by Check that the motor starts running if the value of torque boost (F09
the motor was and A05) is increased.
insufficient.
Increase the value of torque boost (F09 and A05) and try to run
the motor.
Check the data of function codes F04, F05, H50 through H53, A02,
and A03.
Change the V/f pattern to match the motor's characteristics.
Check that the motor switching signal (selecting the motor 2 or 1) is
correct and the data of function codes matches each motor.
Correct the motor switching signal.
Modify function codes to match the connected motor.
Check whether the frequency command signal is below the
slip-compensated frequency of the motor.
Change the frequency command signal so that it becomes higher
than the slip-compensated frequency of the motor.
(13) Miss-/poor-connection Check the wiring.
of the DC reactor (DCR)
Connect the DC reactor correctly. Repair or replace wires for the
DC reactor.
6-3
[2] The motor rotates, but the speed does not increase.

(1) The maximum frequency Check the data of function codes F03 and A01 (Maximum
currently specified was frequency).
too low.
Readjust the data of F03 and A01.
(2) The data of frequency Check the data of function code F15 (Frequency limiter (high)).
limiter currently specified
Readjust the data of (F15).
was too low.
(3) The reference frequency Check the signals for the frequency command from the analog input
currently specified was terminals with Menu #4 "I/O Checking" on the keypad.
too low.
Increase the frequency of the command.
If an external potentiometer for frequency command, signal
converter, switches, or relay contacts are malfunctioning, replace
them.
Connect the external circuit wires to terminals [13], [12], [11], and
[C1] correctly.
(4) A frequency command Check the data of the relevant function codes and what frequency
(e.g., multi-frequency or commands are being received, through Menu #1 "Data Setting,"
via communications) Menu #2 "Data Checking" and Menu #4 "I/O Checking," on the
with higher priority than keypad by referring to the block diagram of the frequency
the one expected was command*.
active and its reference *Refer to the FRENIC-Multi User's Manual, Chapter 4.
frequency was too low.
Correct any incorrect data of function code (e.g. cancel higher
priority run commands, etc.).
(5) The acceleration time Check the data of function codes F07 and E10 (Acceleration time).
was too long or too short.
Change the acceleration time to match the load.
Lighten the load (Adjust the dumper of the fan or the valve of the
pump). (In winter, the load tends to increase.)
Check if mechanical brake is working.
Release the mechanical brake.
(7) Mismatch with the In case auto-torque boost or auto-energy saving operation is under
characteristics of the way, check whether P02, P03, P06, P07, and P08 (A16, A17, A20,
motor A21, and A22) agree with the parameters of the motor.
Perform auto-tuning of the inverter for every motor to be used.
(8) The current limiting Make sure that F43 (Current limiter (mode selection)) is set to "2"
operation did not and check the setting of F44 (Current limiter (level)).
increase the output
frequency. Readjust the data of F44, or set F43 to "0" (disabled) if the
current limiting operation is not needed.
Decrease the value of torque boost (F09), then run the motor again
and check if the speed increases.
Adjust the value of the torque boost (F09).
Check the data of function codes F04, F05, H50 through H53 to
ensure that the V/f pattern is right.
Match the V/f pattern values with the motor ratings.
6-4
(9) In the torque control Check whether data of torque limiter related function codes (F40,
mode, the output F41, E16 and E17) is correctly configured and the torque limit
frequency does not switching signal TL2/TL1 is correct.
increase.
Reconfigure data of F40, F41, E16 and E17 correctly or reset it to
the factory default.
Switch correctly the torque switching terminal command
TL2/TL1.
(10) Bias and gain set Check the data of function codes F18, C50, C32, C34, C37, C39,
incorrectly. C42, and C44.
Readjust the bias and gain to appropriate values.
[3] The motor runs in the opposite direction to the command.

(1) Wiring has been Check the wiring to the motor.
connected to the motor
incorrectly. Connect terminals U, V, and W of the inverter to the respective U,
V, and W terminals of the motor.
(2) Incorrect connection Check the data of function codes E98 and E99 and the connection
and settings for run to terminals [FWD] and [REV].
commands and rotation
Correct the data of the function codes and the connection.
direction command
FWD and REV
(3) The setting for the Check the data of function code F02 (Run command).
rotation direction via
keypad operation is Change the data of function code F02 to "2: / keys on
incorrect. keypad (forward)" or "3: / keys on keypad (reverse)."
[4] If the speed variation and current vibration (such as hunting) occur at the constant
speed

(1) The frequency Check the signals for the frequency command with Menu #4 "I/O
command fluctuated. Checking" using the keypad.
Increase the filter constants (C33, C38, and C43) for the
frequency command.
(2) The external frequency Check that there is no noise in the control signal wires from external
command device was sources.
used.
Isolate the control signal wires from the main circuit wires as far
as possible.
Use shielded or twisted wires for the control signal.
Check whether the frequency command has not failed because of
noise from the inverter.
Connect a capacitor to the output terminal of the frequency
command or insert a ferrite core in the signal wire. (Refer to
Chapter 2, Section 2.3.6 "Wiring for control circuit terminals.")
6-5
(3) Frequency switching or Check whether the relay signal for switching the frequency
multi-frequency command is chattering.
command was enabled.
If the relay has a contact problem, replace the relay.
(4) The connection between Check whether auto-torque boost or auto-energy saving operation
the inverter and the is enabled.
motor was too long.
Perform auto-tuning of the inverter for every motor to be used.
Enable load selection for higher startup torque (F37, A13 = 1)
and check for any vibration.
Make the output wire as short as possible.
(5) The inverter output is Once cancel all the automatic control systems--auto torque boost,
hunting due to vibration auto energy saving operation, overload prevention control, current
caused by low stiffness limiter, torque limiter, regenerative energy suppression, auto search
of the load. Or the for idling motor speed, slip compensation, torque vector control,
current is irregularly and droop control, overload stop function, then check that the motor
oscillating due to special vibration comes to a stop.
motor parameters.
Cancel the functions causing the vibration.
Readjust the data of the output current fluctuation damping gain
(H80 and A41).
Check that the motor vibration is suppressed if you decrease the
level of F26 (Motor sound (Carrier frequency)) or set F27 (Motor
sound (Tone)) to "0."
Decrease the carrier frequency (F26) or set the tone to "0" (F27 =
0).
[5] If grating sound can be heard from motor

(1) The carrier frequency Check the data of function codes F26 (Motor sound (Carrier
was set too low. frequency)) and F27 (Motor sound (Tone)).
Increase the carrier frequency (F26).
Readjust the setting of F27 to appropriate value.
(2) The ambient Measure the temperature inside the panel of the inverter.
temperature of the
inverter was too high If it is over 40 C, lower it by improving the ventilation.
(when automatic Lower the temperature of the inverter by reducing the load. (In
lowering of the carrier the case of a fan or a pump, lower the setting data of the
frequency was enabled frequency limiter (F15).)
by H98). Note: If you disable H98, an 0h1 or 0lu alarm may occur.
(3) Resonance with the load Check the precision of the mounting of the load or check whether
there is resonance with the panel or likes.
Disconnect the motor and run it without the inverter, and
determine where the resonance comes from. Upon locating the
cause, improve the characteristics of the source of the
resonance.
Adjust the settings of C01 (Jump frequency 1) to C04 (Jump
frequency (Hysteresis width)) so as to avoid continuous running
in the frequency range causing resonance.
6-6
[6] The motor does not accelerate and decelerate at the set time.

(1) The inverter ran the Check the data of function code H07 (Acceleration/deceleration
motor by S-curve or pattern).
curvilinear pattern.
Select the linear pattern (H07 = 0).
Shorten the acceleration/deceleration time (F07, F08, E10 and
E11).
(2) The current limiting Make sure that F43 (Current limiter (Mode selection)) is set to "2:
prevented the output Enable during acceleration and at constant speed," then check that
frequency from the setting of F44 (Current limiter (Level)) is reasonable.
increasing (during
Readjust the setting of F44 to appropriate value, or disable the
acceleration).
function of current limiter in F43.
Increase the acceleration/deceleration time (F07, F08, E10 and
E11).
(3) The automatic Check the data of function code H69 (Automatic deceleration).
regenerative braking
was active (during Increase the deceleration time (F08 and E11).
deceleration).
Lighten the load (In the case of a fan or a pump load, lower the
setting data of the F15 (Frequency limiter (High)). (In winter, the
load tends to increase.).
(5) Torque generated by the Check that the motor starts running if the value of the torque boost
motor was insufficient. (F09 and A05) is increased.
Increase the value of the torque boost (F09 and A05).
(6) An external frequency Check that there is no noise in the external signal wires.
command is being used.
Isolate the control signal wires from the main circuit wires as far
as possible.
Use shielded wire or twisted wire for the control signal wires.
Connect a capacitor to the output terminal of the frequency
command or insert a ferrite core in the signal wire. (Refer to
Chapter 2, Section 2.3.6 "Wiring for control circuit terminals.")
(7) In torque limit operation, Check whether data of torque limiter related function codes (F40,
the acceleration/ F41, E16 and E17) is correctly configured and the torque switching
deceleration is signal TL2/TL1 is correct.
suppressed.
Reconfigure data of F40, F41, E16 and E17 correctly or reset it to
the factory default.
Switch correctly the torque switching terminal command
TL2/TL1.
Lengthen the acceleration/deceleration time (F07, F08, E10 and
E11).
(8) Any acceleration/ The terminal command RT1 switching between the acceleration/
deceleration time is deceleration time 2 and 1 turns ON/OFF invalidly.
invalidly set.
Turn the RT1 ON/OFF validly. For reference, if RT1 is ON, the
acceleration/deceleration time 2 is applied.
6-7
[7] Even if the power recovers after a momentary power failure, the motor does not restart.

(1) The data of function Check if an undervoltage trip occurs.
code F14 is either "0" or
Change the data of function code F14 (Restart mode after
"1."
momentary power failure (Mode selection)) to "4" or "5."
(2) The run command Check the input signal with Menu #4 "I/O Checking" using the
stayed off even after keypad.
power has been
Check the power recovery sequence with an external circuit. If
restored.
necessary, consider the use of a relay that can keep the run
command on.
While in 3-wire operation, the power source to the inverter's control
PCB went down because of a long momentary power failure; or, the
(HOLD) signal was turned OFF once.
Change the design or the setting so that a run command can be
issued again within 2 seconds after power has been restored.
[8] The inverter does not run as expected

(1) Wrong configuration of Check that all function codes are correctly configured.
function codes
Correct the configuration of the function codes.
Make a note of function code data currently configured and initialize
all function code data (H03).
After initialization, reconfigure the necessary function codes one
by one, checking the running status of the inverter.
6.2.2 Problems with inverter settings
[1] Nothing appears on the LED monitor.

(1) No power supplied to Check the input voltage, output voltage and interphase voltage
the inverter. unbalance.
Connect a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB), a residual-
current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit
breaker (ELCB) (with overcurrent protection) or a magnetic
contactor (MC).
Check for voltage drop, phase loss, poor connections, or poor
contacts, and fix them if necessary.
(2) The power for the Check if the jumper bar has been removed between terminals P1
control PCB did not and P(+) or if there is poor contact between the jumper bar and the
reach a high enough terminals.
level.
Connect the jumper bar or DC reactor between terminals P1 and
P(+) or retighten the screws.
6-8
Possible Causes Check and Measures
(3) The keypad was not Check whether the keypad is properly connected to the inverter.
properly connected to
the inverter. Remove the keypad, put it back, and see whether the problem
persists.
Replace the keypad with another one and check whether the
problem persists.
When running the inverter remotely, ensure that the extension cable
is securely connected both to the keypad and to the inverter.
Disconnect the cable, reconnect it, and see whether the problem
persists.
Replace the keypad with another one and check whether the
problem persists.
[2] The desired menu is not displayed.
Possible Causes Check and Measures

(1) The limiting menus Check the data of function code E52 (Keypad (Menu display
function was not mode)).
selected appropriately.
Change the data of function code E52 so that the desired menu
can be displayed.
[3] Data of function codes cannot be changed

(1) An attempt was made to Check if the inverter is running with Menu #3 "Drive Monitoring"
change function code using the keypad and then confirm whether the data of the function
data that cannot be codes can be changed when the motor is running by referring to the
changed when the function code tables.
inverter is running.
Stop the motor then change the data of the function codes.
(2) The data of the function Check the data of function code F00 (Data Protection).
codes is protected.
Change the setting of F00 from "1" or "3" to "0" or "2."
(3) The WE-KP command Check the data of function codes E01, E02, E03, E04, E05, E98
("Enable data change and E99 and the input signals with Menu #4 "I/O Checking" using
with keypad") is not the keypad.
input though it has been
assigned to a digital Input a WE-KP command through a digital input terminal.
input terminal.
(4) The key was not Check whether you have pressed the key after changing the
pressed. function code data.
Press the key after changing the function code data.
(5) The setting data of The inputs to the terminals of FWD and REV commands are
function code F02, E01 concurrently turned ON.
through E05, E98, and
Turn OFF both FWD and REV.
E99 could not be
changed.
6-9
6.3 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor
Quick reference table of alarm codes
Alarm Alarm
Name Refer to Name Refer to
code code
0l1 Electronic thermal overload alarm 1

0c1 6-17
Instantaneous overcurrent 6-10
0c2 0lu Overload 6-17
0c3 er1 Memory error 6-18
0u1 er2 Keypad communications error 6-19
0u2 Overvoltage 6-11 er3 CPU error 6-19
0u3 er4 Option card communications error 6-19
lu Undervoltage 6-12 er5 Option card error 6-19
lin Input phase loss 6-13 er6 Operation protection 6-20
0pl Output phase loss 6-14 er7 Tuning error 6-20
RS-485 communications error

er8
0h1 Heat sink overheat 6-14 RS-485 communications error 6-21
erp
(Option card)
Alarm issued by an external Data saving error during

0h2 6-15 erf 6-22
device undervoltage
Motor protection
0h4 6-15 erh Hardware error 6-23
(PTC thermistor)
dbh Braking resistor overheated 6-16 err Mock alarm 6-23
cof PID feedback wire break 6-23
[1] 0cn Instantaneous overcurrent
Problem The inverter momentary output current exceeded the overcurrent level.
0c1 Overcurrent occurred during acceleration.
0c2 Overcurrent occurred during deceleration.
0c3 Overcurrent occurred when running at a constant speed.

(1) The inverter output Remove the wires connected to the inverter output terminals (U, V,
terminals were and W) and measure the interphase resistance of the wires. Check
short-circuited. if the resistance is too low.
Remove the part that short-circuited (including replacement of
the wires, relay terminals and motor).
6-10
(2) Ground faults occurred Remove the wires connected to the inverter output terminals (U, V,
at the inverter output and W) and perform a Megger test.
terminals.
Remove the part that short-circuited (including replacement of
the wires, relay terminals and motor).
(3) Loads were too heavy. Measure the motor current with a measuring device, and to trace
the current trend. Therefore, use this information to judge if the
trend is over the calculated load value for your system design.
If the load is too heavy, decrease it or raise the inverter capacity.
Trace the current trend and check if there are any sudden changes
in the current.
If there are any sudden changes, make the load variation smaller
or raise the inverter capacity.
Enable instantaneous overcurrent limiting (H12 = 1).
(4) The value set for torque Check that the output current decreases and the motor does not
boost (F09) was too come to stall if you set a lower value than the current one for F09
large. (F37, A13 = 0, 1, and A05.
3, or 4)
Lower the value for torque boost (F09 and A05.) if the motor is
not going to stall.
(5) The acceleration/ Check that the motor generates enough torque required during
deceleration time was acceleration/deceleration. That torque is calculated from the
too short. moment of inertia for the load and the acceleration/deceleration
time.
Increase the acceleration/deceleration time (F07, F08, E10, E11,
and H56).
Enable current limiter (F43) and torque limiter (F40 and F41)
Raise the inverter capacity.
(6) Malfunction caused by Check if noise control measures are appropriate (e.g., correct
noise grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires).
Implement noise control measures. For details, refer to
"Appendix A" of the FRENIC-Multi User's Manual.
Enable the Auto-reset (H04).
Connect a surge absorber to the coil or solenoid of the magnetic
contactor causing the noise.
[2] 0un Overvoltage
Problem The DC link bus voltage was over the detection level of overvoltage.
0u1 Overvoltage occurs during the acceleration.
0u2 Overvoltage occurs during the deceleration.
0u3 Overvoltage occurs during running at constant speed.

(1) The power supply Measure the input voltage.
voltage was over the
Decrease the voltage to within that of the specifications.
range of the inverter's
specifications.
6-11
(2) A surge current entered If within the same power supply a phase-advancing capacitor is
the input power supply. turned ON or OFF or a thyristor converter is activated, a surge
(temporary precipitous rise in voltage or current) may be caused in
the input power.
Install a DC reactor.
(3) The deceleration time Recalculate the deceleration torque from the moment of inertia for
was too short for the load and the deceleration time.
moment of inertia for
Increase the deceleration time (F08, E11, and H56).
load.
Enable the regenerative braking (H69 = 2, 4), or deceleration
characteristics (H71 = 1).
Enable torque limiter (F41).
Set the rated voltage (at base frequency) (F05 and A03) to "0" to
improve braking ability.
(4) The acceleration time Check if the overvoltage alarm occurs after rapid acceleration.
was too short.
Increase the acceleration time (F07 and E10).
Select the S-curve pattern (H07).
(5) Braking load was too Compare the braking torque of the load with that of the inverter.
heavy.
Set the rated voltage (at base frequency) (F05 and A03) to 0 to
improve braking ability.
(6) Malfunction caused by Check if the DC link bus voltage was below the protective level
noise. when the alarm occurred.
Improve noise control. For details, refer to "Appendix A" of the
FRENIC-Multi User's Manual.
Enable the Auto-reset (H04).
Connect a surge absorber to the coil or solenoid of the magnetic
contactor causing the noise.
[3] lu Undervoltage
Problem DC link bus voltage was below the undervoltage detection level.

(1) A momentary power Reset the alarm.
failure occurred. If you want to restart running the motor by not treating this
condition as an alarm, set F14 to "4" or "5," depending on the
load.
(2) The power to the Check if the power to the inverter was switched back on although its
inverter was switched control PCB was still operating. (Check whether the LEDs on the
back on too soon (with keypad light.)
F14 = 1).
Switch the power ON again after all LEDs on the keypad go off.
(3) The power supply Measure the input voltage.
voltage did not reach the
Increase the voltage to within that of the specifications.
range of the inverter's
specifications.
6-12
(4) Peripheral equipment for Measure the input voltage to find where the peripheral equipment
the power circuit malfunctioned or which connection is incorrect.
malfunctioned, or the
connection was Replace any faulty peripheral equipment, or correct any incorrect
incorrect. connections.
(5) Other loads were Measure the input voltage and check the voltage variation.
connected to the same
power supply and Reconsider the power system configuration.
required a large current
to start running to the
extent that it caused a
temporary voltage drop
on the supply side.
(6) Inverter's inrush current Check if the alarm occurs when you switch on a molded case circuit
caused the power voltage breaker (MCCB), a residual-current-operated protective device
drop because power (RCD)/earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) (with overcurrent
supply transformer protection) or a magnetic contactor (MC).
capacity was insufficient.
Reconsider the capacity of the power supply transformer.
[4] lin Input phase loss

Problem Input phase loss occurred, or interphase voltage unbalance rate was large.

(1) Main circuit power input Measure the input voltage.
wires broken.
Repair or replace the wires.
(2) The terminal screws for Check if the screws on the inverter input terminals have become
the main circuit power loose.
input of the inverter were
Tighten the terminal screws to the recommended torque.
not tight enough.
(3) Interphase unbalance Measure the input voltage.
rate of three-phase
Connect an AC reactor (ACR) to lower the voltage unbalance
voltage was too large.
between input phases.
Raise the inverter capacity.
(4) Overload cyclically Measure ripple wave of DC link bus voltage.
occurred.
If the ripple is large, raise the inverter capacity.
(5) Single-phase voltage Check the inverter type.
was input to the
three-phase input Apply three-phase power. FRENIC-Multi of three-phase input
inverter instead of cannot be driven by single-phase power supply.
three-phase voltage
input.
You can disable input phase loss protection using the function code H98
(Protection/Maintenance Function).
6-13
[5] 0pl Output phase loss
Problem Output phase loss occurred.

(1) Inverter output wires are Measure the output current.
broken.
Replace the output wires.
(2) Wires for motor winding Measure the output current.
are broken.
Replace the motor.
(3) The terminal screws for Check if any screws on the inverter output terminals have become
inverter output were not loose.
tight enough.
Tighten the terminal screws to the recommended torque.
(4) A single-phase motor Single-phase motors cannot be used. Note that the
has been connected. FRENIC-Multi only drives three-phase induction motors.
[6] 0h1 Heat sink overheat

Problem Temperature around heat sink rose.

(1) Temperature around the Measure the temperature around the inverter.
inverter exceeded that
Lower the temperature around the inverter (e.g., ventilate the
of inverter
panel well).
specifications.
(2) Air vent is blocked. Check if there is sufficient clearance around the inverter.
Increase the clearance.
Check if the heat sink is not clogged.

Clean the heat sink.
(3) Accumulated running Check the cumulative running time of the cooling fan. Refer to
time of the cooling fan Chapter 3, Section 3.4.6 "Reading maintenance information –
exceeded the standard "Maintenance Information"."
period for replacement,
Replace the cooling fan.
or the cooling fan
malfunctioned. Visually check whether the cooling fan rotates abnormally.
(4) Load was too heavy. Measure the output current.
Lighten the load (e.g. lighten the load before the overload
protection occurs using the overload early warning (E34). (In
winter, the load tends to increase.)
Decease the motor sound (carrier frequency) (F26).
Enable the overload prevention control (H70).
6-14
[7] 0h2 Alarm issued by an external device
Problem External alarm was inputted (THR).
(when "Enable external alarm trip" THR is assigned to one of digital input terminals
[X1] through [X5], [FWD], and [REV])

(1) An alarm function of the Inspect external equipment operation.
external equipment was
Remove the cause of the alarm that occurred.
activated.
(2) Connection has been Check if the wire for the external alarm signal is correctly connected
performed incorrectly. to the terminal to which the "Alarm from external equipment" has
been assigned (Any of E01, E02, E03, E04, E05, E98, and E99 is
set to "9.").
Connect the wire for the alarm signal correctly.
(3) Incorrect settings. Check if the "Alarm from external equipment" has not been
assigned to an unused terminal (E01, E02, E03, E04, E05, E98, or
E99).
Correct the assignment.
Check whether the assignment (normal/negative logic) of the
external signal agrees with that of thermal command THR set by
E01, E02, E03, E04, E05, E98, and E99.
Ensure that the polarity matches.
[8] 0h4 Motor protection (PTC thermistor)

Problem Temperature of the motor rose abnormally.

(1) Temperature around the Measure the temperature around the motor.
motor exceeded that of
Lower the temperature.
motor specifications.
(2) Cooling system for the Check if the cooling system of the motor is operating normally.
motor malfunctioned.
Repair or replace the cooling system of the motor.
Lighten the load (e.g., lighten the load before overload occurs
using E34 (Overload Early Warning). (In winter, the load tends to
increase.).
Lower the temperature around the motor.
Increase the motor sound (carrier frequency) (F26).
(4) The set activation level Check the thermistor specifications and recalculate the detection
(H27) of the PTC voltage.
thermistor for motor
Reconsider the data of function code H27.
overheat protection was
inadequate.
(5) A PTC thermistor and Check the connection and the resistance of the pull-up resistor.
pull-up resistor were
Correct the connections and replace the resistor with one with an
connected incorrectly or
appropriate resistance.
the resistance was
inadequate.
6-15
(6) The value set for the Check the data of function codes F09 and A05 and readjust the data
torque boost (F09 and so that the motor does not stall even if you set the data to a lower
A05) was too high. value.
Readjust the data of the function codes F09 and A05.
(7) The V/f pattern did not Check if the base frequency (F04 and A02) and rated voltage at
match the motor. base frequency (F05 and A03) match the values on the nameplate
on the motor.
Match the function code data to the values on the nameplate of
the motor.
(8) Wrong settings Although no PTC thermistor is used, the thermistor (H26) is active.
Set H26 (Thermistor (Mode selection)) to "0" (Disable).
[9] dbh Braking resistor overheated

Problem The electronic thermal protection for the braking resistor has been activated.

(1) Braking load is too Reconsider the relationship between the braking load estimated
heavy. and the real load.
Lower the real braking load.
Review the performance of the current braking resistor and raise
it (Modification of related function code data (F50 and F51) is
also required.)
(2) Deceleration time Re-estimate the deceleration torque and time needed for the
currently specified is too current load with a moment of inertia and a deceleration time.
short.
Lengthen the deceleration time (F08, E11 or H56).
Review the performance of the braking resistor and raise it.
(Modification of related function code data (F50 and F51) is also
required.)
(3) Wrong configuration of Recheck the specifications of the braking resistor.
function codes F50 and
F51. Review data of function codes F50 and F51, then reconfigure
them.
Note: The inverter issues an overheat alarm of the braking resistor by monitoring the magnitude of
the braking load, not by measuring its surface temperature.
Therefore, even if the surface temperature of the braking resistor does not rise, when the use of the
brake exceeds more frequently than the one specified by function codes (F50 and 51), the inverter
issues an overheat alarm. To squeeze out full performance of the braking resistor, configure data of
function codes F50 and F51 while actually measuring the surface temperature of the braking
resistor.
6-16
[ 10 ] 0l1 Electronic thermal overload alarm 1
Problem Electronic thermal protection for motor 1 or motor 2 activated.

(1) The characteristics of Check the motor characteristics.
electronic thermal did
Reconsider the data of function codes (P99, F10 and F12) and
not match those of the
motor overload. (A39, A06 and A08).
Use an external thermal relay.
(2) Activation level for the Check the continuous allowable current of the motor.
electronic thermal relay
was inadequate. Reconsider and change the data of function codes F11 and A07.
(3) The acceleration/ Check that the motor generates enough torque for acceleration/
deceleration time was deceleration. This torque is calculated from the moment of inertia
too short. for the load and the acceleration/ deceleration time.
Increase the acceleration/ deceleration time (F07, F08, E10,
E11, and H56).
using E34 (Overload Early Warning). (In winter, the load tends to
increase.)
[ 11 ] 0lu Overload
Problem Temperature inside inverter rose abnormally.

(1) Temperature around the Measure the temperature around the inverter.
inverter exceeded that
Lower the temperature (e.g., ventilate the panel well).
of inverter
specifications.
(2) The torque boost setting Check the setting of F09 and A05 (Torque Boost) and make sure
(F09 and A05) was too that lowering it would not cause the motor to stall.
high.
Adjust the setting of F09 and A05.
(3) The acceleration/ Recalculate the required acceleration/deceleration torque and time
deceleration time was from the moment of inertia for the load and the deceleration time.
too short.
Increase the acceleration/deceleration time (F07, F08, E10, E11,
and H56).
using the overload early warning (E34)). (In winter, the load
tends to increase.)
Decrease the motor sound (carrier frequency) (F26).
Enable overload prevention control (H70).
(5) Air vent is blocked. Check if there is sufficient clearance around the inverter.
Increase the clearance.
Check if the heat sink is not clogged.
Clean the heat sink.
6-17
(6) The service life of the Check the cumulative running time of cooling fan. Refer to Chapter
cooling fan has expired 3, Section 3.4.6 "Reading maintenance information – "Maintenance
or the cooling fan Information"."
malfunctioned.
Visually check that the cooling fan rotates normally.
(7) The wires to the motor Measure the leakage current.
are too long and caused
Insert an output circuit filter (OFL).
a large amount of
current to leak from
them.
[ 12 ] er1 Memory error
Problem Error occurred in writing the data to the memory in the inverter.

(1) While the inverter was Check if pressing the key resets the alarm after the function
writing data (especially
code data are initialized by setting the data of H03 to "1."
initializing data or
copying data), power Return the initialized function code data to their previous
supply was turned OFF settings, then restart the operation.
and the voltage for the
control PCB dropped.
(2) A high intensity noise Check if appropriate noise control measures have been
was given to the implemented (e.g., correct grounding and routing of control and
inverter while data main circuit wires). Also, perform the same check as described in
(especially initializing (1) above.
data) was being
Improve noise control. Alternatively, return the initialized function
written.
code data to their previous settings, then restart the operation.
(3) The control PCB failed. Initialize the function code data by setting H03 to "1," then reset the
alarm by pressing the key and check that the alarm goes on.
The control PCB (on which the CPU is mounted) is defective.
Contact your Fuji Electric representative.
6-18
[ 13 ] er2 Keypad communications error
Problem A communications error occurred between the standard keypad or the multi-function
keypad and the inverter.

(1) Break in the Check continuity of the cable, contacts and connections.
communications cable
Re-insert the connector firmly.
or poor contact.
Replace the cable.
was given to the implemented (e.g., correct grounding and routing of control and
inverter. main circuit wires).
Improve noise control. For details, refer to "Appendix A" of the
FRENIC-Multi User's Manual.
(3) The keypad Check that alarm er2 does not occur if you connect another
malfunctioned. keypad to the inverter.
Replace the keypad.
[ 14 ] er3 CPU error
Problem A CPU error (e.g. erratic CPU operation) occurred.

was given to the implemented (e.g. correct grounding and routing of control and
inverter. main circuit wires and communications cable).
Improve noise control.
[ 15 ] er4 Option card communications error
Problem A communications error occurred between the option card and the inverter.

(1) There was a problem Check whether the connector on the option card is properly mating
with the connection with the connector of the inverter.
between the option card
and the inverter. Reload the bus option card into the inverter.
(2) There was a high Check whether appropriate noise control measures have been
intensity noise from implemented (e.g. correct grounding and routing of control and
outside. main circuit wires and communications cable).
Reinforce noise control measures.
[ 16 ] er5 Option card error
An error detected by the option card. Refer to the instruction manual of the option card for details.
6-19
[ 17 ] er6 Operation protection
Problem You incorrectly operated the inverter.
(1) The key was Although a Run command had been inputted from the input terminal
or through the communications port, the inverter was forced to
pressed when H96 = 1 decelerate to stop.
or 3. If this was not intended, check the setting of H96.
(2) The start check function With a Run command being inputted, any of the following
was activated when H96 operations has been performed:
= 2 or 3. - Turning the power ON
- Releasing the alarm
- Switching the enable communications link LE operation
Review the running sequence to avoid input of a Run command
when this error occurs.
If this was not intended, check the setting of H96.
(Turn the run command OFF before resetting the alarm.)
(3) The forced stop digital Turning ON the forced stop digital input STOP decelerated the
input STOP was turned inverter to stop according to the specified deceleration period
ON. (H96).
If this was not intended, check the settings of E01 through E05
on terminals [X1] through [X5].
[ 18 ] er7 Tuning error
Problem Auto-tuning failed.

(1) A phase was missing Properly connect the motor to the inverter.
(There was a phase
loss) in the connection
between the inverter
and the motor.
(2) V/f or the rated current Check whether the data of function codes agrees with the
of the motor was not specifications of the motor.
properly set. Motor 1: F04, F05, H50 through H53, P02, and P03
Motor 2: A02, A03, A16, and A17
(3) The connection length Check whether the connection length between the inverter and the
between the inverter motor is not exceeding 50 m.
and the motor was too
Review, and if necessary, change the layout of the inverter and
long.
the motor to shorten the connection wire. Alternatively, minimize
the connection wire length without changing the layout.
Disable both auto-tuning and auto-torque boost (set data of F37
or A13 to "1").
6-20
(4) The rated capacity of the Check whether the rated capacity of the motor is smaller than that
motor was significantly of the inverter by three or more orders of class or larger by two or
different from that of the more orders of class.
inverter.
Check whether it is possible to replace the inverter with one with
an appropriate capacity.
Manually specify the values for the motor parameters P06, P07,
and P08 or A20, A21, and A22.
Disable both auto-tuning and auto-torque boost (set data of F37
or A13 to "1").
(5) The motor was a special Disable both auto-tuning and auto-torque boost (set data of F37
type such as a or A13 to "1").
high-speed motor.
(6) A tuning operation Specify the tuning that does not involve the motor rotation (P04
involving motor rotation or A18 = 1).
(P04 or A18 = 2) was Release the brake before tuning that involves the motor rotation
attempted while the (P04 or A18 = 2).
brake was applied to the
motor.
For details of tuning errors, refer to "Errors during Tuning" in Chapter 4, Section 4.1.3
"Preparation before running the motor for a test – Setting function code data."
[ 19 ] er8 RS-485 communications error

erp RS-485 communications error (Option card)
Problem A communications error occurred during RS-485 communications.

(1) Conditions for Compare the settings of the y codes (y01 to y10, y11 to y20) with
communications differ those of the host equipment.
between the inverter and
host equipment. Correct any settings that differ.
(2) Even though no Check the host equipment.

response error detection
time (y08, y18) has been Change the settings of host equipment software, or make the no
set, communications is response error detection time be ignored (y08, y18 = 0).
not performed within the
specified cycle.
(3) Host equipment (e.g., Check the host equipment.
PLCs and personal
computers) did not Remove the cause of the equipment error.
operate due to incorrect
settings and/or defective
software/hardware.
(4) RS-485 converter did Check the RS-485 converter (e.g., check for poor contact).
not operate due to
Change the various RS-485 converter settings, reconnect the
incorrect connections
wires, or replace hardware (such as recommended devices) as
and settings, or
appropriate.
defective hardware.
(5) Broken communications Check continuity of the cable, contacts and connections.
cable or poor contact.
Replace the cable.
6-21
was given to the inverter. implemented (e.g., correct grounding and routing of control and
main circuit wires).
Improve noise control.
Improve noise reduction measures on the host side.
Replace the RS-485 relay converter with a recommended
insulated converter.
(7) The RS-485 Replace the RS-485 communications card (option).
communications card
malfunctioned.
[ 20 ] erf Data saving error during undervoltage
Problem The inverter failed to save data such as the frequency commands, PID commands,
timer value for the timer operation (which are specified through the keypad) or the
output frequencies modified by the UP/DOWN terminal commands when the power
was switched OFF.

(1) The voltage fed to the Check how long it takes for the DC link bus voltage to drop to the
control PCB dropped preset voltage when power is turned OFF.
suddenly while data was
being saved when the Remove whatever is causing the rapid discharge of the DC link
power was turned OFF, bus electricity. After pressing the key and releasing the
because the DC link bus alarm, return the data of the relevant function codes (such as the
was rapidly discharged.
frequency commands, PID commands, timer value for the timer
driven operation (specified through the keypad) or the output
frequencies modified by the UP/DOWN terminal commands)
back to the original values and then restart the operation.
affected the operation of implemented (e.g., correct grounding and routing of control and
the inverter while data main circuit wires).
was being saved when
the power was turned Improve noise control. After pressing the key and releasing
OFF. the alarm, return the data of the relevant function codes (such as
the frequency commands, PID commands, timer value for the
timer driven operation (specified through the keypad) or the
output frequencies modified by the UP/DOWN terminal
commands when the power was switched OFF) back to the
original values and then restart the operation.
(3) The control circuit failed. Check if erf occurs each time power is switched ON.
The control PCB (on which the CPU is mounted) is defective.
Contact your Fuji Electric representative.
6-22
[ 21 ] erh Hardware error
Problem Abnormality on the control PCB or related hardware.

(1) The interface PCB is Remove the interface PCB once and remount it into the card slot
wrongly mounted. until it clicks into place.
(2) The capacity is not set The inverter capacity needs to be modified again.
properly on the control
PCB. Î Contact your Fuji Electric representative.
(3) An abnormality is found Replacement of any boards with an hazard may be required.
in the interconnection
between the control Î Contact your Fuji Electric representative.
PCB, power PCB, and
interface PCB.
(4) Connection problem Either the control PCB or the option card needs to be replaced.
between the control
PCB and the option Î Contact your Fuji Electric representative.
card.
(5) Terminals [13] and [11] Check circuits/wires hooking terminals [13] and [11].
are short-circuited
with each other. Î Remove all the parts causing the short-circuit.
Note）ErH is detected only in turning ON the power supply.
[ 22 ] err Mock alarm

Problem The LED displays the alarm err.

(1) Data of the function This setting makes the inverter issue a mock alarm. Use this to
code H45 has been check out the sequence related to an alarm occurrence.
set to "1."
Î To escape from this alarm state, press the key.
[ 23 ] cof PID feedback wire break

Problem The PID feedback wire is broken.

(1) The PID feedback Check whether the PID feedback signal wires are connected
signal wire is broken. correctly.
Î Check whether the PID feedback signal wires are connected
correctly. Or, tighten up the related terminal screws.
Î Check whether any contact part bites the wire sheath.
was given to implemented (e.g., correct grounding and routing of signal wires,
somewhere in PID communication cables, and main circuit wires).
feedback related
Î Improve the countermeasures against the noise.
circuits.
Î Separate signal wires from main power wires as far as possible.
6-23
6.4 If an Abnormal Pattern Appears on the LED Monitor while No Alarm Code is
Displayed
[1] – – – – (center bar) appears
Problem A center bar (– – – –) has appeared on the LED monitor.

(1) Any of PID commands Make sure that when you wish to view other monitor items, E43 is
and their feedback not set to "10: PID command" or "12: PID feedback amount."
related functions is Set E43 to a value other than "10" or "12."
disabled. Make sure that when you wish to view a PID command or a PID
feedback amount, PID control is still in effect or J01 is not set to "0."
Set J01 to "1: Enable (Process control normal operation)" or "2:
Enable (Process control inverse operation)."
(2) Connection to the Prior to proceed, check that pressing the key does not take
keypad was in poor
connection. effect for the LED display.
Check connectivity of the extension cable for the keypad used in
remote operation.
Replace the cable.
[2] _ _ _ _ (under bar) appears
Problem An under bar ( _ _ _ _ ) appeared on the LED monitor when you pressed the key or
entered a run forward command FWD or a run reverse command REV. The motor did
not start.

(1) The voltage of the DC Select 5_01 under Menu #5 "Maintenance Information" in
link bus was low. Programming mode on the keypad, and check the voltage of the DC
link bus, which should be: 200 VDC or below for three-phase 200 V,
and 400 VDC or below for three-phase 400 V.
Connect the inverter to a power supply that meets its input
specifications.
[3] appears
Problem Parentheses ( ) has appeared on the LED monitor while the keypad displaying
the Drive Monitor.

(1) The data to be displayed Check that the product of the output frequency and the display
could not fit the LED coefficient (E50) does not exceed 9999.
monitor (e.g. overflown).
Adjust the setting of E50.
6-24
Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
Perform daily and periodic inspection to avoid trouble and keep reliable operation for a long time.
Take care of the following items during work.
• Before proceeding to the maintenance and inspection, turn OFF the power and wait more than
five minutes. Make sure that the LED monitor is turned OFF. Further, make sure, using a
multimeter or a similar instrument, that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P (+)
and N (-) has dropped below the safe voltage (+25 VDC).
Electric shock may occur.
• Maintenance, inspection, and parts replacement should be made only by authorized persons.
• Take off the watch, rings and other metallic matter before starting work.
• Use insulated tools.
• Never modify the inverter.
Electric shock or injuries could occur.
7.1 Daily Inspection

Visually inspect errors in the state of operation from the outside without removing the covers while
the inverter operates or while it is turned ON.
- Check if the expected performance (satisfying the standard specification) is obtained.
- Check if the surrounding environment satisfies Chapter 2, Section 2.1 "Operating Environment."
- Check that the LED monitor displays normally.
- Check for abnormal noise, odor, or excessive vibration.
- Check for traces of overheat, discoloration and other defects.
7.2 Periodic Inspection

Perform periodic inspection by the following items of the list of periodic inspection in Table 7.1.
Before performing periodic inspection, be sure to stop the motor, turn OFF the inverter, and shut
down power supply. Then remove the covers of the control and main circuit terminal blocks.
Table 7.1 List of Periodic Inspections
Check part Check item How to inspect Evaluation criteria
Environment 1) Check the ambient temperature, 1) Check visually or 1) The standard
humidity, vibration and measure using specification must
atmosphere (dust, gas, oil mist, or apparatus. be satisfied.
water drops).
2) Check if tools or other foreign 2) Visual inspection 2) No foreign or
materials or dangerous objects are dangerous objects
left around the equipment. are left.
Voltage Check if the voltages of the main and Measure the voltages The standard
control circuit are correct. using a multimeter or specification must be
the like. satisfied.
7-1
Table 7.1 List of Periodic Inspections (Continued)
Keypad 1) Check if the display is clear. 1), 2) 1), 2)

2) Check if there is missing parts in Visual inspection The display can
the characters. be read and
there is no fault.
Structure such 1) Abnormal noise and excessive 1) Visual or hearing 1), 2), 3), 4), 5)
as frame and vibration inspection No abnormalities
cover 2) Loosen bolts (tightened parts) 2) Retighten.
3) Deformation and breakage 3), 4), 5)
4) Discoloration and deformation Visual inspection
caused by overheat
5) Check for foulness and dust.
Common 1) Check if bolts and screws are 1) Retighten. 1), 2), 3)

tight and not missing. No abnormalities
2) Check the devices and insulators 2), 3)
for deformation, cracks, breakage Visual inspection
and discoloration caused by
overheat and deterioration.
3) Check for foulness and dust.
Conductor 1) Check the conductor for 1), 2) 1), 2)

and wire discoloration and distortion Visual inspection No abnormalities
caused by overheat.
2) Check the sheath of the cable for
cracks and discoloration.
Terminal Check that the terminals are not

Visual inspection No abnormalities
block damaged.
DC link bus 1) Check for electrolyte leakage, 1), 2) 1), 2)

capacitor discoloration, cracks and swelling Visual inspection No abnormalities
of the case.
Main circuit
2) Check if the safety valve does not

protrude remarkably.
3) Measure the capacitance if 3) Measure 3) The discharge
necessary. discharge time time is not
with capacitance shorter than time
probe. specified by the
replacement
manual.
Braking 1) Check for odor caused by 1) Smelling and 1) No abnormalities

resistor overheat and cracked insulator. visual inspection
2) Check for broken wire. 2) Visual inspection 2) Within ± 10% of
or measurement the specified
with multimeter resistance
under
disconnection of
one lead
Transformer Check for abnormal roaring noise Hearing, visual and No abnormalities
and reactor and odor. smelling inspection
Magnetic 1) Check for chatters during 1) Hearing 1), 2)

contactor operation. inspection No abnormalities
and relay 2) Check for rough contacts. 2) Visual inspection
7-2
Table 7.1 List of Periodic Inspections (Continued)
Printed 1) Check for loose screws and 1) Retighten. 1), 2), 3), 4)
circuit board connectors. 2) Smelling and No abnormalities
Control circuit
2) Check for odor and discoloration. visual inspection

3) Check for cracks, breakage, 3), 4)
deformation and remarkable rust. Visual inspection
4) Check the capacitors for
electrolyte leaks and
deformation.
Cooling fan 1) Check for abnormal noise and 1) Hearing and 1) Smooth rotation
excessive vibration. visual inspection,
or turn manually
(be sure to turn
Cooling system
the power OFF).

2) Check for loose bolts. 2) Retighten. 2), 3)
3) Check for discoloration caused by 3) Visual inspection No abnormalities
overheat.
Ventilation Check the heat sink, intake and Visual inspection No abnormalities
path exhaust ports for clogging and
foreign materials.
If the inverter is stained, wipe it off with a chemically neutral cloth to remove dust and use a vacuum
cleaner.
7.3 List of Periodical Replacement Parts

Each part of the product has its own service life that will vary according to the environmental and
operating conditions. It is recommended that the following parts be replaced as specified below.
When the replacement is necessary, consult your Fuji Electric representative.
Table 7.2 Replacement Parts
Part name Standard replacement intervals
DC link bus capacitor 10 years

Electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards 10 years
Cooling fan 10 years
(Note) These replacement intervals are based on the estimated service life of the inverter at an ambient
temperature of 40 C under 80% of full load. In environments with an ambient temperature above
40 C or a large amount of dust or dirt, the replacement intervals may need to be reduced.
Standard replacement intervals mentioned above is only a guide for replacement, not a guaranteed
service life.
7-3
7.3.1 Judgment on service life
(1) Viewing data necessary for judging service life; Measurement procedures
Through Menu #5 "Maintenance Information" in Programming mode, you can view on the keypad
various data (as a guideline) necessary for judging whether key components such as the DC link bus
capacitor, electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards, and cooling fan are approaching their
service life.
-1 Measuring the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor (in comparison with that at factory
shipment)
Measure the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor according to the procedure given below. The
result will be displayed on the keypad as a ratio (%) to the initial capacitance at the time of factory
shipment.
-------------------------------------- Procedure for measuring capacitance --------------------------------------
1) To ensure validity in the comparative measurement, put the condition of the inverter back to the
state at factory shipment.
Remove the option card (if already in use) from the inverter.
In case another inverter is connected via the DC link bus to the P(+) and N(-) terminals of the
main circuit, disconnect the wires. (You do not need to disconnect a DC reactor (optional), if
any.)
In case the standard keypad has been replaced with an optional multi-function keypad after
the purchase, put back the original standard keypad.
Turn OFF all the digital input signals fed to terminals [FWD], [REV], and [X1] through [X5] of
the control circuit.
If a potentiometer is connected to terminal [13], disconnect it.
If an external apparatus is attached to terminal [PLC], disconnect it.
Ensure that transistor output signals ([Y1] and [Y2]) and relay output signals ([30A/B/C]) will
not be turned ON.
If negative logic is specified for the transistor output and relay output signals, they
are considered ON when the inverter is not running. Specify positive logic for them.
Keep the ambient temperature within 25 10 C.

2) Switch ON the main circuit power.
3) Confirm that the cooling fan is rotating and the inverter is in stopped state.
4) Switch OFF the main circuit power.
5) Start the measurement of the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor. Make sure that " . . . . "
appears on the LED monitor.
If " . . . . " does not appear on the LED monitor, the measurement will not start. Check
the conditions listed in 1).
6) Once " . . . . " has disappeared from the LED monitor, switch ON the main circuit power again.
7) Select Menu #5 "Maintenance Information" in Programming mode and note the reading (relative
capacitance (%) of the DC link bus capacitor).
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7-4
-2 Measuring the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor (during power-off time under ordinary
operating condition)
If the measuring method for discharging condition of the DC link bus capacitor during a power-off
time under the ordinary operating condition at the end user’s installation is different from the initial
measuring method at the time of factory shipment, the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitors can
not be measured. Follow the procedure mentioned below when you measure the capacitance of the
DC link bus capacitors under the ordinary operating condition at the end User's installation.
------------------------------ Procedure for setting up measurement condition ------------------------------

1) Set function code H98 (Protection/maintenance function) to enable the user to specify the
judgment criteria for the service life of the DC link bus capacitor (Bit 3) (refer to function code
H98).
2) Place the inverter in stopped state.
3) Place the inverter in the state of power-off under ordinary operating conditions.
4) Set both function codes H42 (Capacitance of DC link bus capacitor) and H47 (Initial capacitance
of DC link bus capacitor) to "0000."
5) Switch OFF the inverter.
Measure the discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor and save the result in function code
H47 (Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor).
The condition under which the measurement has been conducted will be automatically
collected and saved.
During the measurement, " . . . . " will appear on the LED monitor.
6) Switch ON the inverter again. Confirm that H42 (Capacitance of DC link bus capacitor) and H47
(Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor) hold right values. Move to Menu #5 "Maintenance
Information" and confirm that the relative capacitance (ratio to full capacitance) is 100%.
If the measurement has failed, "0001" is entered into both H42 and H47. Check
whether there has been any mistake in operation and conduct the measurement
again.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
To change the settings back to the state at the time of factory shipment, set H47 (Initial capacitance
of DC link bus capacitor) to "0002"; the original values will be restored.
Hereafter, each time the inverter is switched OFF, the discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor is
automatically measured if the above condition is met.
The condition given above produces a rather large measurement error. If this mode gives
you a lifetime alarm, set H98 (Maintenance operation) back to the default setting (Bit 3
(Specify service life criteria for replacing the DC link bus capacitor) = 0) and conduct the
measurement under the condition at the time of factory shipment.
Electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards

Move to Menu #5 "Maintenance Information" in Programming mode and check the accumulated run
time of the electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards. This value is calculated from the
cumulative total number of hours a voltage has been applied on the electrolytic capacitor. The value
is displayed on the LED monitor in units of 1000 hours.
7-5
Cooling fan
Select Menu #5 "Maintenance Information" and check the accumulated run time of the cooling fan.
The inverter accumulates hours for which the cooling fan has run. The display is in units of 1000
hours. The accumulated time should be used just a guide since the actual service life will be
significantly affected by the temperature and operation environment.
(2) Early warning of lifetime alarm

For the components listed in Table 7.3, you can get an early warning of lifetime alarm at one of the
transistor output terminals ([Y1] and [Y2]) and the relay contact terminals ([30A/B/C]) as soon as any
of the conditions listed under the "Judgment level" column has been exceeded. When the
replacement data of any parts exceeds the judgment level, this signal comes ON.
Table 7.3 Criteria for Issuing a Lifetime Alarm
Parts to be replaced Judgment level
DC link bus capacitor 85% or lower of the capacitance than that of the factory setting
Electrolytic capacitors on the 87000 hours or longer as accumulated run time

printed circuit boards (estimated service life at the inverter’s ambient temperature of
40 C under 80% of full load)
Cooling fan 87000 hours or longer as accumulated run time

(estimated service life at the inverter’s ambient temperature of
40 C under 80% of full load)
7.4 Measurement of Electrical Amounts in Main Circuit

Because the voltage and current of the power supply (input, primary circuit) of the main circuit of the
inverter and those of the motor (output, secondary circuit) include harmonic components, the
readings may vary with the type of the meter. Use meters indicated in Table 7.4 when measuring with
meters for commercial frequencies.
The power factor cannot be measured by a commercially available power-factor meter that
measures the phase difference between the voltage and current. To obtain the power factor,
measure the power, voltage and current on each of the input and output sides and calculate in the
following formula.
Three-phase input Single-phase input

Electric power (W) Electric power (W)
Power factor = × 100 % Power factor = × 100 %
3×Voltage (V)×Current (A) Voltage (V) × Current (A)
7-6
Table 7.4 Meters for Measurement of Main Circuit
DC link bus
Item
Input (primary) side Output (secondary) side voltage

(P (+)-N (-))
Voltage Current Voltage Current
Waveform
Name of
meter
Ammeter Voltmeter Wattmeter Ammeter Voltmeter Wattmeter DC voltmeter

AR, AS, AT VR, VS, VT W R, W T AU, AV, AW VU, VV, VW W U, WW V
Rectifier or Digital
Type of
meter
Moving iron Digital AC Digital AC Digital AC Moving coil

moving iron AC power
type power meter power meter power meter type
type meter
Symbol of
meter
It is not recommended that meters other than a digital AC power meter be used for
measuring the output voltage or output current since they may cause larger
measurement errors or, in the worst case, they may be damaged.
Figure 7.1 Connection of Meters
7-7
7.5 Insulation Test
Because an insulation test is made in the factory before shipment, avoid a Megger test.
If a Megger test is unavoidable, follow the procedure below. Because a wrong test procedure will
cause breakage of the inverter, take sufficient care.
A dielectric strength test will cause breakage of the inverter similarly to the Megger test if the test
procedure is wrong. When the dielectric strength test is necessary, contact your Fuji Electric
representative.
(1) Megger test of main circuit

1) Use a 500 VDC Megger and shut off the main power supply without fail during measurement.
2) If the test voltage leaks to the control circuit due to the wiring, disconnect all the control wiring.
3) Connect the main circuit terminals with a common cable as shown in Figure 7.2.
4) The Megger test must be limited to across the common line of the main circuit and the ground
( ).
5) 5 M (1 M for the EMC filter built-in type of inverters) or a larger value displayed at the Megger
indicates a correct state. (The value is for a discrete inverter.)
Figure 7.2 Megger Test
(2) Dielectric strength test of control circuit

Do not perform a Megger test or dielectric strength test for the control circuit. Prepare a high
resistance range tester for the control circuit.
1) Disconnect all the external wiring from the control circuit terminals.
2) Perform a continuity test to the ground. One M or a larger measurement indicates a correct
state.
(3) Dielectric strength test of external main circuit and sequence control circuit
Disconnect all the inverter terminals so that the test voltage is not applied.
7-8
7.6 Inquiries about Product and Guarantee
7.6.1 When making an inquiry
Upon breakage of the product, uncertainties, failure or inquiries, inform your Fuji Electric
representative of the following information.
1) Inverter type (Refer to Chapter 1, Section 1.1.)
2) SER No. (serial number of equipment) (Refer to Chapter 1, Section 1.1.)
3) Function codes and their data that you changed from the factory defaults (Refer to Chapter 3,
Section 3.4.3.)
4) ROM version (Refer to Chapter 3, Section 3.4.6.)
5) Date of purchase
6) Inquiries (for example, point and extent of breakage, uncertainties, failure phenomena, and other
circumstances)
7) Production year & week (Refer to Chapter 1, Section 1.1.)
7.6.2 Product warranty

To all our customers who purchase Fuji Electric products:
Please take the following items into consideration when placing your order.
When requesting an estimate and placing your orders for the products included in these materials,
please be aware that any items such as specifications which are not specifically mentioned in the
contract, catalog, specifications or other materials will be as mentioned below.
In addition, the products included in these materials are limited in the use they are put to and the
place where they can be used, etc., and may require periodic inspection. Please confirm these
points with your sales representative or directly with this company.
Furthermore, regarding purchased products and delivered products, we request that you take
adequate consideration of the necessity of rapid receiving inspections and of product management
and maintenance even before receiving your products.
[ 1 ] Free of charge warranty period and warranty range

(1) Free of charge warranty period
1) The product warranty period is ''1 year from the date of purchase'' or 24 months from the
manufacturing date imprinted on the name place, whichever date is earlier.
2) However, in cases where the use environment, conditions of use, use frequency and times
used, etc., have an effect on product life, this warranty period may not apply.
3) Furthermore, the warranty period for parts restored by Fuji Electric's Service Department is
''6 months from the date that repairs are completed.''
7-9
(2) Warranty range
1) In the event that breakdown occurs during the product's warranty period which is the
responsibility of Fuji Electric, Fuji Electric will replace or repair the part of the product that has
broken down free of charge at the place where the product was purchased or where it was
delivered. However, if the following cases are applicable, the terms of this warranty may not
apply.
The breakdown was caused by inappropriate conditions, environment, handling or use
methods, etc. which are not specified in the catalog, operation manual, specifications or
other relevant documents.
The breakdown was caused by the product other than the purchased or delivered Fuji's
product.
The breakdown was caused by the product other than Fuji's product, such as the
customer's equipment or software design, etc.
Concerning the Fuji's programmable products, the breakdown was caused by a program
other than a program supplied by this company, or the results from using such a program.
The breakdown was caused by modifications or repairs affected by a party other than Fuji
Electric.
The breakdown was caused by improper maintenance or replacement using
consumables, etc. specified in the operation manual or catalog, etc.
The breakdown was caused by a chemical or technical problem that was not foreseen
when making practical application of the product at the time it was purchased or
delivered.
The product was not used in the manner the product was originally intended to be used.
The breakdown was caused by a reason which is not this company's responsibility, such
as lightning or other disaster.
(2) Furthermore, the warranty specified herein shall be limited to the purchased or delivered
product alone.
(3) The upper limit for the warranty range shall be as specified in item (1) above and any
damages (damage to or loss of machinery or equipment, or lost profits from the same, etc.)
consequent to or resulting from breakdown of the purchased or delivered product shall be
excluded from coverage by this warranty.
(3) Trouble diagnosis

As a rule, the customer is requested to carry out a preliminary trouble diagnosis. However, at the
customer's request, this company or its service network can perform the trouble diagnosis on a
chargeable basis. In this case, the customer is asked to assume the burden for charges levied in
accordance with this company's fee schedule.
[ 2 ] Exclusion of liability for loss of opportunity, etc.
Regardless of whether a breakdown occurs during or after the free of charge warranty period, this
company shall not be liable for any loss of opportunity, loss of profits, or damages arising from
special circumstances, secondary damages, accident compensation to another company, or
damages to products other than this company's products, whether foreseen or not by this company,
which this company is not be responsible for causing.
7-10
[ 3 ] Repair period after production stop, spare parts supply period (holding period)
Concerning models (products) which have gone out of production, this company will perform repairs
for a period of 7 years after production stop, counting from the month and year when the production
stop occurs. In addition, we will continue to supply the spare parts required for repairs for a period of
7 years, counting from the month and year when the production stop occurs. However, if it is
estimated that the life cycle of certain electronic and other parts is short and it will be difficult to
procure or produce those parts, there may be cases where it is difficult to provide repairs or supply
spare parts even within this 7-year period. For details, please confirm at our company's business
office or our service office.
[ 4 ] Transfer rights
In the case of standard products which do not include settings or adjustments in an application
program, the products shall be transported to and transferred to the customer and this company
shall not be responsible for local adjustments or trial operation.
[ 5 ] Service contents
The cost of purchased and delivered products does not include the cost of dispatching engineers or
service costs. Depending on the request, these can be discussed separately.
[ 6 ] Applicable scope of service
Above contents shall be assumed to apply to transactions and use of the country where you
purchased the products.
Consult the local supplier or Fuji for the detail separately.
7-11
Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS
8.1 Standard Models
8.1.1 Three-phase 200 V class series
*1 Fuji 4-pole standard motor
*2 Rated capacity is calculated assuming the output rated voltage as 220 V.

*3 Output voltage cannot exceed the power supply voltage.
*4 Use the inverter at the current enclosed with parentheses ( ) or below when the carrier frequency is set to 4 kHz
or above (F26) and the inverter continuously runs at 100% load.
*5 In the case of inverters with a capacity of 15 kW at an ambient temperature of 45 C or above, this overload
capability is assured, provided that the inverter has run continuously with 85% of the rated current.
*6 Max voltage (V) - Min voltage (V)

Voltage unbalance (%) = × 67 (IEC 61800 - 3)
Three - phase average voltage (V)
If this value is 2 to 3%, use an optional AC reactor (ACR).
*7 The value is calculated assuming that the inverter is connected with a power supply with the capacity of 500 kVA
(or 10 times the inverter capacity if the inverter capacity exceeds 50 kVA) and %X is 5%.
*8 Obtained when a DC reactor (DCR) is used.
*9 Average braking torque obtained when reducing the speed from 60 Hz with AVR control OFF. (It varies with the
efficiency of the motor.)
*10 Average braking torque obtained by use of an external braking resistor (standard type available as option)
Note: A box ( ) in the above table replaces A, C, J, or K depending on the shipping destination.
8-1
*1 The nominal applied motor rating of FRN4.0E1S-4E to be shipped to the EU is 4.0 kW.
*3 Rated capacity is calculated assuming the output rated voltage as 440 V.

*6 In the case of inverters with a capacity of 15 kW at an ambient temperature of 45 C or above, this overload
capability is assured, provided that the inverter has run continuously with 85% of the rated current.
*7 Max voltage (V) - Min voltage (V)

Voltage unbalance (%) = × 67 (IEC 61800 - 3)
If this value is 2 to 3%, use an optional AC reactor (ACR).
Note: A box ( ) in the above table replaces A, C, E, J, or K depending on the shipping destination.
8-2
8.1.3 Single-phase 200 V class series
*2 Rated capacity is calculated by assuming the output rated voltage as 220 V.

8-3
8.2 Models Available on Order (EMC filter built-in type)
Item Specifications
Type (FRN_ _ _E1E-2 ) 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15
Applicable motor rating (kW) *1 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15
Weight (kg) 0.7 0.7 0.8 0.9 2.4 2.4 2.9 5.1 5.3 10.3 11.3
EMC Directives Emission Category C2 Category C3
(EN61800-3:2004) Immunity Category C3 Category C3
*1 Fuji 4-pole standard motors
Note: A box ( ) in the above table replaces A, C, J, or K depending on the shipping destination.
Other than those items in the above table are the same as those in Section 8.1 " Standard Models."
Item Specifications
3.7/
Type (FRN_ _ _E1E-4 ) 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 5.5 7.5 11 15
4.0
3.7/
Applicable motor rating (kW) *1 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 5.5 7.5 11 15
4.0
Weight (kg) 1.5 1.6 2.5 2.5 3.0 4.8 5.0 8.1 9.1
EMC Directives Emission Category C2 Category C3
(EN61800-3:2004) Immunity Category C3 Category C3
Note: A box ( ) in the above table replaces A, C, E, J, or K depending on the shipping destination. Note
that the FRN4.0E1E-4 can be followed by E only.
8.2.3 Single-phase 200 V class series
Item Specifications
Type (FRN_ _ _E1E-7 ) 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2
Applicable motor rating (kW) *1 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2
Weight (kg) 0.7 0.7 0.8 1.3 2.5 3.0
EMC Directives Emission Category C2
(EN61800-3:2004) Immunity Category C3
8-4
8.3 Specifications of Keypad Related
8.3.1 General specifications of keypad
Table 8.1 General Specifications
Items Specification Remarks

Protective structure Front side: IP40, Back (mounting) side: IP20
Site to be installed In door
Ambient temperature -10 to 50 C
Ambient humidity 5 to 95% RH, no condensation allowed
No corrosive gas, no inflammable gas, no dust, and no
Ambient air
direct sunlight allowed
Altitude 1000 m or less (Note)
Air pressure 86 to 106 kPa
3 mm (maximum amplitude): Within 2 to 9 Hz
9.8 m/s2: Within 9 to 20 Hz
Vibration
2 m/s2: Within 20 to 55 Hz
1 m/s2: Within 55 to 200 Hz
Storage ambient
-25 to 70 C
temperature
Storage ambient
5 to 95% RH (no condensation allowed)
humidity
External dimension Refer to Section 8.4.2 "Standard keypad"
With a keypad rear
Mass 35 grams
cover
(Note) When using an inverter in a place of an altitude within 1000 m to 3000 m, you need to lower the
output current of the inverter. For details, refer to Chapter 2, Section 2.1 “Operating Environment.”
8.3.2 Communications specifications of keypad

Table 8.2 Hardware specifications
Items Specification Remarks
For a remote site
No. of linkable unit One-to-one connection with an inverter
operation.
Extension cable for the
US ANSI TIA/EIA-568A category 5 compliant straight remote site operation
Link cable
type cable (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX straight type) (CB-5S, CB-3S,
CB-1S and etc.)
Maximum cable
20 m
length
Connector Standard RJ-45 connector/jack Refer to Table 8.3
Table 8.3 Pin Assignment of RJ-45 Connector

Pin number Signal Description Remarks
1 and 8 Vcc Power supply lines for keypad 5 VDC
2 and 7 GND Reference potential 0V
3 and 6 NC Reserved
4 DX- RS-485 communications data line (-)
5 DX+ RS-485 communications data line (+)
8-5
8.4 Terminal Specifications
8.4.1 Terminal functions
For details about the main and control circuit terminals, refer to Chapter 2, Section 2.3.5 and Section
2.3.6 (Table 2.9), respectively.
8.4.2 Running the inverter with keypad
(Note 1) When connecting an optional DCR, remove the jumper bar from the terminals [P1] and [P (+)].
(Note 2) Install a recommended MCCB or RCD/ELCB (with overcurrent protection) in the primary circuit of the
inverter to protect wiring. At this time, ensure that the circuit breaker capacity is equivalent to or lower than
the recommended capacity.
(Note 3) Install an MC for each inverter to separate the inverter from the power supply, apart from the MCCB or
RCD/ELCB, when necessary.
Connect a surge killer in parallel when installing a coil such as the MC or solenoid near the inverter.
(Note 4) THR function can be used by assigning code "9" (external alarm) to any of the terminals [X1] to [X5], [FWD]
and [REV] (function code; E01 to E05, E98, or E99).
8-6
8.4.3 Running the inverter by terminal commands
(Note 1) When connecting an optional DCR, remove the jumper bar from the terminals [P1] and [P (+)].
(Note 2) Install a recommended MCCB or RCD/ ELCB (with overcurrent protection) in the primary circuit of the
inverter to protect wiring. At this time, ensure that the circuit breaker capacity is equivalent to or lower than
the recommended capacity.
(Note 3) Install an MC for each inverter to separate the inverter from the power supply, apart from the MCCB or
RCD/ELCB, when necessary.
Connect a surge killer in parallel when installing a coil such as the MC or solenoid near the inverter.
(Note 4) THR function can be used by assigning code "9" (external alarm) to any of the terminals [X1] to [X5], [FWD]
and [REV] (function code: E01 to E05, E98, or E99).
(Note 5) Frequency can be set by connecting a frequency-setting device (external potentiometer) between the
terminals [11], [12] and [13] instead of inputting a voltage signal (0 to +10 VDC, 0 to +5 VDC or +1 to
+5 VDC) between the terminals [12] and [11].
(Note 6) For the control signal wires, use shielded or twisted pair wires. Ground the shielded wires. To prevent
malfunction due to noise, keep the control circuit wiring away from the main circuit wiring as far as possible
(recommended: 10 cm or more). Never install them in the same wire duct. When crossing the control circuit
wiring with the main circuit wiring, set them at right angles.
8-7
8.5 External Dimensions
8.5.1 Standard models
Unit: mm
Power supply Dimensions (mm)

Inverter type
voltage D D1 D2
FRN0.1E1S-2
92 10
Three-phase FRN0.2E1S-2
200 V FRN0.4E1S-2 107 25
FRN0.75E1S-2 132 82 50
FRN0.1E1S-7
92 10
Single-phase FRN0.2E1S-7
200 V FRN0.4E1S-7 107 25
FRN0.75E1S-7 152 102 50
Note: A box ( ) in the above table replaces A, C, E, J, or K depending on
the shipping destination. For three-phase 200 V class series of
inverters, it replaces A, C, J, or K.

Inverter type
voltage D D1 D2
Three-phase FRN0.4E1S-4 126 40
86
400 V FRN0.75E1S-4 150 64
the shipping destination.
8-8
Unit: mm

Inverter type
voltage D D1 D2
200 V FRN2.2E1S-2
150 86
64
400 V FRN2.2E1S-4
Single-phase
FRN1.5E1S-7 160 96
200 V
Power supply voltage Inverter type

Three-phase 200 V FRN3.7E1S-2
FRN3.7E1S-4
Three-phase 400 V
FRN4.0E1S-4E*
Single-phase 200 V FRN2.2E1S-7
* The FRN4.0E1S-4E is for the EU.
8-9
Unit: mm

FRN5.5E1S-2
Three-phase 200 V
FRN7.5E1S-2
FRN5.5E1S-4
Three-phase 400 V
FRN7.5E1S-4

FRN11E1S-2
Three-phase 200 V
FRN15E1S-2
FRN11E1S-4
Three-phase 400 V
FRN55E1S-4
8-10
8.5.2 Models Available on Order (EMC filter built-in type)
Unit: mm
8-11
Unit: mm
8-12
Unit: mm
8-13
8.5.3 Standard keypad
Unit: mm
For remote operation or panel wall-mounting

(The keypad rear cover should be mounted.)
8-14
8.6 Protective Functions
LED Alarm
Name Description monitor output
displays [30A/B/C]
Overcurrent Stops the inverter output to protect the During 0c1 Yes
protection inverter from an overcurrent resulting from acceleration
overload.
Short-circuit Stops the inverter output to protect the
protection inverter from overcurrent due to a
short-circuiting in the output circuit.
During 0c2
deceleration
Ground fault Stops the inverter output to protect the

protection inverter from overcurrent due to a ground
fault in the output circuit. This protection is During running 0c3
effective only during startup of the inverter. If at constant
you turn ON the inverter without removing speed
the ground fault, this protection may not
work.
Overvoltage Stops the inverter output upon detection of During 0u1 Yes
protection an overvoltage condition (400 VDC for acceleration
three-phase 200 V, 800 VDC for three-phase
During 0u2
400 V class series) in the DC link bus.
deceleration
This protection is not assured if extremely
large AC line voltage is applied inadvertently. During running 0u3
at constant
speed (stopped)
Undervoltage Stops the inverter output when the DC link bus voltage drops lu Yes*1
protection below the undervoltage level (200 VDC for three-phase 200 V,
400 VDC for three-phase 400 V class series).
However, if data "4 or 5" is selected for F14, no alarm is output
even if the DC link bus voltage drops.
Input phase Detects input phase loss, stopping the inverter output. This lin Yes
loss protection function prevents the inverter from undergoing heavy stress
that may be caused by input phase loss or inter-phase voltage
unbalance and may damage the inverter.
If connected load is light or a DC reactor is connected to the
inverter, this function will not detect input phase loss if any.
Output phase Detects breaks in inverter output wiring at the start of running 0pl Yes
loss protection and during running, stopping the inverter output.
Overheat Stops the inverter output upon detecting excess heat sink 0h1 Yes
protection temperature in case of cooling fan failure or overload.
Discharging and inverter operation are stopped due to dbh Yes

overheating of an external braking resistor.
* Function codes must be set corresponding to the braking
resistor.
*1 This alarm on [30A/B/C] should be ignored depending upon the function code setting.
8-15
LED Alarm
displays [30A/B/C]
Overload Stops the inverter output if the Insulated Gate Bipolar 0lu Yes
protection Transistor (IGBT) internal temperature calculated from the
output current and temperature of inside the inverter is over
the preset value.
External alarm Places the inverter in alarm-stop state upon receiving digital 0h2 Yes
input input signal THR.
Electronic In the following cases, the inverter stops running the motor to 0l1 Yes
thermal protect the motor in accordance with the electronic thermal 0l2
overload overload protection setting.
- Protects general-purpose motors over the entire frequency
range (F10 = 1.)
- Protects inverter motors over the entire frequency range
(F10 = 2.)
Motor protection
The operation level and thermal time constant can be set by

F11 and F12.
For motor 2, read F10 to F12 as A06 to A08.
PTC A PTC thermistor input stops the inverter output for motor 0h4 Yes
thermistor protection.
Connect a PTC thermistor between terminals [C1] and [11] and
set the function codes and slide switch on the interface PCB
accordingly.
Overload Outputs a preliminary alarm at a preset level before the — —
early inverter is stopped by the electronic thermal overload
warning protection for the motor.
Stall prevention Operates when instantaneous overcurrent limiting is active. — —
Instantaneous overcurrent limiting:
Operates if the inverter's output current exceeds the
instantaneous overcurrent limit level, avoiding tripping of the
inverter (during constant speed operation or during
acceleration).
Alarm relay The inverter outputs a relay contact signal when the inverter — Yes
output issues an alarm and stops the inverter output.
(for any fault) < Alarm reset >
The alarm stop state is reset by pressing the key or by the
digital input signal RST.
< Saving the alarm history and detailed data >
The information on the previous 4 alarms can be saved and
displayed.
Memory error The inverter checks memory data after power-on and when the er1 Yes
detection data is written. If a memory error is detected, the inverter
stops.
Keypad The inverter stops by detecting a communications error er2 Yes
communications between the inverter and the keypad during operation using
error detection the standard keypad or the multi-function keypad (optional).
CPU error If the inverter detects a CPU error or LSI error caused by noise er3 Yes
detection or some other factors, this function stops the inverter.
"—": Not applicable.

8-16
LED Alarm
displays [30A/B/C]
Option Upon detection of an error in the communication between the er4 Yes
communications inverter and an optional card, stops the inverter output.
error detection
Option error When an option card has detected an error, this function stops er5 Yes
detection the inverter output.
Operation STOP Pressing the key on the keypad forces the er6 Yes
protection key inverter to decelerate and stop the motor even if the
priority inverter is running by any run commands given via the
terminals or communications (link operation). After the
motor stops, the inverter issues alarm er6.
Start The inverter prohibits any run operations and displays er6 Yes
check er6 on the 7-segment LED monitor if any run
function command is present when:
- Powering up
- An alarm is released (the key is turned ON or
an alarm reset RST is input.)
- "Enable communications link LE" has been
activated and the run command is active in the
linked source.
Tuning error During tuning of motor parameters, if the tuning has failed or has er7 Yes
detection aborted, or an abnormal condition has been detected in the
tuning result, the inverter stops its output.
RS-485 When the inverter is connected to a communications network er8 Yes
communications via the RS-485 port designed for the keypad, detecting a
error detection communications error stops the inverter output and displays an
error code er8 .
Data save error If the data could not be saved during activation of the erf Yes
during under- undervoltage protection function, the inverter displays the alarm
voltage code.
RS-485 When the inverter is connected to a communications network erp Yes

communications via an optional RS-485 communications card, detecting a
error detection communications error stops the inverter output and displays an
(optional) error code erp .
Retry When the inverter has stopped because of a trip, this function — —
allows the inverter to automatically reset itself and restart. (You
can specify the number of retries and the latency between stop
and reset.)
Surge Protects the inverter against surge voltages which might appear — —
protection between one of the power lines for the main circuit and the
ground.
Command loss Upon detecting a loss of a frequency command (because of a — —
detected broken wire, etc.), this function issues an alarm and continues
the inverter operation at the preset reference frequency
(specified as a ratio to the frequency just before the detection).
"—": Not applicable.
8-17
LED Alarm
displays [30A/B/C]
Protection Upon detecting a momentary power failure lasting more than 15 —- —
against ms, this function stops the inverter output.
momentary
If restart after momentary power failure is selected, this function
power failure
invokes a restart process when power has been restored within
a predetermined period.
Overload In the event of overheating of the heat sink or an overload — —
prevention condition (alarm code: 0h1 or 0lu ), the output frequency of
control the inverter is reduced to keep the inverter from tripping.
Hardware error The inverter is stopped when poor connection between the erh Yes
control printed circuit board (control PCB) and power printed
circuit board (power PCB), interface printed circuit board
(interface PCB) or option card, or short-circuit between
terminals [13] and [11] is detected.
Note）ErH is detected only in turning ON the power supply.
Mock alarm Simulated alarm is output to check the fault sequence. err Yes
PID feedback When the inverter is under PID control, detecting a PID cof Yes
wire break feedback wire break stops the inverter output and displays an
detection error code cof.
—": Not applicable.
8-18
Chapter 9 LIST OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT AND OPTIONS
The table below lists the main peripheral equipment and options that are connected to the
FRENIC-Multi. Use them in accordance with your system requirements.
For details, refer to the FRENIC-Multi User's Manual (MEH457), Chapter 6 "SELECTING
PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT."
Name of
peripheral Function and application
equipment
Molded case MCCBs are designed to protect the power circuits between the power control
circuit breaker board and inverter’s main terminals (L1/R, L2/S and L3/T for three-phase input
(MCCB) power supply, L1/L and L2/N for single-phase input power supply) from
overload or short-circuit which in turn prevents secondary disasters caused by
Residual-current- the inverter malfunctioning.
operated RCDs/ELCBs function in the same way as MCCBs. Use the MCCBs and
protective device RCDs/ELCBs that satisfy the recommended rated current listed below.
(RCD)
/Earth leakage Input Nominal Rated current of
power applied motor Inverter type MCCB and ELCB (A)
circuit breaker
supply (kW ) w/ DCR w/o DCR
(ELCB)*1
0.1 FRN0.1E1 -2
*1 with 0.2 FRN0.2E1 -2 5
5
overcurrent 0.4 FRN0.4E1 -2
protection 0.75 FRN0.75E1 -2 10
Three- 1.5 FRN1.5E1 -2 15
10
phase 2.2 FRN2.2E1 -2 20
200 V 3.7 FRN3.7E1 -2 20 30
5.5 FRN5.5E1 -2 30 50
7.5 FRN7.5E1 -2 40 75
11 FRN11E1 -2 50 100
15 FRN15E1 -2 75 125
0.4 FRN0.4E1 -4
Main peripheral equipment
5
0.75 FRN0.75E1 -4
5
1.5 FRN1.5E1 -4 10
2.2 FRN2.2E1 -4 15
Three-
3.7 FRN3.7E1 -4
phase 10 20
400 V
4.0 FRN4.0E1 -4E * 2
5.5 FRN5.5E1 -4 15 30
7.5 FRN7.5E1 -4 20 40
11 FRN11E1 -4 30 50
15 FRN15E1 -4 40 60
0.1 FRN0.1E1 -7
5
0.2 FRN0.2E1 -7 5
Single-
0.4 FRN0.4E1 -7 10
phase
0.75 FRN0.75E1 -7 10 15
200 V
1.5 FRN1.5E1 -7 15 20
2.2 FRN2.2E1 -7 20 30
*2 The FRN4.0E1S-4E is for the EU.
Note 2) A box ( ) in the above table replaces A, C, E, J, or K depending on the
shipping destination. For three-phase 200 V class series of inverters, it
replaces A, C, J, or K.
Select the MCCB or RCD/ELCB with appropriate breaking capacity according
to the power supply capacity.
When connecting the inverter to the power supply, add a recommended

molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or residual-current-operated
protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) (with
overcurrent protection) in the path of power supply. Do not use the
devices with the rated current out of the recommenced range.
Fire could occur.
9-1
Name of
peripheral Function and application
equipment
Magnetic An MC can be used at both the power input (primary) and output (secondary)
contactor (MC) sides of the inverter. At each side, the MC works as described below. When
inserted in the output circuit of the inverter, an MC can also switch the motor
drive power supply between the inverter output and commercial power lines.
At the power supply (primary) side
Insert an MC in the power supply side of the inverter in order to:
1) Forcibly cut off the inverter from the power supply (generally,
commercial/factory power lines) with the protection function built into the
inverter, or with the terminal signal line.
2) Stop the inverter operation in an emergency when the inverter cannot
interpret the stop command due to internal/external circuit failures.
3) Cut off the inverter from the power supply when the MCCB inserted in the
power supply side cannot cut it off for maintenance or inspection purpose.
If you are to use the MC for this purpose only, it is recommended that you
Main peripheral equipment
use an MC capable of turning the MC ON/OFF manually.

Note: When your system requires the motor(s) driven by the inverter to be
started/stopped with the MC, the frequency of the starting/stopping operation
should be once or less per hour. The more frequent the operation, the shorter
operation life of the MC and capacitor/s used in the DC link bus due to thermal
fatigue caused by the frequent charging of the current flow. If this is not
necessary, start/stop the motor with the terminal commands FWD/REV or with
the keypad.
At the output (secondary) side
Prevent externally turned-around current from being applied to the inverter
power output terminals (U, V, and W) unexpectedly. An MC should be used, for
example, if a circuit that switches the motor driving source between the inverter
output and commercial/factory power lines is connected to the inverter.
Note: As application of high voltage external current to the inverter's output
side may break the IGBTs, MCs should be used in the power control system
circuits to switch the motor drive power supply to the commercial/factory power
lines after the motor has come to a complete stop. Also ensure that voltage is
never mistakenly applied to the inverter output terminals due to unexpected
timer operation, or similar.
Driving the motor using commercial power lines
MCs can also be used to switch the power supply of the motor driven by the
inverter to a commercial power supply.
9-2
Name of option Function and application
DC reactors A DCR is mainly used for power supply matching and for input power factor
(DCRs) correction (for reduction of harmonics).
1) For power supply matching
- Use a DCR when the capacity of a power supply transformer exceeds 500
kVA. In this case, the percentage-reactance of the power supply
decreases, and harmonic components and their peak levels increase.
These factors may break rectifiers or capacitors in the converter section
of inverter, or decrease the capacitance of the capacitor (which can
shorten the inverter’s service life).
- Also use a DCR when there are thyristor-driven loads or when
phase-advancing capacitors are being turned ON/OFF.
2) For input power factor correction (reduction of harmonics)
Generally a capacitor is used to correct the power factor of the load,
however, it cannot be used in a system that includes an inverter. Using a
DCR increases the reactance of inverter’s power supply so as to decrease
harmonic components on the power supply lines and correct the power
factor of inverter. Using a DCR reforms the input power factor to
approximately 90 to 95%.
Note: At the time of shipping, a jumper bar is connected across the terminals
P1 and P (+) on the terminal block. Remove the jumper bar when connecting a
DCR.
Output circuit Include an OFL in the inverter power output (secondary) circuit to:
filters 1) Suppress the surge voltage at motor terminal
(OFLs) This protects the motor from insulation damage caused by the application of
high surge voltage.
2) Suppress leakage current from the power output lines (due to harmonic
Main option
components)
This reduces the leakage current when the motor is hooked by long power
feed lines. It is recommended that the length of the power feed line be kept
to less than 400 m.
3) Minimize emission and/or induction noise issued from the power output
lines
OFLs are effective in reducing noise from long power feed lines, such as
those used in plants, etc.
Note: Use an output circuit (secondary) filter of OFL- - A.
Zero-phase An ACL is used to reduce radio noise emitted by the inverter.
reactors for An ACL suppresses the outflow of high frequency noise caused by switching
reducing radio operation for the power supply (primary) lines inside the inverter. Pass the
frequency noise power supply lines together through the ACL for 4 turns (coiled 3 times).
(ACL) Use 4 ACLs and let the power supply lines pass through them when the sizes
of the power supply lines are large.
If wiring length between the inverter and motor is less than 20 m, insert an ACL
to the power supply (primary) lines; if it is more than 20 m, insert it to the power
output (secondary) lines of the inverter.
AC Reactor This optional feature must be connected to the primary side (commercial
(ACR) power supply side) of the inverter, when the inter-phase unbalance factor of
the commercial power supply is 2% to 3%.
Max. voltage (V) Min. voltage (V)
Voltage unbalance (%) = × 67
In case the inter-phase unbalance factor of the commercial power supply
exceeds 3%, you would need to take other measures such as increasing
the capacity of the inverter. Consult your Fuji Electric representative.
In a DC link bus system (using terminals [P (+)] and [N (-)]), the AC reactor
protects the inverter against damage caused by unbalance in current.
Braking resistors A braking resistor converts regenerative energy generated from deceleration
(DBRs) of the motor and converts it to heat for consumption. Use of a braking resistor
results in improved deceleration performance of the inverter.
9-3
Name of option Function and application
External An external potentiometer may be used to set the drive frequency. Connect the
potentiometer for potentiometer to control signal terminals [11] to [13] of the inverter.
frequency
commands
Options for Operation and Communications
Multi-function Allows you to monitor the status of the inverter including voltage, current, and
keypad input power, as well as to set various parameters in a conversational mode.
Equipped with a liquid crystal display (LCD).
Also allows you to copy function code data from one FRENIC-Multi inverter to
another.
Extension cable The extension cable connects the RS-485 communications port (standard)
for remote with a keypad or an RS-485–USB converter.
keypad operation Three lengths are available: 5 m, 3 m and 1 m
RS-485 This makes communication to a PLC or personal computer system easy.

Communications (Option)
card
This has a pair of RJ-45 connectors that acts as a transfer port for a multidrop
network configuration without using a branch adapter.
RS-485–USB A converter that allows connection of an RS-485 communications port to a

converter USB port on a PC.
Inverter support Inverter support loader software, Windows GUI (Graphics User Interface)
loader software based, that makes setting of function codes easy.
Surge absorbers A surge absorber suppresses surge currents and noise from the magnetic
contactors, mini-relays and timers, and protects the inverter from
malfunctioning.
Other peripheral equipment
Surge killers A surge killer eliminates surge currents induced by lightening and noise from
the power supply lines. Use of a surge killer is effective in preventing the
electronic equipment, including inverters, from damage or malfunctioning
caused by such surges and/or noise.
Arresters An arrester suppresses surge currents and noise invaded from the power
supply lines. Use of an arrester is effective in preventing electronic equipment,
including inverters, from damage or malfunctioning caused by such surges
and/or noise.
Frequency meter Displays the frequency in accordance with signal output from the inverter.
Panel-mount FRENIC-Multi series of inverters can be installed to your system panel or

adapter equipment using mounting adapters which utilize the mounting holes used for
conventional inverters of FVR-E11S series.
Other options
(Three-phase 200 V: 0.1 to 0.75 and 3.7/4.0 kW, Three-phase 400 V: 3.7/4.0
kW, Single-phase 200 V: 0.1 to 0.4 and 2.2 kW)
Mounting adapter This adapter allows you to mount your FRENIC-Multi series of inverters on the
for external panel in such a way that the heat sink assembly may be exposed to the
cooling outside. Using this adapter greatly reduces heat radiated or spread inside your
panel.
Applicable only to inverters with a capacity of 5.5 to 15 kW.
9-4
Chapter 10 COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS
10.1 Compliance with UL Standards and Canadian Standards (cUL certification)
10.1.1 General
Originally, the UL standards were established by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as private criteria
for inspections/investigations pertaining to fire/accident insurance in the USA. Later, these
standards were authorized as the official standards to protect operators, service personnel and the
general populace from fires and other accidents in the USA.
cUL certification means that UL has given certification for products to clear CSA Standards. cUL
certified products are equivalent to those compliant with CSA Standards.
10.1.2 Considerations when using FRENIC-Multi in systems to be certified by UL and cUL
If you want to use the FRENIC-Multi series of inverters as a part of UL Standards or CSA
Standards (cUL certified) certified product, refer to the related guidelines described on page viii.
10.2 Compliance with European Standards

The CE marking on Fuji products indicates that they comply with the essential requirements of the
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Directive 2006/95/EC and Low Voltage Directive
2004/108/EC issued by the Council of the European Communities.
If connected with a specified external EMC filter, Fuji inverters that bear a CE marking but have no
built-in EMC filter become compliant with these EMC Directives.
Inverters that bear a CE marking are compliant with the Low Voltage Directive.
The products comply with the following standards:

Low Voltage Directive EN50178: 1997
EMC Directives EN61800-3: 2004
Immunity: Second environment (Industrial)
Emission: See below.
Capacity of inverter
EMC filter
2.2 kW or below 3.7/4.0 kW 5.5 kW or above
Three-phase External Category C2
200 V class series Built-in Category C2 Category C3
Three-phase External Category C3
400 V class series Built-in Category C2 Category C3
Single-phase External Category C3 ―
200 V class series Built-in Category C2 ―
CAUTION
When you use FRENIC-Multi inverters categorized as "Category C2" of the EN61800-3 in a
domestic environment, you may need to take appropriate countermeasures to reduce or eliminate
any noise emitted from these inverters.
FRENIC-Multi inverters categorized as "Category C3" of the EN61800-3 are not designed for use
in a domestic environment. These inverters may interfere with the operations of home appliances
or office equipment due to noise emitted from them.
10-1
10.3 Compliance with EMC Standards
10.3.1 General
The CE marking on inverters does not ensure that the entire equipment including our CE-marked
products is compliant with the EMC Directive. Therefore, CE marking for the equipment shall be
the responsibility of the equipment manufacturer. For this reason, Fuji’s CE mark is indicated under
the condition that the product shall be used within equipment meeting all requirements for the
relevant Directives. Instrumentation of such equipment shall be the responsibility of the equipment
manufacturer.
Generally, machinery or equipment includes not only our products but other devices as well.
Manufacturers, therefore, shall design the whole system to be compliant with the relevant
Directives.
In addition, to satisfy the requirements noted above, use a Fuji FRENIC inverter in connection with
an EMC-compliant filter (optional feature) in accordance with the instructions contained in this
instruction manual. Installing the inverter(s) in a metal enclosure may be necessary, depending
upon the operating environment of the equipment that the inverter is to be used with.
Our EMC compliance test is performed under the following conditions.

- Motor Sound (carrier frequency) (F26): 15 kHz
- Wiring length (of the shielded cable) between the inverter and motor: 10 m
10.3.2 Recommended installation procedure
To make the machinery or equipment fully compliant with the EMC Directive, have certified
technicians wire the motor and inverter in strict accordance with the procedure described below.
In the case of EMC filter built-in type of inverters with a capacity of 4.0 kW or below
1) Mount the EMC grounding flange (that comes with the inverter) to the inverter with screws in
order to ground the wire shield(s). (See Figure 10.1.)
Figure 10.1 Attaching the EMC Grounding Flange
2) Use shielded wires for the motor cable and route it as short as possible. Firmly clamp the wire
shield to the flange to ground it. Further, connect the wire shield electrically to the grounding
terminal of motor. (See Figure 10.2.)
3) Use shielded wire for connection around the control terminals of the inverter and also for
connection of the signal cable of an RS-485 Communications. As with the motor, clamp the
shield wire firmly to a grounded plate. (See Figure 10.2.)
10-2
4) In the case of FRN0.75E1E-7 , motor cable shall be wired through the ring core (that comes
with the inverter), and the ring core shall be fixed by the EMC grounding flange.
* For FRN0.75E1E-7 , a ring core

comes with the inverter.
Figure 10.2 Connecting Shielded Cables
5) If noise from the inverter exceeds the permissible level, enclose the inverter and its peripherals
within a metal enclosure as shown in Figure 10.3.
FRENIC-Multi
Figure 10.3 Installing the EMC Filter Built-in Type of Inverters into a Metal Enclosure
10-3
In the case of inverters with an external EMC-compliant filter (optional)
1) Install the inverter and the filter on a grounded metal plate. Use a shielded cable also for
connection of the motor. Make the cables as short as possible. Connect the shield wire firmly to
the metal plate. Also connect the shield wire electrically to the grounding terminal of the motor.
For the inverters from 5.5 to 15 kW, install them in a metal enclosure to comply with the EMC
directive.
2) Use shielded wire for connection around the control terminals of the inverter and also for
connection of the signal cable of an RS-485 Communications Card. As with the motor, clamp
the shield wire firmly to a grounded plate.
3) If noise from the inverter exceeds the permissible level, enclose the inverter and its peripherals
within a metal enclosure as shown in Figure 10.4.
FRENIC-Multi
Figure 10.4 Installing the Inverter with an External EMC-compliant Filter (Optional) into a Metal Enclosure
10-4
10.3.3 Leakage current from EMC-filter built-in type inverters or inverters with an external
EMC-complaint filter (optional)
Table 10.1 Leakage Current from EMC Filter Built-in Type Inverter
Leakage current (mA) *2)

Input power Inverter type *1)
Normal Worst *3)
FRN0.1E1E-2
FRN0.2E1E-2
7.5 7.5
FRN0.4E1E-2
FRN0.75E1E-2
FRN1.5E1E-2
Three-phase 13.0 20.0
FRN2.2E1E-2
200 V
FRN3.7E1E-2
FRN5.5E1E-2
FRN7.5E1E-2
21.0 21.0
FRN11E1E-2
FRN15E1E-2
FRN0.4E1E-4
5.4 33.0
FRN0.75E1E-4
FRN1.5E1E-4
FRN2.2E1E-4 3.8 25.0
Three-phase FRN3.7E1E-4
400 V FRN4.0E1E-4E
FRN5.5E1E-4
3.8 11.7
FRN7.5E1E-4
FRN11E1E-4
6.8 22.3
FRN15E1E-4
FRN0.1E1E-7
FRN0.2E1E-7
8.3 8.3
Single-phase FRN0.4E1E-7
200 V FRN0.75E1E-7
FRN1.5E1E-7
4.1 8.2
FRN2.2E1E-7
*1) A box ( ) in the above table replaces A, C, E, J, or K depending on the shipping destination.
*2) The values are calculated assuming the power supplies of three-phase 240 V (50 Hz), three-
phase 400 V (50 Hz), and single-phase 230 V (50 Hz).
*3) The worst condition includes a phase loss in the supply line.
10-5
Table 10.2 Leakage Current from Inverters with an External EMC-complaint Filter (Optional)
Leakage current (mA) *2)

Input power Inverter type *1) Filter type
Normal Worst *3)
FRN0.1E1S-2
FRN0.2E1S-2
EFL-0.75E11-2 3.0 3.0
FRN0.4E1S-2
FRN0.75E1S-2
FRN1.5E1S-2
Three-phase EFL-4.0E11-2 3.0 3.0
FRN2.2E1S-2
200 V
FRN3.7E1S-2
FRN5.5E1S-4
EFL-7.5E11-2 11 11
FRN7.5E1S-4
FRN11E1S-4
EFL-15SP-2 20 20
FRN015E1S-4
FRN0.4E1S-4
FRN0.75E1S-4
FRN1.5E1S-4 15TDHS84 4.0 27.0
FRN2.2E1S-4
400 V FRN4.0E1S-4E
FRN5.5E1S-4
FN3011-30-61 0.4 3.1
FRN7.5E1S-4
FRN11E1S-4
FN301150-62 0.4 3.1
FRN015E1S-4
FRN0.1E1S-7
FRN0.2E1S-7
Single-phase FRN0.4E1S-7
30DKCS5 1.0 1.8
200 V FRN0.75E1S-7
FRN1.5E1S-7
FRN2.2E1S-7
*1) A box ( ) in the above table replaces A, C, J or K depending on the shipping destination for three-
phase 200 V and FRN3.7E1S-4 .
A box ( ) in the above table replaces A, C, E, J or K depending on the shipping destination for single-
phase 200 V and three-phase 400 V class series except FRN3.7E1S-4 .
*2) The values are calculated assuming the power supplies of three-phase 240 V (50 Hz), three-phase
400 V (50 Hz), and single-phase 230 V (50 Hz).
*3) The worst condition includes a phase loss in the supply line.
10-6
10.4 Harmonic Component Regulation in the EU
10.4.1 General comments
When you use general-purpose industrial inverters in the EU, the harmonics emitted from the
inverter to power lines are strictly regulated as stated below.
If an inverter whose rated input is 1 kW or less is connected to public low-voltage power supply, it
is regulated by the harmonics emission regulations from inverters to power lines (with the
exception of industrial low-voltage power lines). Refer to Figure 10.5 below for details.
Figure 10.5 Power Source and Regulation
10-7
10.4.2 Compliance with the harmonic component regulation
Table 10.3 Compliance with Harmonic Component Regulation

Power supply Applicable
Inverter type w/o DC reactor w/ DC reactor
voltage DC reactor type
FRN0.1E1 -2 * * DCR2-0.2
Three-phase FRN0.2E1 -2 * * DCR2-0.2
200 V FRN0.4E1 -2 * * DCR2-0.4
FRN0.75E1 -2 * * DCR2-0.75
Three-phase FRN0.4E1 -4 — DCR4-0.4
400 V FRN0.75E1 -4 — DCR4-0.75
FRN0.1E1 -7 — DCR2-0.2
Single-phase FRN0.2E1 -7 — DCR2-0.4
200 V FRN0.4E1 -7 — DCR2-0.75
FRN0.75E1 -7 — — DCR2-1.5
* When supplying three-phase 200 VAC power stepped down from a three-phase 400 VAC power line
using a transformer, the level of harmonic flow from the 400 VAC line will be regulated.
Note 2) A box ( ) in the above table replaces A, C, E, J or K depending on the shipping destination.
Note 3) Inverter types marked with in the table above are compliant with the EN61000-3-2 (+A14), so they may
be connected to public low-voltage power supply unconditionally.
Conditions apply when connecting models marked with “—“. If you want to connect them to public low-
voltage power supply, you need to obtain permission from the local electric power supplier. In general,
you will need to provide the supplier with the harmonics current data of the inverter. To obtain the data,
consult your Fuji Electric representative.
10.5 Compliance with the Low Voltage Directive in the EU

10.5.1 General
General-purpose inverters are regulated by the Low Voltage Directive in the EU. Fuji Electric states
that all our inverters with CE or TÜV mark are compliant with the Low Voltage Directive.
10.5.2 Points for consideration when using the FRENIC-Multi series in a system to be
certified by the Low Voltage Directive in the EU
If you want to use the FRENIC-Multi series of inverters in systems/equipment in the EU, refer to
the guidelines on page vi.
10-8
High Performance Compact Inverter
Instruction manual
First Edition, March 2006
Fourth Edition, April 2011
Fuji Electric Co., Ltd.
The purpose of this instruction manual is to provide accurate information in handling, setting up and
operating of the FRENIC-Multi series of inverters. Please feel free to send your comments regarding
any errors or omissions you may have found, or any suggestions you may have for generally
improving the manual.
In no event will Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. be liable for any direct or indirect damages resulting from the
application of the information in this manual.
Fuji Electric Co., Ltd.
Gate City Ohsaki, East Tower, 11-2, Osaki 1-chome, Shinagawa-ku, Tokyo 141-0032, Japan
URL http://www.fujielectric.com/
2011-04 (D11c/C06) 30CM

Instruction Manual: High Performance Compact Inverter

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Instruction Manual: High Performance Compact Inverter

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Instruction Manual: High Performance Compact Inverter

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Instruction Manual

High Performance Compact Inverter

Thank you for purchasing our FRENIC-Multi series of inverters.

Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. INR-SI47-1094c-E

Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may

Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may

• FRENIC-Multi is designed to drive a three-phase induction motor. Do not use it for

• Install the inverter on a nonflammable material such as metal.

• Do not place flammable object nearby.

• Do not install or operate an inverter that is damaged or lacking parts.

• Do not get on a shipping box.

• Qualified electricians should carry out wiring.

• Be sure to perform wiring after installing the inverter body.

• Do not operate switches with wet hands.

Wiring length for EMC filter built-in type

• Treat the inverter as an industrial waste when disposing of it.

• Never attempt to modify the inverter.

3. When you use a residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit

10. Use wires listed in IEC60364-5-52.

2.2 FRN2.2E1 -2 20 0.5

2.2 FRN2.2E1 -4 15 2.5 2.5 2.5

MCCB: Molded case circuit breaker RCD: Residual-current-operated protective device

3. Use 75 C Cu wire only.

4. Use Class 1 wire only for control circuits.

6. Short circuit rating

Circuit breaker (A)

EMC filter built-in type

Circuit breaker (A)

FRN5.5E1E-2 Output: 33.6 (3.8) 8 50

Torque When the inverter is used to run a general-purpose motor,

High-speed If the reference frequency is set to 120 Hz or more to drive a

Explosion-proof When driving an explosion-proof motor with an inverter, use a

If the power transmission mechanism uses an oil-lubricated

Use the inverter within the ambient temperature range from

Install a recommended molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)

If a magnetic contactor (MC) is mounted in the inverter's

The electronic thermal function of the inverter can protect the

When checking the insulation resistance of the inverter, use

When using remote control, limit the wiring length between

Select wires with a sufficient capacity by referring to the

When several inverters drive motors, do not use one

Grounding Securely ground the inverter using the grounding terminal.

Select an inverter according to the nominal applied motor

Driving special Select an inverter that meets the following condition:

When exporting an inverter built in a panel or equipment, pack them in a previously

This manual is made up of chapters 1 through 10.

Chapter 2 MOUNTING AND WIRING OF THE INVERTER

Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD

Chapter 4 RUNNING THE MOTOR

Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES

Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

Chapter 9 LIST OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT AND OPTIONS

Chapter 10 COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS

Chapter 9 LIST OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

Chapter 10 COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS . 10-1

(a) Main Nameplate (b) Sub Nameplate

Figure 1.2 Outside and Inside Views of Inverters (FRN15E1S-2 )

(2) Warning plates and label

Figure 1.3 Warning Plate and Sub Nameplate